HomeMy WebLinkAbout07-78 RESOLUTIONRESOLUTION NO. -7-'7t
A RESOLUTION AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR AND CITY CLERK TO
EXECUTE AN ENGINEERING CONTRACT WITH McCLELLAND CONSULTING
ENGINEERS, INC. FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF IMPROVEMENTS TO
DRAKE FIELD.
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF THE CITY
OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS:
That the Mayor and City Clerk are hereby authorized to
execute an engineering contract with McClelland Consulting
Engineers, Inc. for the construction of improvements at
Drake Field. A copy of said contract, marked Exhibit "A",
is attached hereto and made a part hereof.
PASSED AND APPROVED THIS % DAY OF FEBRUARY, 1978.
r .
v4� s >• It
_
9
.
tr4 C -t% 7;:'. CITY CLERK
APPROVED:
MAYOR
MICROFILMED
DATEROFOCT 2 .0 1974
REEL kL
wiplam
WITNESSETH:
That for and in consideration of the mutual covenants and agree-
ments between the parties hereto, it hereby agreed:
SECTION A - ENGINEERING SERVICES
That the ENGINEER shall furnish basic engineering services as
follows:
1. The ENGINEER will prepare and submit all documents
necessary to the Federal Aviation Administration for its
consideration of Federal participation in the cost
of the project.
2 The ENGINEER will conduct preliminary investigations
and testing as follows:
In order to accomplish Item 3, above, the ENGINEER,
through his laboratory facilities, will perform tests
on the soils from the site. Pavement design will
be accomplished on the basis of soil characteristics
determined.
3. The ENGINEER will prepare detailed plans, specifications
and cost estimates showing break -down of FAA participation
and local share.
4. The ENGINEER will attend conferences with the OWNER
and other interested parties, and will coordinate his
work with that of the architect designing the terminal
building.
-2-
•
5. Prior to the advertisement for bids, the ENGINEER will
provide no more than ten (10) copies of detailed plans,
specifications, and contract documents for approval and
use by the OWNER and the Federal Aviation Administration.
The cost of no more than ten (10) copies of such plans,
specifications, and contract documents shall be included
in the basic
sets will be
($25.00) per
compensation paid to the ENGINEER. Additional
furnished at a cost of
set, in the event they
twenty-five dollars
are requested.
6. The ENGINEER will furnish additional copies of plans,
specifications and contract documents as required by
prospective bidders, material suppliers, and other
interested parties, but may charge for the actual cost
of such copies. Original documents, tracings, and the
like, except those previously owned by the ENGINEER,
are and shall remain the property of the OWNER.
7. The plans prepared by the ENGINEER under the provisions
of Section A 3 above shall be in sufficient detail to
permit the actual location of the proposed improvements
on the ground, and shall be sufficient for the bidders
to formulate intelligent bids and for construction
of every detail of the project.
8. The ENGINEER will attend the bid opening and tabulate
the bid proposals, make an analysis of the bids, and
make recommendations for awarding contracts for con-
struction.
•
•
\IMO EL
9. The ENGINEER,will check and approve any necessary
shop and working drawings furnished by contractors.
10. The ENGINEER will interpret the intent of the plans
and specifications to protect the OWNER against defects
and deficiencies in construction on the part of the
contractors. The ENGINEER will not, however, guarantee
the performance by any contractor.
11. The ENGINEER will provide horizontal and vertical control
for all structures in the form of bench marks or
reference points to be used by the contractor in performing
the construction.
12. The ENGINEER will provide general construction observation
of the work of the contractors as construction progresses.
In order to maintain control during the construction
phase, the ENGINEER will perform such laboratory and
field-tests as deemed necessary. The extent of such
testing will be determined by conference with the OWNER
and/or representatives of the Federal Aviation Administration.
13. The ENGINEER will review and approve estimates for
progress and final payments.
14. The ENGINEER will make final review of all construction
and a written certification of same to the OWNER.
15. The ENGINEER will provide the OWNER and the Federal
Aviation Administration with three (3) sets and two (2)
-4-
•
sets respectively, of "AS -BUILT" prints at no additional
cost to the OWNER. A reproducible, updated airport plan
and six (6) copies thereof will be furnished to the Federal
Aviation Administration. Two (2) copies of said plan
will be furnished at no additionalcost to the OWNER.
16. The ENGINEER will be available to furnish engineering
service and consultations necessary to correct all
unforeseen project operating difficulties for a period
of one year after the date of final inspection and
acceptance of the facility by the OWNER.
17. At the discretion of the OWNER and/or the Federal
Aviation Administration, the ENGINEER will perform
resident observation of all phases of construction
to assure compliance with the intent of the plans and
specifications. The performance hereunder will be in
addition to general observation of construction described
in Section A, Paragraph 12, above.
18. The ENGINEER further agrees to obtain and maintain at
the ENGINEER'S expense, such insurance as will protect
him and the OWNER from claims under the Workman's Compen-
sation Act and from all claims for bodily injury, death,
or property damage which may arise from the negligent
performance by the ENGINEER or by the ENGINEER'S
employees, of the ENGINEER'S functions and services
required under this Agreement, such insurance being that
-5-
normally covered by General Liability and Public
Liability/Property Damage insurance.
19. The ENGINEER will commence the work within ten (10) days
from execution of this contract and its approval by the
Federal Aviation Administration, and will have Plans
and Specifications completed, ready for advertising
and receiving bids within ninety (90) calendar days
therefrom.
SECTION B - COMPENSATION FOR ENGINEERING SERVICES
That the OWNER shall compensate the ENGINEER for engineering
services based upon the following schedule:
DETAILED PLANNING & DESIGN: For all services described in Section
A, Paragraphs 1 through 8, except those services pertaining to
soil investigation, the sum of Thirty eight thousand five hundred
dollars ($38,500.00). For soil investigation, described in Section
A, Paragraph 2, the following schedule shall apply for test work
actually needed and performed:
1. Vertical drilling
2. Sampling during drilling
3. Unconfined compression testing
4. Modified Proctor curves
5. Atterburg Limit determinations
6. Sieve analysis
7. Hydrometer Tests
8. Unified soil classification
9. Lime Treatability Determinations
$ 5.50
$ 5.00
$25.00
$60.00
$30.00
$ 5.00
$75.00
$60.00
$85.00
per foot
each
per sample
per curve
each
per sieve
each
each
each
Compensation for soil investigations will be payable upon
completion of all soil testing and analysis. Compensation for
the remainder of services contained in Section A, Paragraphs 1
through 8 will be due and payable upon completion of the detailed
plans and specifications, approval of same by the OWNER and the
Federal Aviation Administration, and after bids have been received
for construction.
GENERAL & RESIDENT CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION: For the performance
of services in Section A, Paragraphs 9 through 16, except con-
struction control testing in the field and laboratory, the sum of
Six thousand seven hundred fifty dollars ($6,750.00). For field
and laboratory controls of soil, concrete and asphalt work during
the construction phase, the following schedule will apply:
1. Modified Proctor curves, soils and base
material, including sampling,
per curve
$60.00
2. Field Density determinations, subgrade,
base and asphalt,
per test (min. of 3 per trip) $13.50
3. Concrete compressive testing,
per cylinder
4. Marshall stability determinations,
asphalt,
$ 8.50
per test $35.00
-7-
•
•
5. Asphalt content determinations,
per test $18.00
It is hereby agreed that the costs for all tests which fail
to meet the construction specification requirements shall be
borne by the contractor, and the construction specifications
will so state.
For the performance of resident observation of the construction
work, Section A, Paragraph 17, the sum of Thirteen thousand
two hundred fifty dollars ($13,250.00).
Compensation for services performed under Section A, Paragraphs
9 through 16, shall be due and payable in monthly installments,
based upon the monthly estimate prepared to pay the construction
contractors, the final incremental amount to be payable upon
completion and final acceptance of the construction work.
Compensation for field and laboratory construction control
testing shall be due and payable on a monthly basis, after sub-
mission of reports of testing performed during each month.
Compensation for resident observation of construction work,
Section A, Paragraph 17, shall be due and payable in monthly
installments
construction
payable upon
work.
based upon the monthly estimate prepared to pay the
contractors, the final incremental amount to be
completion and final acceptance of the construction
OVERTIME ENGINEERING: The construction contract will contain a
completion time'expressed in calendar days. Should the construction
-8-
•
•
require additional time and result in a requirement for additional
services; payment for these services shall be made in accordance
with the methods and schedules given in Section C.
SECTION C - ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES
The OWNER may wish to increase the engineering services
herein to include those needed for additional construction work,
additional surveys, legal descriptions, overtime engineering,
or any services not specifically included in the scope of this
contract. In such event, it is mutually agreed that compensation
for such services shall be determined by the following hourly schedule:
FIELD PERSONNEL:
Three-man party (Surveying)
Two-man party
ENGINEERING:
Principal or Officer of Firm
Project Engineer
Engineering Aide/Inspector
$33.00/hour
$23.00/hour
$35.00/hour
$30.00/hour
$20.00/hour
DRAFTSMAN:
$12.00/hour
OFFICE PERSONNEL:
Secretarial/Clerical $10.00/hour
SECTION D - ENGINEERING FEE CATEGORIES
Engineering services described herein above encompass all
work to be performed, and fees delineated represent total fees for
for services described. The total project is made up of increments
-9-
•
.may • . • b
•
according to federal participation and project identification
applying thereto. It is herebyagreed that engineering fees shall
be allocated as shown on Appendix B, attached hereto and made
a part of this contract.
SECTION E - TERMINATION
In the event the ENGINEER, due to causes beyond his control,
shall become unable to complete the contract provisions herein,
the OWNER, after receipt of written notification from the ENGINEER,
may void the contract and employ another engineer to complete
the work. In such event, all notes, calculations, drawings,
specifications and all other data developed and accumulated by
the ENGINEER pertaining to the work hereunder shall be released
to the OWNER for the OWNER'S disposition. Compensation due the
ENGINEER will be determined by unit prices established in Section
C, hereunder.
In the event the ENGINEER shall breach the contract hereunder,
shall fail to perform the delineated tasks hereunder, .or shall
not perform the contract in a manner suitable to the OWNER, the
OWNER may terminate this contract by written notice, effective
at the time of receipt of notice by the ENGINEER. In such event,
all notes, calculations, drawings, specifications and all other
data developed and accumulated by the ENGINEER pertaining to the
work hereunder shall be released to the OWNER for the OWNER's
disposition. Compensation due to the ENGINEER under any one of
the circumstances stated will be determined by the unit prices
-10-
established in Section C, hereunder, with the added provision
that such compensation shall not exceed the arithmetic difference
between the contract price hereunder and the total monies actually
to be paid another engineer who has been employed to complete the
work.
It is expressly agreed that the basis for this contract lies
in the mutual confidence existing between the OWNER and the ENGINEER.
Therefore, it is the intent that this contract shall be continued
and consummated by the parties hereto. The termination paragraphs
herein are provided in the unlikely event such described conditions
should occur.
SECTION F - ACCESS TO RECORDS
It is further agreed that the OWNER, the Federal Aviation
Administration, the Comptroller General of the United States,
or any of their duly authorized representatives, shall have
access to any books, documents, papers and records of the ENGINEER
which are directly pertinent to the work hereunder, for the purpose
of making audit, examination, excerpts and/or transcriptions.
SECTION G - ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
In executing this contract the ENGINEER acknowledges that
he has visited the site of the work, that he is familiar with
conditions and characteristics of the site, and that he fully
understands the nature, extent and character of the project and
the time limitations placed thereupon. He further states that
he has discussed the proposed work with the representative of the
OWNER.
-12-
This AGREEMENT shall inure to the benefits of and be binding
upon legal representative and successors of the parties respec-
tively and shall become effective upon execution.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed, or
caused to be executed by their duly authorized officials, this
AGREEMENT in duplicate on the date heretofore stated.
I v n,,,,
(.SEAL)! <.
E ;ATTEST•
Typeo,Name Darlene
Title City Clerk
. ;.,1 . r !',
•
,(SEAL) d?
':-.41, ATT,EST't
(' .) '.
'Y, .By -y ,.' '11 '%latattac.
Q, bh ea eavd,
Type Name Maurice A. McClelland
Title Sec'y - Treas.
-14-
OWNER:
CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE
By
Type Name Ernest Lancaster
Title Mayor
ENGINEER:
McCLELLAND CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC.
By
pe Name J. E. McClelland
Title President
The ENGINEER hereby states that he has and will comply with
the requirements specified in Title IV of the Civil Rights Act
of 1964 and in CFR Part. 7.
The ENGINEER hereby states that he has performed planning
and design engineering on previous airport projects, as well as
other projects of a similar nature, that through his laboratory
facilities, he has previously performed pertinent work on other
airport projects, as well as other projects of a similar nature,
and that he has the staff and capabilities to perform the work
described herein, in a professional and timely manner.
The ENGINEER hereby acknowledges the requirement for execution
of a cerfitication pertaining to his employment to provide services
hereunder, has signed such certificate, and same is appended and
becomes a part of this contract. (Appendix A).
The ENGINEER further acknowledges that he is not to perform
any work hereunder until the OWNER has executed the Grant Offer
from the Federal Aviation Administration.
-13-
tr
APPENDIX A
TO AGREEMENT FOR ENGINEERING SERVICES
Airport Development Aid Project Numbers 6-05-0020-06 & 6-05-0020-08
State of Arkansas
CERTIFICATION OF ENGINEER
I hereby certify that I am the President and duly authorized
representative of the firm of McClelland Consulting Engineers,
Inc., whose address is 1810 North College Avenue, Fayetteville,
Arkansas, and that neither I nor the above firm I here represent
has:
a. employed or retained for a commission, percentage,
brokerage, contingent fee, or other consideration,
any firm or person (other than a bona fide employee
working solely for me or the above consultant) to
solicit or secure this contract,
b. agreed, as an express or implied condition for obtaining
this contract, to employ or retain the services of any
firm or person in connection with carrying out the
contract, or
c. paid or agreed to pay to any firm, organization, or
person (other than a bona fide employee working solely
for me or the above consultant) any fee, contribution,
donation, or consideration of any kind for, or in
connection with, procuring or carrying out the contract.
I acknowledge that this certificate is to be furnished to the
Federal Aviation Administration of the United States' Department
of Transportation, in connection with this contract involving
participation of Airport Development Aid Program (ADAP) funds
and is subject to applicable state and federal laws, both criminal
and civil.
c2 7— , 1978
E. McClelland, P.E.
1
1
1
1
1
1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
1
1
1
1
1
CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
`rER'?I'ihI. RITILDI!Tf
FAYETTE.VILLE t9TNIC:PAL AIRPORT •
FAYETTEVILLL', ARKANSAS 72701
MICROFILMED
DATE APR 1 1 tgm
REEL 1 R
FAA PROJECT NO. ADAP 6-05-0020-06 & 07
PIAN NO. .117313
1
PAUL YOUNG & ASSOCIA'T'ES
ARCHITECTS
19 East Dickson Street
Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION.
CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
TERMINAL BUILDING
FAYETTEVILLE MUNICIPAL AIRPORT
FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS'72701
FAA PROJECT NO, ADAP 670570020-06 & 07
PLAN NO. 11738
March 1978
PAUL YOUNG & ASSOCIATES
ARCHITECTS
19 East Dickson Street
Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701
SECTION
INDEX
SUBJECT PAGE NO4
Advertisement For Bids
Proposal Form
Certification of Bidder Regarding Equal
Employment Opportunity
Instructions to Bidders
General Conditions
Supplementary General Conditions
1 Site Preparation 1 - 6
2 Building Excavation 1 - 3
3 Foundation and Concrete Work 1 - 11
3A Lightweight Concrete 1 - 3
4 Masonry Units 1 - 2
5 Native Field Stone Work 1 - 3
6 Structural Steel, Steel Joists &
Steel Roof Deck 1 - 6
7 Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metal Work 1 - 2
8 Roofing and Sheet Metal 1 - 6
9 Waterproofing, Caulking & Perimeter
Insulation 1 - 4
10 Carpentry & Millwork 1 - 6
11 Furring, Lathing, Plastering & Stucco 1 - 6
12 Aluminum Entrances 1 - 6
13 Curtainwall System 1 - 4
14 Rolling & Vertical Sliding Steel Doors &
Rolling Aluminum Grille 1 - 3
15 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1 - 3
16 Steel Framing, Sheetrock & Textone
Gypsum Panels 1 - 4
•
INDEX (Continued)
SECTION SUBJECT PAGE NO,
17.. Finish Hardware 1 - 4
18 ' Glass Specifications 1 - 5
19 Acoustical Tile Ceilings 1 - 5
20 Building Specialties 1 - 5
21 Resilient Floor Covering, Base and
Carpet 1 - 6
22 Quarry & Ceramic Tile and Marble 1 - 6
23 Painting Specifications 1 - 6
24 Exposed Aggregate Concrete Sidewalks
& Surfaces 1 - 4
•
25 General Provisions Applicable to
Mechanical and Electrical
26 Plumbing
27 . Heating, Ventilation & Air -Conditioning
28 .:; Electrical
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
Board of Directors'
Fayetteville, Arkansas
Sealed bids for the construction of a Terminal Building for
the Fayetteville Municipal Airport located at Fayetteville,
Arkansas, will be received at the office of Mr. Donald L. Grimes,
City Manager, City Administratiojt Buil ing,a etteville, Arkansas,
until 2:00 p.m., local time J44/. jr , and then at
said office publicly opened ilia -lead a bud.
The work includes General Construction, Mechanical Work and
Electrical Work, all to be let under one prime contract.
A cashier's check, certified check, or acceptable bidder's
bond payable to the Owner in an amount not less than 5% of the
largest possible total for the bid submitted including the con-
sideration of additive altczYtates, must accompany each bid as.
a guarantee that, if awarded the contract, the bidder will promptly
enter into a contract and execute such bonds as may be required.
Copies of drawings, specifications and other proposed con-
tract documents are on file and are open for inspection.at the
following places:
Office of Paul Young & Associates, Architects, 19 East
Dickson Street, Fayetteville, Arkansas, 72701, and F. W. Dodge
Plan Room, Suite 102, 1100 North University, Little Rock,
Arkansas, 72205, and Construction News Plan Room,715 Second
Street, Little Rock, Arkansas, 72201, and Office of City Manager,
City Administration Building, Fayetteville, Arkansas, 72701.
Prime Contractors may obtain up to three (3) sets of such
documents from the Architects of the above address, upon deposit
of $100.00 per set as a guarantee for the safe return of the
documents, the full amount of which will be repaid to bidders
submitting bona fide prime bids upon the return of the documents
in good condition to the Architect within ten days after receipt
of bids.
Additional sets of drawings and specifications may be
obtained for use of subcontractors or material suppliers, upon
deposit of $100.00 per set. Upon return of the complete bid
documents in good condition within seven days after the bid
opening, the deposit will be refunded, less the actual cost of
printing of drawings, specifications and addenda.
In accordance with the provisions of Act 183 of 1957, as
enacted by the General Assembly for the State of Arkansas,
bidders are required to list the names and state license numbers
of proposed separate subcontractors for the above -listed types
of work in a separate, sealed envelope to be opened only in the
event of substitution for a subcontractor.
All bidders shall conform to the requirements of the
Arkansas State Licensing Law for Contractors set forth in
Act 150 of the 1965 General Assembly, as amended. Attention
is called: to the labor standards and wage provisions set
forth in the specifications.
Required Notices for Contracts over $10,000. The regulations
and orders of the Secretary of Labor, OFCC and FAR 152.61 require
that the sponsor, or his contractor(s) include in invitations. for
bids ornegotiations for contracts over $10,000 the following
notices:
(1) The proposed contract is under and subject to Executive
Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and to the Equal
Opportunity Clause, and
(2) The Bidder (Proposer) must supply all the information
required by the hid or proposal form.
(3) The successful bidder will be required to submit a
Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities prior to.
award of the contract, and to notify prospective
subcontractors of the requirement for such a Certi-
fication where the subcontract exceeds $10,000.
Samples of the Certification and the Notice to Sub-
contractors appear in the specifications.
(4) Women will he afforded equal opportunity in all areas
of employment. However, the employment of women shall
not diminish the standards or requirements for the
employment of minorities.
Contracts in Excess of $50,000. In the invitation for bids
relating: to contracts of $50,000 or more, the sponsor shall
give notice that a contractor having 50 or more employees and
his subcontractors having 50 or more employees and who may be
awarded a subcontract of $50,000 or more will be required to
maintain,. an affirmative action program within 120 days of the
commencement of the contract.
Additional Notices for $1 Million Contracts. For each
contract' which may result in a hid of $1 million or more, the
invitation for bids shall also include the following notices:
(1) Preaward Equal Opportunity Compliance Reviews. Where
the bid of the apparent low responsible bidder is in the
amount of $1 million or more, the bidder and his known
all-tier subcontractors which will he awarded subcon-
tracts of $1 million or more, will be eubjeat to full,
on-site, preaward equal opportunity compliance reviews
before the award of the contract for the purpose of
determining whether the bidder and his subcontractors
are able to comply with the provisions of the equal
opportunity clause.
I
(2) Compliance Reports. Within 30 days after award of this
contract, the Contractor shall file a compliance report
' (Standard Form 100) if:
(a) the contractor has not submitted a complete
compliance report within 12 months preceding
the date of award; and
(b) The contractor is within the definition of
' "employer" in Paragraphs 2e(3) of the instruc-
tions included in Standard Form 100.
' The contractor shall require the subcontractor on all -
tier subcontracts, irrespective of dollar amount, to
file Standard Form 100 within 30 days after award of
the subcontract if the above two conditions apply.
' Standard Form 100 will be furnished upon request.
The Owner reserves the right to waive any informalities
in, or to reject any or all bids.
No bidder may withdraw his bid within 60 days after the
' date of the opening thereof.
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS,...'
' By - Earnest Lancaster, Mayor
•
I
Li
I
I
I
I
IPROPOSAL FORM
TO: Board of Directors , 1978
Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701
The undersigned, in compliance with your invitation for
bids for the construction of a Terminal Building for
' Fayetteville Municipal Airport, Fayetteville, Arkansas, having
examined the plans, specifications with related documents, and
the site of the proposed work, and being familar with all the
' conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project,
hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment,
supervision, etc., to construct the project in accordance with
Contract Documents, within the time herein stated, and at the
prices stated below. These prices to cover all expenses incurred
in performance of the work required under the Contract Documents,
of which this proposal is a part.
' Bidder hereby agrees to commence work under this Contract on
or before,a date to he specified in written "Notice to Proceed"
of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 400 con-
secutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifica-
tions. Bidder further agrees to pay as liquidated damages, the
sum of $100.00 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as
hereinafter provided in Paragraph 14 of the Supplementary
General Conditions.
I (or we) acknowledge receipt of the following addenda:
' I (or we) agree to perform all of the work shown on the
plans, and described in the specifications for the General
Construction work, including Plumbing, Heating, Air -Conditioning,
Ventilation, Electrical and any other work called for to con-
struct the Terminal Building at Fayetteville Municipal Airport,
Fayetteville, Arkansas.
BASE BID
' Dollars ($
UNIT PRICES
' For changing quantities of work items from those indicated
by the contract drawings upon written instructions from the
Architect, the following unit prices shall prevail:
' ADDED DEDUCTED
Ii. Excavation, C.Y. $ $
2. Concrete, including
rein.steel and forms
' per C.Y. $ $
The above unit prices shall include all labor, materials,
bailing, shoring, removal, overhead, profit, insurance, etc.,
IT
IT
U
I
I
to cover the finished work of the several kinds called for.
Changes shall be processed in accordance with Article 12 of
the General Conditions.
Bidder agrees to comply with Act 159 of 1949, as amended
by Act 183 of 1957 enacted by the General Assembly of the
State of Arkansas. In partial compliance with Act 183 of 1957,
names and state license numbers of proposed separate subcontrac-
tors for mechanical, electrical, roofing and sheet metal work
are listed below. The amount of the subcontracts for the
above listed types of work are enclosed herewith in a separate
sealed envelope to be opened only in the event of a substitution
of a subcontractor.
Proposed subcontractors and license numbers:
Mechanical Work: Ark. Lie. No.
' Electrical:
Roofing.& Sheet Metal:
Ark. Lic. No.
Ark. Lic. No.
Bidders and subcontractors listed above agree to comply
with the requirements of the Contractor's Licensing Law of the
' State of Arkansas, Act 150 of 1965.
The bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be
withdrawn for a period of 60 calendar days after the scheduled
closing time for receiving bids.
Upon receipt of written notice of the acceptance of this bid,
' bidder will execute the formal contract attached within 10 days
and deliver a Surety Bond or Bonds as required by Paragraph 29
of the General Conditions<
The bid security attached in the sum of
Dollars ($ )
' is to become the property of the Owner in the event the contract
and bond are not executed within the time above set forth, as
liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the
' Owner caused thereby.
Previous Contracts. Section 60-1.7(b) of the Regulations of
' the Secretary of Labor requires each bidder or prospective prime
contractor and proposed subcontractor, where appropriate, to
state in the bid or at the outset of negotiations for the
contract whether it has participated in any previous contract
' or subcontract subject to the equal opportunity clause; and, if
so, whether it has filed with the Joint Reporting Committee,
the Director, an agency or the former President's Committee on
' Equal Employment Opportunity all reports due under the applicable
filing requirements. In any case in which a bidder or prospec-
tive prime contractor or proposed subcontractor which partici-
pated in a previous contract subject to Executive Order 10925, 11114 or
' 11246 has not filed a report due under the applicable filing
requirements, no contract or subcontract shall be awarded unless
G
I
I
I
I
I
I
If the Bidder has participated in a previous contract
' subject to the equal opportunity clause and has not
submitted compliance reports due under applicable filing
requirements, the Bidder shall submit a compliance
1 report on Standard Form 100, "Employee Information
Report EEP-1" prior to the award of contract.
such contractor submits a report covering the delinquent period
or such other period specified by the FAA or the Director,
OFCC.
The Bidder shall complete the following statement by checking
the appropriate boles.
The Bidder has £7 has not €C7 participated in a
previous contract subject to the equal opportunity
clause prescribed by Executive Order 10925, or
Executive Order 11114, or Executive Order 11246.
The Bidder has £7 has not J submitted all
compliance reports in connection with any such con-
tract due under the applicable filing requirements;
and that representations indicating submission of
required compliance reports signed by proposed sub-
contractors will be obtained prior to award of
subcontracts.
' standard Form 100 is normally furnished contractors annually,
based on a mailing list currently maintained by the Joint
Reporting Committee. In the event a contractor has not received
the form, he may obtain it by writing to the following address:.
' Joint Reporting Committee
1800 G Street
Washington, B.C. 20506
Certification of Bidder Regarding Equal Employment
Opportun ty. This Bidder must execute and enclose with his
Proposalthe following Certification regarding Equal Employment
Opportunity.
' Respectfully submitted,
By.
Title:
Arkansas Contractor's Business Address:_________________
' License No.
I
I
CERTIFICATION OF BIDDER REGARDING
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
GENERAL
BIDDERS NAME
ADDRESS
INTERNAL REVENUE SERVICE EMPLOYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
1
NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES
NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE FEDERALLY ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTORS:
(1) A Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities must be
'
submitted prior to the award of a federally assisted
construction contract exceeding $10,000 which is not
exempt from the provisions of the equal opportunity
clause.
(2) Contractors receiving federally assisted construction
contract awards exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt
from the provisions of the equal opportunity clause,
will be required to provide for the forwarding of the
following notice to prospective subcontractors for.
-.supplies and construction contracts where the sub-
contracts exceed $10,000 and are not exempt from the
provisions of the equal opportunity clause. NOTE:
I.
The penalty for making false statements in offers is pre-
scribed in 18 U.S.C. 10010
NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTORS OF REQUIREMENT FOR
CERTIFICATION ON NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES:
(1) A Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities must be
t
sob fitted prior to the award of a subcontract exceeding
$10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of the
equal opportunity clause.
(2).. Contractors receiving subcontract awards exceeding
$VQ,0O0 which are not exempt from the provisions of
' the equal opportunity clause will be required to
provide for the forwarding of this notice to
prospective subcontractors for supplies and construc-
tion contracts where the subcontracts exceed $10,0O0.
' and are not exempt from the provisions of the equal
• opportunity clause. NOTE: The penalty for making
false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C..
' .. 1001.
L
IT
I
I
I
I
P1
El
I
I
U
Ll
I
I
I
L
L
CERTIFICATION OF NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES:
The federally assisted construction contractor certifies
that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any
segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and
that he does not permit his employees to perform their
services at any location, under his control, where segre-
gated facilities are maintained. The federally assisted
construction contractor certifies further he will not
maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facili-
ties at any of his establishments, and that he will not permit
his employees to perform their services at any location,
under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained.
The federally assisted construction contractor agrees that
a breach of this certification is a violation of the equal
opportunity clause of this contract. As used in this
certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any
waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restau-
rants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and
other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking
fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transporta-
tion,, and housing facilities provided for employees which
are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact
segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, sex or
national origin, because of habit, local custom or any other
reason. The federally assisted construction contractor
agrees that (except where he has obtained identical
certifications from proposed subcontractors for specific
time periods) he will obtain identical certifications from
proposed subcontractors prior to the award of subcontracts
exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions
of the equal opportunity clause, and that he will retain
such certifications in his files.
NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE CONTRACTORS OF REQUIREMENT FOR CERTIFX
CATION OP NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES:
A Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities must be sub-
mitted prior to the award of a contract or subcontract
exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions
of the Equal Opportunity Clause.
Certification - The information above is true and complete to the
best of my knowledge and belief,.
Name and Title of Signer - Please Type)
Signature Date
NOTE: The penalty for making false statements in offers is
prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 10010
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
FOR CONSTRUCTION
TABLE OF ARTICLES
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
AIA Document A701
1.
DEFINITIONS
6.
QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
2.
BIDDER'S• REPRESENTATION 7.
REJECTION OF BIDS
3.
BIDDING PROCEDURES
8.
SUBMISSION OF POST -BID INFORMA-
TION
4.
EXAt4INATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
9.
PERFORMANCE BOND & LABOR &
5.
SUBSTITUTIONS
MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
GENERAL CONDITIONS
AIA Document A201
1.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
90
PAYMENTS AND COPIPLETION
2.
ARCHITECT
10.
PROTECTION OF PERSONS &
PROPERTY
3.
OWNER
11.
INSURANCE
4.
CONTRACTOR
1?.
CHANGES IN THE WORK
5.
SUBCONTIU CTORS
.
13.
UNCOVERING & CORRECTION
6.
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
OF WORK
7.
MISCELL2wauS PROVISIONS 14.
TERMINATION OF THE
CONTRACT
Be
TIME
AIA DOCUMENT A701
and A201, consisting
of the above Table., of
Articles are hereby made a part of this specification by
reference.
I
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
10 BID BOND
Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid bond of certified
check in an amount not less than five per cent (58) of the
' amount of the bid.
2. BOND
The Performance and Payment Bond as specified under Para-
graph 7.5.1 of the General Conditions shall be provided by the
Contractor.
3. INSURANCE
' The insurance required by Paragraph 11.1.1 of the General
Conditions shall he written for not less than:
' Contractor's Public Liability Insurance $300,000/$500,000
Property Damage Insurance $100,000/$300,000
4. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free
' from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by his
employees or work, and at the completion of the work, he shall
remove all his rubbish from there and about the building and
all his tools, scaffolding and surplus materials and shall
'
leave his work "broom clean" or its equivalent, unless more
exactly specified. In case of dispute, the Owner may remove the
rubbish and charge the cost to the several contractors as the
' Architect shall determine to be just.
5. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE
All Contractors bidding on this work must comply with all
requirements and regulations of the Contractor's License Law of
' the State of Arkansas.
6. PREPARATION FOR BIDS
' In addition to the proposal form found herein, each bidder
clii be given two copies of the Proposal Form on which he is to
submit his bid. Special care shall be exercised in the prepara-
' tion of,bids. Proposals shall show prices as required in both
words and figures. In case of a difference in written words
and figures and in the proposal, the amount stated in written
words shall govern.
' 7. BIDS
' The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids and
to waive informalities and negotiate a contract with any bidder.
Bids submitted shall be binding for 60 days from the date of
the opening of bids.
8. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Any drawings are to be carefully examined by the Contractor
before submitting bids. The large scale drawings are to take
precedence over other drawings. The Contractor shall verify
all measurements at the building and on the plans before start-
ing the work. All questionable measurements shall be referred
to the Architect for disposition. The Contractor shall take
measurements at the building for checking shop drawings, and
for work to be accurately fitted to work already in place.
9. EXAMINATION OF SITE
Each bidder is also cautioned to visit the site and to
examine any and all conditions which may enter into the execu-
tion of the work and the cost thereof, so that all the items
of expense due to the conditions shall be included in the propo-
sal. No claim for extra remuneration shall be allowed to the
Contractor for such negligence. The intent on the drawings is
prevalent; lack of details on drawings and specifications
becomes the responsibility of the Contractor and not of the
Architect.
10. DISCREPANCIES
Should a
omissions fro
be in doubt a
Architect who
bidders. The
instruction.
the proposal.
11.
m
s
bidder find discrepancies or ambiguities in, or
the drawings or specifications, or should he
to their meaning, he shall at once notify the
may send written addendum simultaneously to all
Architect will not be responsible for any oral
All addenda are incorporated by reference in
OF OCCUPATIONAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND MINIMUM
SUPERSEDEAS DECISION
STATE: Arkansas COUNTY: Sebastian, Crawford
and Washington
DECISION NOa AR/9-42ts0 DATE: Date of Publication
Supersedes Decision No. AR 77-4114 dated June 10, 1977 in
42 PR 30106
DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Building Construction (but does not include
single-family homes and garden type apartments up to and
including 4 stories)
1
I
El
Li
I
ASBESTOS WORKERS
I
(Washington Co.)
ASBESTOS WORKERS
(Sebastian. and
I. Crawford. County)
BOILERMAKERS
BRICKLAYERS
I
CI
I
I
I
El
I
I
I
I
CARPENTERS (Sebas-
tian & Crawford)
CarpenteriY.
Millwright:. :6
Piledrivermen
CARPENTERS '1:w; :
(Washington; County)
Carpenters
Millwright0&
Piledriver $
CEMENT MASONfli'
Cable splicefs
ELEVATOR Cl3IfSTRUC-
TORS
"h 1pers
(prob.
GLAZIERS
Washington County
Sebastian 9 Crawford
XRONWORKERS
LABORERS:
Group I
Group IX
Group III.:
Group IV
Group V
Group VI
Group VII
Fringe Benefits Payments
Basic
Hourly
Education
S & W
Pensions
Vacation
and/or
Rates
App. Tr.
$10.75
.25
.72
.02
11.50
.35
.75
.015
10.00
.50
1.00
.02
8.70
.40
.35
. ..04
8.12
.45
.35
.04
8.87
.45
.35
.04
7.65
.35
8.15
.35
.04
8.67
.25
9.90
.35
38+5.58
1/4%
10.15
.35
3%+5.5%
8.88
.545
.35
4%+a+b
70%JR
.545
.35
4%+a+b
.02
508JR
6.25
5.95
9.60
.45
.65
.12
6.00
.25
.52
6.25
.25
.52
6.40
.25
.52
6.50
.25
.52
6.65
.25
.52
6.90
.25
.52
6.80
.25
.52
LABORERS CLASSIFICATION DEFINITIONS
GROUP I - Constxnctin laborers, concrete labor, wreaking labor,
mechanic's labor, excavating labor, plumber's labor, electricians
labor, green cutter, blowpipe, and concrete pump hose placer.
GROUP II-:`sSi-skilled laborer, pipelayers, concrete, clay and
mechanical' tool, cement mixer, wet or dry finishers, and plasterers,
mason tender, mortar mixers, asphalt rakers and shovelers, creosote
wood handlers, chuck tender.
I
tGROUP III - Steelform setters, curb and gutters, grout and cement
muckers.
' GROUP IV - Swinging scaffold, Barco, 90 lb. pavement breaker, and
burners.
' GROUP V - Nozzleman (Gunnite, Grout, and sand blasterer; concrete
pump (nozzle placer)
GROUP VI - Powderman and blasterers
GROUP VII -wagon drill
1
Fringe Benefits Payments
'• Basic
Education
Hourly H & W Pensions Vacation and/or
' Appr. Tr.
Rates
LATHERS $8.85 ..02
LINE CONSTRUCTION:
Lineman; operator 9.15 .35 3% 1/4%
Cable splicers 9.30 .35 3% 1/4%
' Powderman'. 90%JR .35 3% 1/4%
Truck driver 758JR .35 3% 1/4%
Groundman 65%JR .35 3% 1/4%
' Groundman (:1st
6 mos.) 59%JR .35 3% 1/4%
PAINTERS (Sebastian
6 Crawford . Co,. )
Brush painters 6.50
• Roller wor'k;:
sheetwor!E•- #finish-
'• ing by machinery 6.75
Spray painting 7.50
Swing stale•'rork 6.75
Sandblastfnq-
• steam clO ing 7.50
All pipe a1M steel 7.25
• All mittes4 :And glo
painting.;; 7.50
• PAINTERS (Washington
County)
'• Group I 8.10
Group It 8.10
Group III 9.10
' Group IV 9010
Group V 8.35
Group VI 9.975
Group VII 8.725
' PAINTERS CLASSIFICATION DEFINITIONS
' GROUP I - Brush, mitt used on pipes, only; preparation work
before papering of canvassing roller with handler up to six feet
long.
I
I]
1
I
I
I
[I
1
C
I
GROUP II - Hanging vinyl or wallpaper, drywall taping.
GROUP III -..Use of Bazooka, Banjo and Ames machine tools.
GROUP IV - Spraying (except where listed below); sandblasting.
GROUP V - Potman assisting sprayer (except where listed below).
GROUP VI - Spraying epoxies, polyesters or material where hood..
and extra safety features are required.
GROUP VII - Brush on structural steel, stacks, tanks, swinging
stage, bosun-
chairs.
1 '
PLASTERERS
PLUMBERS S..-
STEAMFITTERS.
POWER EQUIPMENT
OPERATORS:..,
Group I
Group II
Group III
Group IV
Basic FRINGE BENEFITS PAYMENTS
Hourly Education
H & W Pensions Vacation and/or
Rates Appr,.Tr.
$8.85
.02
9.76
.45
.55
.04
9.64
.35
.35
8.76
8.36
.35
.35
.35
.35
6.92
.35
.35
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS CLASSIFICATION DEFINITIONS
GROUP I - Cranes, draglines, shovels and piledrivers with a lifting
capacity of 50 tons or over, and operators of all towers, climbing
cranes, and derricks required to work 25 feet or over from the
ground, blacksmith, mechanics and/or welders.
GROUP II - Hydraulic cranes, cherry pickers, backhoes and all
' derricks with a lifting capacity less than 50 tons, as specified by
the manufacturer, all backhoes, tractor or truck type, all overhead
and traveling cranes, or tractors with swinging boom attachments,
' gradalls, all above equipment irrespective of motive power, leverman
(engineer), hydraulic or bucket dredges, irrespective of size.
GROUP III - HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS: All bulldozers, all front-end
loaders, all sidebooms, skytracks, all push tractors, all pull'
scrapers, all motor graders, all trenching machines, regardless of
size or motive power, all back fillers,all central mixing plants,
10S and larger, finishing machines, all boiler firemen high or low
pressure, all asphalt spreaders, hydro truck crane, multiple drum
hoist, irrespective of motive power, all rotary, cable tool core
drill or chin drill, water well and foundation drilling machines,
regardless of size, regardless of motive power and dredge tender
operator.
GROUP IV - LIGHT EQUIPMENT OPERATORS - Oilerdriver motor crane,
single drum hoists, winches and air tuggers, irrespective of motive
power, winch or A -frame trucks, forklifts, rollers of all types
and pull tractors, regardless of size, elevator operators inside
and outside when used for carrying workmen from floor to floor and
handling building material, Lad-A-Vator, conveyor, batch plant,
and mortar or concrete misers, below 105, end dump Euclid, pump-
' crete, spray machine and pressure grout machine, air compressors,
well point system de -watering and portable pumps, space heater,
irrespective of size, and motive power, equipment greaser, oiler,
mechanic helper, drilling machine helper, asphalt distributor, and
like equipment, safety boat operator and deckhand.
Basic Fringe Benefits Payments
Hourly Education
H & W Pensions Vacation and/or
Rates Appr. Tr.
ROOFERS $7.95 .10
SHEET METAL WORKERS 10.25 .45 .44 .05
SPRINKLER FITTERS 10.12 .65 .95 .08
WELDERS - receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to
which welding is incidental.
FOOTNOTES:
a - 1st 6 mos. - none; 6 months to S years. 2%; over 5 years 4%
of basic hourly rate.
b - Paid Holidays A through F
PAID HOLIDAYS - A -New Year's Day; B -Memorial Day; C -Independence
Day; D -Labor Day; E -Thanksgiving Day; F -Christmas Day.
1
•
I
H
I
DECISION NO. AR77-4288 - Mod. #1
(42 PR 52901 - September 30, 1977
Sebastian, Crawford and Washington
Counties, Arkansas
ei
K
•.OM,.
Basic
Hourly
Fringe Benefits Payments
ucat on
H & W
Pensions
Vacation
and/or
Rates
Appr. Tr.
$8.85
.40
.35
.04
9.10
.02
8.30
.10
-Friday, November 11, 1977
DECISION NO. AR77-4288 -Mod. #2
(42 FR 52901 - September 30, 1977
Sebastian, Crawford and Washington
Counties, Arkansas
CHANGE:
ELECTRICIANS:
Electricians
Cable splicers
Basic
Fringe Benefits Payments
Hourly
H & W
Pensions
Vacation
Education
and/or
Rates
Appr. Tr.
$10.30
.35
3%+5.5%
1114%
10.65
.35
3%+5.5%
1/4%
DECISION NOo AR77-4288 - Mod. #3
FR 52901 - Septemher 30, 1977)
Sebastian, Crawford and Washington
Counties, Arkansas
Basic
Hourly
H & W
Fringe Benefits Payments
Pensions I Vacation I and/or
CHANGE:
PLASTERERS $9.25 •02
GLAZIERS (Wash. Co) 6.60
I.
I
[I
I
1
DECISION NO.. AR77-4288 - Mod* #4
52901 - September 30, 19 17)
Sebastian, Crawford and Washington
Counties, Arkansas
CHANGE:
BOILERMAKERS
ELECTRICIANS:
Electricians
Cable Splicer::
Basic
Hourly
Fringe Benefits Payments
Education
H & W
Pensions
Vacation
and/or
Rates
Appr. Tr.
$10.55
.80
1.00
.02
10,65
.35
3%+S.5%
1/4%
10.65
.35
3%x-5.50
1/4%
10.90
.35
3%t5.S%
1/4%
' 12. WAGE, LABOR, EEO AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
I
I
C
I
I
I
C
r
I
SECTION A (Federal Aviation Administration Requirements)
A-1 Abort Development Aid Program Project. The work in this
contract is included in Airport Development Aid Project
No.6-05-0020-06 & 07 which is being undertaken and
accomplished by the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas (Sponsor)
in accordance with the terms and conditions of a grant
agreement between the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas
(Sponsor) and the United States, under the Airport and
Airlway Development Act of 1970 (49 U.S.C. 1701) and
Part 152 of the Federal Aviation Regulations (14CFR
Part 152), pursuant to which the United States has agreed
to pay a certain percentage of the costs of the project
that. are determined to be allowable project costs under
that Act. The United States is not a party to this con-
tract and no reference in this contract to the FAA or any
representative thereof, or to any rights granted to the
FM or any representative thereof, or the United States,
by:the contract, makes the United States a party to this
cc tract.
A-2 Consent to assignment. The contractor shall obtain the
priorwritten consent of the City of Fayetteville,
Arkansas (Sponsor) to any proposed assignment of any
interest in or part of this contract.
A-3 Convict labor. No convict labor may be employed under
this contract.
A-4 Veterans Pferenc�e< In the employment of labor (except
nn executivereT , :encnistrative, and supervisory positions),
I
' preference shall be given to qualified individuals who
have served in the military service of the United States
(as defined in section 101(1) of the Soldiers' and
' Sailors' Civil Relief Act of 1940) and have been honorably
discharged from that service, except that preference may
be given only where that labor is available locally and
is qualified to perform the work to which the employment
relates.
A-5 Withholding: Sponsor from contractor. Whether or not
payments or advances to the City of Fayetteville,
Arkansas (Sponsor) are withheld or suspended by the FAA,
the city of Fayetteville, Arkansas (Sponsor) may with-
' hold or cause to be withheld from the contractor so much
of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered
necessary to pay laborers and mechanics employed by the
contractor or any subcontractor on the work the full amount
' of wages required by this contract.
A-6 Nona ent of wages. If the contractor or subcontractor
' a is to pay any laborer or mechanic employed or working
on the site of the work any of the wages required by this
contract the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas (Sponsor)
may, after written notice to the contractor, take such
action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any
further payment or advance of funds until the violations
cease.
' A-7 FAA inspection and review. The contractor shall allow
any authorized representative of the FAA to inspect and
' review any work or materials used in the performance of
this contract.
A -B Subcontracts. The contractor shall insert in each of
h sh s s contracts the provisions contained in paragraphs
A-1, A-3, A-4, A-59 A-6 and A-7 requiring the subcontractors
to include these provisions in any lower tier subcontracts
' which they may enter into, together with a clause requir-
ing this insertion in any further subcontracts that may
in turn be made.
A-9 Contract termination. A breach of paragraphs A-6, A -T,
and A-8 may be grounds for termination of the contract.
SECTION B (Secretary of Labor Requirements)
B-1 Mininum wages.
' (a) All mechanics and laborers employed or working
upon the site of the work will be paid unconditionally
and not less often than once a week,and without subse-
quent deduction or rebate on any account (except such
1
[l
payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations
'issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act
(29 CFR Part 3), the full amounts due at time of payment
computed at wage rates not less than those contained in
'the wage determination decision(s) of the Secretary of
Labor which is (are) attached hereto and made a part
hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which
may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such
' laborers and mechanics; and the wage determination
decision(s) shall be posted by the contractor at the site
of the work in a prominent place where it (they) can be
'easily seen by the workers. For the purpose of this
: paragraph, contributions made or costs reasonably anti-
cipated under Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis -Bacon Act
on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages
' paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provi-
sions of subparagraph (4) below. Also for the purpose
of this paragraph, regular contributions made or costs
incurred for more than a weekly period under plans, funds,
or programs, but covering the particular weekly period,
are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during
such weekly period (29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(1)).
(b) Any class of laborers or mechanics, including
apprentices and trainees, which is not listed in the wage
' determination(s) and which is to be employed under the
contract, shall be classified or reclassified conform-
ably to the wage determination(s), and a report of the
' action taken shall be sent by the City of Fayetteville,
Arkansas to the FAA for approval and transmittal to the
Secretary of Labor. In the event that the interested
parties cannot agree on the proper classification or
reclassification of a particular class of laborers and
mechanics, including apprentices and trainees, to be
' used, the question accompanied by the recommendation of
the FAA shall be referred to the Secretary of Labor for
final determination (29 CFR 5.5(a) (1) (ii)).
' (c) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in'
'the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes
a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly wage
Irate and the contractor is obligated to pay a cash
equivalent of such a fringe benefit, an hourly cash
equivalent thereof shall be established. In the event
the interested parties cannot agree upon a cash equivalent
' .of the fringe benefit, the. question accompanied by the
recommendation of the FAA shall be referred to the
Secretary of Labor for determination (29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iii)).
' (d) If the contractor does not make payments to a
trustee or other third person, he may consider as part of
the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any
'costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under
I
I
a plan or program of a type expressly listed in the wage
determination decision of the Secretary of Labor which is
a part of this contract: Provided, however, the
Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request
of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the
Davis -Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor
may require the contractor to set aside in a separate
account assets for the meeting of obligations under the
plan or program (29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv)).
B-2 Withholding: FAA from sponsor. Pursuant to the terms of
the grant agreements between the United States and City
of Fayetteville, Arkansas relating to Airport Development
Aid Project No. 6-05-0020-06 & 07, and Part 152 of the
Federal Aviation Regulations (14 CFR Part 152), the FAA
npay withhold or cause to be withheld from the City of;.
payetteville, Arkansas so much of the accrued payments:;-.
or advances as may be considered necessary to pay
laborers and mechanics, including apprentices and trainees,
employed by the contractor or any subcontractor on the work
the full amount of wages required by this contract*.. In
the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanics,';'
including any apprentice or trainee, employed or working
on. !the site of the work all or part of the wages
required by this contract, the FAA may, after written
notice to the city of Fayetteville, Arkansas, take such
;action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any
further payment or advance of funds until such violations
h veceased (29 CFR 5.5(a)(2)).
B-3 Payrolls and basic records.
(a) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto
wi°11 be maintained during the course of the work and
preserved for a period of 3 years thereafter for all
laborers and mechanics working at the site of the. work..
Such records will contain the name and address of each
such employee, his correct classification, rates of pay
(including rates of contributions or costs anticipated
of the types described in Section 1(1)(2) of the Davis -
Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked,
deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the
Secretary of Labor has found, under 29 CFR 5.S(a)(1)(iv)
(see subparagraph (d) of paragraph B-i above), that the
wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of
any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits
under a plan or program described in Section 1(b)(2)(B)
of the Davis -Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain
records which show that the commitment to provide such
benefits is enforceable, that the program or plan is
financially responsible, and that the plan or program
has been communicated in writing to the laborers or
mechanics affected, and records which show the costs
anticipated or the actual costs incurred in providing such
benefits (29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(1)).
I
FTI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B-4
[1
I
11
I
Li
H
I
FT
(b) The contractor will submit weekly a copy of all
payrolls to the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas for avail-
ability to the FAA, as required by paragraph 152.59(a).
The copy shall be accompanied by a statement signed by the
employer or his agent indicating that the payrolls are
correct and complete, that the wage rates contained
therein are not less than those determined by the
Secretary of Labor and that the classifications set forth
for each laborer or mechanic conform with the work he per-
formed. A submission of a "Weekly Statement of Compliance"
which is required under this contract and the Copeland
regulations of the Secretary of Labor (29 CFR Part 3)
and the filing with the initial payroll or any subsequent
payroll of a copy of any findings by the Secretary of
Labor, under 29 CPR 5.5(a)(l)(iv) (see subparagraph (d)
of paragraph 8-1 above), shall satisfy this requirement.
The prime contractor shall be responsible for submission
of copies of payrolls of all subcontractors. The
contractor will make the records required under the labor
standards clauses of the contract available for inspection
by authorized representatives of the FAA and the Depart-
ment of Labor, and will permit such representatives to
interview employees during working hours on the job.
Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under
approved programs shall include a notation on the first
weekly certified payrolls submitted to the City of
Fayetteville, Arkansas for availability to the FAA, that
their employment is pursuant to an approved program and
shall identify the program (29 CFR 5.5(a) (3) (ii)).
Apprentices and trainees.
• (a) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to
work at less than the predetermined rate for the work.
they; performed when they are employed and individually
registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program
registered with the U. S. Department of Labor, Employment
and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship
and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency
recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed.
.in his. first 90 days of probationary employment as an
apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not
individually registered in the program, but who has been
certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training
or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to
be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice.
The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen in any
craft classification shall not be greater than the
ratio permitted to the contractor as to his entire work
force under the registered program. Any employee listed
on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not a
trainee as defined in subparagraph (b) of this paragraph
or is not registered or otherwise employed as stated
above, shall be paid the wage rate determined by the
Secretary of Labor for the classification of work he
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
ri
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
actually performed. The contractor or subcontractor will
be required to furnish to the City of Fayetteville,
Arkansas or a representative of the Wage -Flour Division
of the U.S. Department of Labor written evidence of the
registration of his program and apprentices as well as
the appropriate ratios and wage rates (expressed in
percentages of the journeyman hourly rates), for the area
of construction prior to using any apprentices on the
contract work. The wage rate paid apprentices shall be
not less than the appropriate percentage of the journey-
man's rate contained in the applicable wage determination
(29 CPR 5.5(a)(4)(i)).
(b) Trainees. Except as provided in 29-CFR 5.15
trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the
predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are
employed pursuant to and individually registered in a
program which has received prior approval, evidenced by
formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor,
Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training. The ratio of trainees to
journeymen shall not be greater than permitted under the
plan approved by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate
specified in the approved program for his level of pro-
gress. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee
rate if not registered and participating in a training
plan approved by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and
Training shall be paid not less than the wage rate deter-
mined by the Secretary of Labor for the classification
of work he actually performed. The contractor or sub-
contractor will be required to furnish the City of
Fayetteville, Arkansas or a representative of the Wage -
Hour Division of the U.S. Department of Labor written
evidence of the certification of his program, the
registration of the trainees, and the ratios and wage
rates prescribed in that program. In the event the
Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training withdraws approval
of a training program, the contractor will no longer be
permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable
predetermined rate for the work performed until an accept-
able program is approved (29 CFR 5.5(a) (4) (ii)).
(c) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization
of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this
paragraph shall be in conformity with the equal employment
opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as
amended, and 29 CFR Part 30 (29 CFR 5.5(a) (4) (iii)).
(d) Application of 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). On
contracts in excess of $2,000 the employment of all
apprentices and trainees as defined in 29 CFR 5.2(c)
shall be subject to the provisions of 29 CFR Part 5.5
(a)(4) (see paragraph B -4(a), (b) and (c) above).
El
(e) Enforcement.
I
L1
E
El
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(i) The FAA shall promulgate the necessary
regulations or procedures, for federally assisted
construction programs for which it does not contract
directly, necessary to insure that contracts contain the
provisions herein or such modifications thereof which have
been approved by the Department of Labor. No payment,
advance, grant, loan or guarantee of funds shall be
approved by the FAA after the beginning of construction
unless there is on file with the FAA a certification
by the contractor that he and his subcontractors have
complied or that there is substantial dispute with
respect to the required provisions (29CFR 5.6.(a)(1)).
(ii) Enforcement activities, including the
investigation of complaints of violations, to insure
compliance with the requirements of these provisions
shall be the primary duty of the FAA. The Department of
Labor will coordinate its efforts with the FAA, as may
be necessary to ensure consistent enforcement of the
requirements of these provisions. Enforcement of these
provisions shall be in accordance with 29 CFR 5.6.
B-5 Compliance with Copeland Regulations. The contractor shall
comply with the Copeland Regulations (29 CFR Part 3)
of the Secretary of Labor which are herein incorporated
by reference (29 CFR 5.5(a)(5)).
•B-6 Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor
contracting for any part of the contract work which may
require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics
shall require or permit any laborer or mechanic in any
workweek in which he is employed on such work to work, in
excess of 8 hours in any calendar day or in excess of
40 hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mecha¢lic
received compensation at a rate not less than 1-1/2 times
his basic rate of pay for all, hours worked in excess of.
$;hours in any calendar day or in excess of 40 hours in
such workweek, as the case may be (29 CFR 5.5(c)(1)).,
B-7 Violations, liability for unpaid wages, liauidate�d damages
In the event or any violation or pareagzayu n' -o 'is waaa
proviiaioa►, the contractor and any subcontractor respon-
sible therefor shall be liable to any affected employee
for his unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and
subcontractor shall be liable to the United States for
liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be
computed, with respect to each individual laborer or
mechanic employed in violation of said paragraph B-6 of
this ?rovision, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day
on which such employee was required or permitted to work
in excess of 8 hours or in excess of the standard work-
week of 40 hours. without payment of the overtime wages
required by said paragraph B-6 of this provision
(29 CFR 5.5(c)(2)).
I
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
B-8 Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The
FAA may withhold or cause to be withheld, from any manies
payable on account of work performed by the contractor or
subcontractor, such sums as may administratively be
determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities
of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and
liquidated damages as provided in paragraph B-7 of this
provision (29 CFR 5.5(c)(3)).
B-9 Working conditions. No contractor may require any laborer
or mechanic employed in the performance of any contract
to work in surroundings or under working conditions that
are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health or
safety as determined under construction safety and health
standards (29 CFR Part 1926) and other occupational and
health standards (29 CFR Part 1910) issued by the
Department of Labor.
B -b Subcontracts. The contractor will insert in each of his
subcontracts the clauses contained in paragraphs B-1
through B-11 of this provision, and also a clause requiring
the subcontractors to include these provisions in any
lower tier subcontracts which they may enter into,
together with a clause requiring this insertion in any
further subcontracts that may in turn be made
(29 CFR 5.5(a)(6), 5.5 (c)(4)).
B-11 Contract termination; debarment. A breach of clause B-1,
B-2, B-3, B-4, B-5 or B-10 may be grounds for termination
of the contract, and for debarment as provided in para-
graph 5.6 of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor
as codified in 29 CFR 5.6 (29 CFR 5.5(a)(7)).
SECTION C (Equal Employment Opportunity Clause) - During the
performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:
C-1 The contractor will not discriminate against any employee
or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion,
sex or national origin. The contractor will take affirma-
tive action to ensure that applicants are employed, and
that employees are treated during employment without regard
to their race, color, sex or national origin. Such
action shall include, but not be limited to the following:
Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment
or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination, rates of
pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for
training, including apprenticeship. The contractor
agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to
employees and applicants for employment, notices to be
provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimina-
tion clause.
C-2 The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements
for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor,
state that all qualified applicants will receive considera-
tion for employment without regard to race, color, religion,
sex or national origin.
C
L
C-3 The contractor will send to each labor union or representa-
tive of workers with which he has a collective bargaining
agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice
Ito be provided, advising the said labor union or workers'
representatives of the contractor's commitments under
this section, and shall post copies of the notice in
conspicuous places available to employees and applicants
for employment.
C-4 The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive
Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, as amended, and of the
rules, regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary
of Labor.
C-5 The contractor will furnish all information and reports
required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965,
as amended, and by rules, regulations and orders of the
'
Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit
access to his books, records and accounts by the administer-
ing agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of
' investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules,
regulations and orders.
C-6 In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the
nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any
of the said rules, regulations or orders, this contract
may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in
part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for
further government contracts or federally assisted
construction contracts in accordance with procedures
' authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965,
as amended, and such other sanctions may be imposed and
remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246
of September 24, 1965, as amended,or by rule, regulation
or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise
provided by law.
' C-7 The contractor will include the portion of the sentence
immediately preceding paragraph C-1 and the provisions
of paragraphs C-i through C-7 in every subcontract or
' purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations or
orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to
Section 204 o€ Executive Order 11246 o€ September 24,
' 1965, as amended, so that such provisions will be binding
upon each subcontractor or vendor, The contractor will
take such action with respect to any subcontract or
purchase order as the administering agency may direct
'
as a means of enforcing such provisions, including
sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however, that in
the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is
' threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor
as a result of such direction by the administering agency,
the contractor may request the United States to enter
into such litigation to protect the interests of the
United States.
U
SECTION D (Health and Safety Requirements)
I
I I
n
II
U
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
D-1 It is a condition of this contract, and shall be made a
condition of each subcontract entered into pursuant to
this contract, that the contractor and any subcontractor
shall not require any laborer or mechanic employed in
performance of the contract to work in surroundings or
under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous,
or dangerous to his health or safety, as determined
under Construction Safety and Health Standards Title 29
Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1518 36 F.R. 7340
promulgated by the United States Secretary of Labor,
in accordance with Section 107 of the Contract Work
Hours and Safety Standards Act, 83 STAT. 96.
SECTION E (Air and Water Quality Standards)
E -1 Any other provision herein to the contrary notwithstand-
ing, the contractor in carrying out work under this
contract, shall at all times comply with all applicable
state and federal air and water quality standards;
with all pollution control laws; and with such rules,
regulations and directives as may be lawfully issued
by a local, state or federal agency having within its
jurisdiction the protection of the environment in the
area surrounding where work under this contract will be
performed. In addition, the contractor shall comply
with directives given by the Project Engineer in imple-
mentation of the letter and intent of FAA Advisory
Circular 150/5370-7 entitled Airport Construction
Controls to Prevent Air and Water Pollution. Copies
of this Advisory Circular can be obtained free of charge
from Department of Transportation, Distribution Unit,
TAD -484.3, Washington, D.C. 20590.
E-2 Contractors and subcontractors agree*
(a) That any facility to be used in the performance
of the contract or to benefit from the contract is not
listed on the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) List
of Violating Facilities.
(b) To comply with all the requirements of Section
114 of the Clean Air Act and Section 308 of the Federal
Water Pollution Control Act and all regulations issued
thereunder.
(c) That as a condition for award of a contract he
will notify the awarding official of the receipt of any
communication from the EPA indicating that a facility to
be utilized for performance of or benefit from the con-
tract is under consideration to be listed on the EPA
List of Violating Facilities.
(d) To include or cause to be included in any
contract or subcontract which exceeds $100,000 the afore-
mentioned criteria and requirements.
I
I
13. SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS
SHEET NO.
Ii Site Plan
2 Floor Plan - North Part
3 Floor Plan - South Part
' 4 Building Elevations
5 Building Elevations
6 Building Sections
Building Sections and Details
I8 Roof Plan
9 Wall Section Details
10 Wall Section Details
Iii Wall Section Details
12 ''::. Finish Schedule and Details
13 Door Schedule and Details
' 14 Miscellaneous Details
15 Miscellaneous Details
16 Curtainwall Elevations and Details
S-1 Foundation Plan - North Part
S-2 Foundation Plan - South Part
S-3 Roof Framing Plan - North Part
S-4 Roof Framing Plan - South Part
IS -5 Steel Framing Details
S-6 Steel Framing Details
ME-i Plot Plan - Mechanical and Electrical
' M-2 North Part Floor Plan - Mechanical
M-3 South Part Floor Plan - Mechanical
M-4 Piping Diagrams - Mechanical
M-5 Schedules and Details - Mechanical
E-2 North Part Floor Plan - Electrical Lighting
E-3 North Part Floor Plan - Electrical Power &
Auxiliary Systems
' E-4 South Part Floor Plans - Electrical
E-5 Diagrams - Electrical
E-6 Schedules - Electrical
' 14. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between
' the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and the
time for completion as specified in the contract of the work to
be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this contract; and it
' is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced
in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in
the "Notice to Proceed."
'The Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted
regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress
as will insure full completion thereof within the time specified.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor
and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work des-
cribed herein is a reasonable time for the completion of the same,
taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual
'industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
[1
I
' If the said Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to com-
plete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper
extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does
hereby agree, as a part consideration for the awarding of this
' contract, to pay to the Owner the amount specified in the contract,
not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for such breach of
contract as hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day
' that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated
in the contract for completing the work.
' The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the
Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme
difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner
would in such event sustain, and said amount is agreed to be the
' amount of damages which the Owner would sustain and said amount
shall be retained from time to time by the Owner from current
periodical estimates.
' It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and
every portion of this contract and of the specifications wherein a
definite and certain length of time is fixed for the performance
of any act whatsoever; and where under the contract an additional
time is allowed for the completion of any work, the new time limit
fixed by such extension shall be of the essence of this contract.
' Provided, that the Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated
amesg or any excess cost when the delay in completion of the work
is due:
' (a) To any preference, priority or allocation order
duly issued by the Government;
(b) To unforeseeable cause beyond the control and
without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, including,
but not restricted to, acts of God, or of the public enemy,
' acts of the Owner, acts of another Contractor in the
performance of a contract with the Owner, fires, floods,
epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight
' embargoes; and severe weather; and
(c) To any delays of subcontractors or suppliers
occasioned by any of the causes specified in subsections
'(a) and (b) of this article:
Provided, Further, that the Contractor shall, within ten (10) days
' from the beginning of such delay, unless the Owner shall grant a
further period of time prior to the date of final settlement of the
contract, notify the Owner, in writing, of the causes of the delay,
' who shall ascertain the facts and extent of the delay and notify
the Contractor within a reasonable time of its decision in the matter.
I
H
I
I
SECTION 1
I
I
I
I
I
H
I
I
SITE PREPARATION
1. EXCAVATION AND T 4BAN1CMENT
A. Descrjption: This item shall consist of excavating,
removing and satisfactorily disposing of all materials within
the limits of the work required to construct the building pad
in accordance with these specifications and in conformity
with the elevations shown on the plans. All topsoil shall he
removed throughout the building area and be carefully stock-
piled on the premises as directed. Removal of subsurface
material below topsoil will be required to sufficient depth to
provide suitable material to insure compaction as specified in
Paragraph 1 C (2) of the Specifications. Material for back
fill shall he as specified under Paragraph 5, Section 2 -
Building Excavation.
In case the volume of the excavation exceeds that required
to construct the embankment to the grades indicated any excess
shall be. used to grade the areas to ultimate development, or
wasted as directed. In case the volume of excavation is not
sufficient for construction of the fill to the grades indicated,
the deficiency shall be supplied by this Contractor from off
the site, to meet requirements as set forth above.
' Be Classification: All materials excavated shall be
defined as "Unclassified Excavation". Test borings have been
made at points indicated on the plans and a log showing classi-
fication of soils encountered are shown. "Unclassified
Excavation" shall include all excavation performed under this
item regardless of the material encountered.
I
I
I
I
[I
I
Li
Frozen condition of any of the different classified
materials taken from excavation shall constitute no claim for
higher, classification or for extra work on the part of the
Contractor.
C. Construction Methods: (1) General - The rough
excavation shall be carried to such depth that sufficient
material will he left above the designated grade to allow for
compaction to this grade. Likewise, on embankments, sufficient
material shall be placed above the designated grade to allow
for compaction and settlement. Should the Contractor, through
negligence or other fault, excavate below the designated lines,
he shall replace such excavation with approved materials, in
an approved manner and conditions, at his own expense.The
Architect shall have complete control over the excavation,
movinr, placing 4nd �}ii posi ion ofa l material, a d,shal
determine the suitability of materials to be placed in embank-
ments. All materials determined unsuitable shall he disposed
of in waste areas or as directed. In general, the layer of
topsoil shall not be used in fills or in subgrades but shall be
handled and placed as directed and specified above.
Li
1-1
SITE PREPARATION
The Contractor shall inform and satisfy himself as to the
' character, quantity and distribution of all material to he
excavated. No payment will be made for any excavation material
which is used for purposes other than those designated. All
' spoil areas shall be leveled to a uniform line and sections
and shall present a neat appearance before project acceptance.
The surface elevation of spoil areas shall not extend above
' the surface elevation of adjacent or contiguous usable areas
of the site.
(2) Tests - Tests shall be made as directed by the
' Architect of the soil to determine its moisture content, den-
sity and other characteristics so that directions can be
formulated to insure compaction of not less than 95% to the
' maximum density at optimum moisture. Before any work is
started, standard Proctor tests shall he made and as many tests
as may be necessary during compaction of fills to insure this
result shall be done by modified Proctor test procedures.
The Contractor shall have these tests made by a laboratory
approved by the Architect. Three (3) copies of each test
' report shall be sent to the Architect.
(3) General Areas Compaction - General areas outside
' building pad which are filled are not to be compacted with
special equipment. During construction of such filled areas,
the Contractor shall route his equipment at all times, both
when loaded and when empty, over the layers as they are placed
and shall distribute the travel evenly over the entire area.
Layers shall generally be not more than R" thick.
I
I
Embankment of the building areas to be compacted in accor-
dance with Paragraph 1 under this Section.
Y
If it is necessary in the prosecution of the work to
interrupt existing surface drainage sewers, or underdrainage,
conduits, utilities, or similar underground structures, or parts
thereof, the Contractor shall be responsible for and shall take
all necessary precautions to protect and preserve or provide
temporary services for same. When such facilities are encountered,
the Contractor shall notify the Architect who shall arrange for
their removal if necessary. The Contractor shall, at his own
expense, satisfactorily repair all damage to such facilities
or structures which may result from any of his operations or
from negligence during the period of the contract.
(4) Excavation - Excavation shall he performed as speci-
fied in Paragraph C (1) at such places as are indicated on the
contract plans to the lines, grades, and elevation shown or as
directed by the Architect, and shall be made in such a manner
that the requirements for formation of embankment can he
followed. All material encountered of whatever nature within
the limits indicated shall be removed and disposed of as directed.
During the process of excavation, the grade shall he maintained
in such condition that it will be well drained at all times.
L
1-2
' SITE PREPARATION
' when directed, temporary drains and drainage ditches shall he
installed to intercept or divert surface water which may
affect the prosecution or condition of the work.
The excavation material shall be handled in such a manner
as to allow..the selected. material to be properly placed in the
embankment and in the capping of subgrades.
' If, at the time of excavation, it is not possible to place
any material in its proper section of the permanent construction,
' it shall be stock -piled in approved areas for later uses.,
(here rock, shale, clay, hardpan or other material unsat'is-
' factory -for subgrade is encountered, it shall be excavated to
a depth -.of at least twelve (12) inches, or such greater depth
as the Architect may direct, below the contemplated surface of
the subgrade. All material to he so excavated shall be paid
' for at the contract unit price per cubic yard for "Unclassified
Excavation". The portion so excavated shall be refilled with
suitable selected material as specified, obtained from the grading
' operations if intended for use outside building, for interior
.
use of material as specified and thoroughly compacted by rolling
as specified. The necessary refilling will constitute a part of
the embankment.
Tht contractor shall make the distribution as indicated on
the planso' and the widening or narrowing of the section, raising
' or lowering of the grade to avoid haul will not he permitted.
The right is reserved to make minor adjustments or revisions
in lines or grades if found necessary as the work progresses,
' due to discrepancies or in order to obtain satisfactory construc-
tion.
(5) Ditch Excavation - Ditch excavation shall consist of
' excavating for drainage ditches such as intercepting inlet,
outlet, off take, temporary levee construction, as may he required.
The work shall be performed in the proper sequence with the
' other construction. The location of all ditches or levees
will be established on the ground. All satisfactory material
shall be placed in fills; unsatisfactory material, waste or
' surplus material shall he disposed of as directed.
(6) Stripping - All vegetation such as brush, heavy sod,
heavy growth of grass, decayed vegetation matter, rubbish and
any other unsuitable material within the area upon which
embankment is to be placed shall be stripped or otherwise
removed before the embankment is started, and in no case shall
such objectionable material be allowed in or under the embank-
ment.
(7) Formation of Building Pad - Building pad shall be
' formed of materials placed in successive horizontal layers of
not more than eight (8) inches in loose depth for the full width
of the cross section. See Paragraph 4, Section 2 for material
to be used to construct building pad.
' 1-3
' SITE PREPARATION
The grading operations shall be so conducted and the
'
material shall be placed so as to produce a suitable soil
structure. All materials entering the embankment shall be
spread in successive layers as specified.
IThe operations on earth work shall he suspended at any time
when satisfactory results cannot be obtained on account of rain,
' freezing weather, or other such unsatisfactory conditions of the
field. At all times the Contractor shall drag, blade or slope
the embankment to provide proper surface drainage.
During construction of the embankment, the Contractor
shall route his equipment at all times, both when loaded and
when empty, over the layers as they are placed and shall distri-
' bute the travel evenly over the entire width of the embankment.
In the construction of embankment, starting layers shall be
' placed in the deepest portion of the fill and as placement pro-
gresses, layers shall be constructed approximately parallel to
the finished grade lines.
Frozen material shall not he placed in the embankment nor
shall embankment be placed upon frozen material.
' The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of
all embankments made under the contract and shall replace any
portion which, in the opinion of the Architect, has become
displaced due to carelessness or negligence on the part of the
'Contractor.
(8) Equipment - a) Grading: The Contractor may use any
' type of earth moving equipment he may desire or has at his
disposal, provided equipment is in a satisfactory condition and
of such capacity that the grading schedule can be maintained;
' which schedule being as planned by the Contractor and approved
by the Architect in accordance with the total calendar days
bid for the construction of the completed project. The
' Contractor shall furnish, operate and maintain such equipment'
as is necessary to control uniform layers, section and smooth=
ness of grade, for compaction and drainage.
' b) Compacting: The compacting equipment shall be of
such design, weight and quantity to obtain the required density
in accordance with the grading schedule.
i. Tamping Roller: The tamping rollers shall consist
of one or more units. Each unit shall consist of a water-
tight cylinderical drum not less than forty-eight (48) inches
'
in length and shall be surmounted by metal studs with tamping
feet projecting not less than seven (7) inches from the
surface of the drum and spaced not less than six (6) inches
' nor more than ten (10) inches measured diagonally from center
to center. The area of each tamper foot shall he not less than
four (4) square inches nor more than twelve (12) square inches.
1
' 1-4
SITE PREPARATION
' Each unit shall be provided with a suitable tamper foot cleaning
device. Where more than one rolling unit is used, the rolling
units to adapt themselves to uneven ground surfaces and to
rotate independently. When empty, the roller shall weigh at
' least 120 pounds per square inch of area of tamping feet in
contact with the ground. The maximum weight shall be such that
the required densities are obtained. The roller and the operat-
' ing tractor shall meet the approval of the Architect.
2. Pneumatic Roller: The pneumatic roller shall consist
' of pneumatic tires arranged in a manner so as to provide a
satisfactory compacting unit. The roller shall have an effec-
tive rolling width of at least sixty (60) inches and shall give
a compression of at least 275 pounds per inch of width of tread
' when fully loaded. The tires shall be uniformly inflated. The
roller and the operating power unit shall meet the approval of
the Architect.
' 3. Smooth Roller: The smooth self-propelled or power
roller shall weigh at least ten tons and may be the tandem or
' three -wheel type. The wheels of the roller shall be equipped
with adjustable scrapers. The roller shall be maintained in
good condition and operated by an experienced rollerman.
' 4. Other Equipment: Other equipment may be used for
compacting and consolidating the embankment, upon approval of
the Architect. Such equipment shall be routed over the area
' being compacted and shall he operated until the required density
is obtained.
5. Watering: Tank wagons, tank trucks, or distributors
'
equipped with a suitable sprinkling device shall he used for
watering. Satisfactory equipment shall be maintained on the
project at all times when embankment construction is in progress.
' 6. Preparation and protection of the top of the subgrade
within building areas shall be compacted to the density sped-
' fied and the surface, when completed, shall be true to the lines
and grades shown on the plans and/or as directed by the Architect
and shall be done prior to the foundation work. After comple-
' tion of backfilling and compaction, the top portion of the
subqrade shall be shaped correctly and brought to a firm,
unyielding layer of not less than ninety-five per cent (95%)
density as determined by the compaction control tests of the
' laboratory. The rolling of the entire area shall be done with
an approved power roller weighing not less than ten (10) tons
or other approved type of roller. Any irregularities or
' depressions that develop under rolling shall he corrected by
loosening the material at these places and adding, removing or
• replacing material until the surface is smooth and uniform.
Any portion of the area which is not accessible to a roller shall
be compacted to the required density by approved mechanical
tampers. The material shall be sprinkled with water during
rolling or tamping when directed by the Architect or as sped-
' fied by the laboratory.
1 1
' SITE PREPARATION
111 soft and yielding material and materials which will
not compact readily when rolled or tamped shall be removed
as directed by the Architect and replaced with suitable material.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
LI
I
I
11
I
At all times the top of the subgrade shall be kept in such
condition that it will drain readily and effectively. In
handling materials, tools and equipment, the Contractor shall
protect the subgrade from damage by laying planks thereon when
directed and shall take such other precautions as may be
deemed necessary. In no case will vehicles be allowed to
travel in as single track. If ruts are formed, the subgrade
shall be reshaped and rolled. Storage or stockpiling of
materials on the top of the subgrade will not be permitted.
Until the subgrade has been checked and approved, no subbase,
base or surface course shall be laid thereon.
7. Haul: No payment will he made separately or directly
for haul on any part of the work. All haul will be considered
a necessary and incidental part of the work and the cost
thereof shall be considered by the Contractor and included in
the contract price.
B. Tolerances: In those areas upon which a subgrade
or base course is to be placed, the top of the subgrade shall
be of such smoothness that when tested with a sixteen (16)
foot straightedge, it shall not show any deviation in excess
of one-half (1/2) inch or shall not be more than one -tenth
(0.10) of a foot from the true grade as established by grade
hubs or pins. Any deviation in excess of these amounts shall
be corrected by loosening, adding, or removing material,
reshaping and recbmpacting by sprinkling and rolling.
1-6
ISECTION 2
' BUILDING EXCAVATION
1. EXCAVATING
The Contractor shall do all excavating necessary for and
incidental to the proper completion of the work called for by
this specification and the accompanying drawings, and shall
' excavate down to or fill up to grades required for the execu-
tion of the foundation work.
I. The compacted fill under floors within the building area
was specified and installed under the "Site Preparation" contract.
This Contractor shall acquaint himself of the conditions when
he visits the site and he shall do any and all additional
excavation or fill should it be required to properly complete
the work.
' Elevations and grade lines marked on the drawings indicate
the heights in relation to a datum point noted on drawings.
' Under no circumstances shall excavated material be left,
even temporarily, where it will interfere with the Owner's or
other contractors' operations.
' Excavation shall be made outside of walls required to
allow for inspection, placing and removal of forms and all
trenches shall be left open until all work has been inspected
and approved by the Architect.
Pits containing any kind of loose material under foundations
' shall be dug out to solid bottom unless otherwise directed.
Trenches for lowest sections of concrete footings and founda-
tions laid on the ground shall be excavated exact size of same
where possible. The bottom o€ all excavations for foundations
shall be leveled off at exact depths required and all founda-
tions shall be placed on undisturbed earth; if filling is
required under foundations, it shall be done with approved
' concrete as directed. Earth filling under foundations will
not be accepted. Cost of extra work and material required by
careless, excavating, beyond the depths shown on the drawing,
shall be. borne by the Contractor.
Upon completion of the excavation and before footings are
placed, the Architect shall be given due notice so that he may
' inspect the excavations in which foundations and footings are
to be placed.
Excavation shall be sufficiently made so that no work
'
rests on soil which is not capable of the soil pressure of
4,000 lbs. per sq. ft. If the Contractor is in doubt of ,such
work, he shall ask for further instruction from the Architect
' and failing to do this, he shall be responsible for any damage
to the building due to settlement.
Li
' 2-1
' BUILDING EXCAVATION
Excavation for work beyond the dimensions shown on draw-
' ings, if required, by nature of the soil or by existing condi-
tions not indicated on drawings, will be paid for as an extra
but the price per cubic foot must be agreed upon before the
work is started.
All old sewers, piping, etc., encountered by this Contractor
' shall he properly taken care of, and where directed by the
Architect, shall be removed and the ends plugged up tight.
Any active sewers or pipes encountered shall be properly shored
and protected. This work shall be done by additional allowance
in accordance with unit prices agreed upon before the work is
started.
' The Contractor shall do all shoring necessary to maintain
banks of excavations and shall make good damage done to site.
Any surplus excavated materials to he disposed of by this
' Contractor.
2. DRILLED PIERS
LI
I
L
I
[1
I
L
I
I
I
For the building where foundations piers are shown, the
Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for drilling piers.
The holes shall be drilled straight and to depths as indicated
on the drawings. Materials excavated from pier holes shall
be disposed of as directed by the Architect. Where, in the
opinion of the Architect,' crumbling or caving in of pier hole
wall is likely, casings may be required. In the event casing
of pier holes is required, the casings may, at the Contractor's
option, be abandoned provided no extra expense to the Owner
is involved, or it may be removed in lifts as each lift of
concrete is placed, in such a manner that the bottom of the
casing will at all times be below the top of the concrete
being placed, until the top of the concrete is above all unstable
earth strata. Drilled piers shall he size as shown on the
drawings.
3. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to safely
support the sides of excavations to prevent danger to workmen
and to the work. The Architect shall have the authority to
stop the work when he finds that such safety requirements are
not being met, but this authority is not to be construed as
making the Architect responsible for the adequacy of such safety
measures.
4. REMOVAL OF WATER
The Contractor shall provide and maintain pumps, auction
and discharge lines, well points and power for operating same
in sufficient number and capacity to keep all excavations,
pits, trenches, etc., free from standing water at all times.
5. BACKPILLING & EMBANKMENT
No backfilling shall be done until the foundation work in
excavation has been inspected and approved by the Architect.
I
2-2
n
BUILDING EXCAVATION
C
I
I
I
I
El
I
n
n
I
I
I
n
I
L
Sufficient time shall be allowed for inspection after notice
is given that the work is ready for inspection. Backfill
shall not be placed against retaining walls until the Architect
determines that they have attained sufficient strength.
Material required for backfilling and embankment in excess
of that available from excavations shall be obtained from off
the site by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide S.B.2 material meeting
Arkansas State Highway Department Specifications No. 203 for
fill below concrete floors and shall compact this material in
place in layers not over 6" in thickness, to attain compaction
of not less than 95% of the maximum density at optimum moisture.
Before any work is started, modified Proctor tests shall be
made and as many tests as may be necessary during compaction of
fills to insure this, Results shall be assured by field den-
sity test procedures done at the Contractor's expense. Drainage
fill under concrete floor slabs shall consist of clean crushed
rock, or other similar approved free -draining materials of such
size that all will pass a 1-1/2" screen and all will be retained
on a No. 4 screen and free from earth, clay or other foreign
substances. The Contractor shall provide three copies of
density test reports for two points in each layer of fill in
building pad areas. These tests shall be made by a testing
laboratory engaged regularly in such work and approved by the
Architect and the Contractor. Tests shall be based upon modi-
fied Proctor methods and shall demonstrate that material so
tested is compacted to not less than 95% of maximum density
with optimum moisture content. Following the making of such
tests and after completion of the fill the Contractor shall use
care to maintain moisture conditions until. concrete is placed.
6. TERMITE TREATMENT
All earth fill under concrete floors shall be treated for
termite hazard by the "Terminix" method of E. L. Bruce Company.
Provide Certificate of Treatment and five (5) year insurance
of policy against termite damage.
7. DOWNSPOUT DRAINS
Install 4" clay or concrete sewer pipe drain lines from
downspouts as shown on Roof Plan. Lay with cemented joints.
E
2-3
C
SECTION 3
U
I
I
I
I
I
El
I
I.I
I
I
I
Li
I
I
C
I
FOUNDATION AND CONCRETE WORK
1. GENERAL CONDITIONS
The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
Information to Bidders preceding and other pertinent documents
issued by the Architect are a part of these specifications
and shall be complied with in every respect.
2. SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, concrete mixer, tools,
reinforcing, cement, etc., required to execute all concrete
work required and as shown on plans.
B. All work shall be first class in every respect,
securing level, square and plumb lines to detail as shown on
plans.
C.
Work included shall
be as
shown on
plans and as called
for in
the Specifications and
such
as listed
below:
1)
testing laboratory
10)
reinforcing and mesh
2)
inspection
11)
mixing and placing
3)
concrete foundations
12)
finishes
4)
cement
13)
shop drawings
5)
aggregates
14)
concrete strengths
6)
anchors
15)
built-in work
7)
form work
16)
expansion joints
8)
water
17)
cleaning up
9) curing
D. All work shall be done in accordance with the latest
edition of ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete".
3. TESTING LABORATORY
A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of a
testing laboratory as approved by the Architect to furnish the
following:
1) Test and samples of coarse and fine aggregates.
2) Design and test of all mixtures to be used.
3) Test cylinders.
B. Design mix will be established by the testing labora-
tory and shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
Proportions to be determined by laboratory design for a mixture
of 10% higher strength than specified design strength of concrete.
It is intended here to obtain cylinder breakage at 10% above
specified strength. (See item No. C below.) Design mixture
to be tested in accordance with A.S.T.M. designated of cylinders
from the design mix to be made and results to be submitted to
and approved by the Architect before mixture is used on the job.
Where previous tests have been made of the same materials,
results of such tests to be submitted for approval in lieu of
additional tests.
3-i
IFOUNDATION AND CONCRETE WORK
C. Field and Control Cylinder to be taken, prepared and
'
cured by the Contractor, and shall be tested by laboratory.
Not less than two cylinders to be made from each separate pour
or each 25 C.Y. of concrete placed, to be designated as "Field"
cylinders and shall be stored at job under conditions approxi-
'
mating field conditions until tested. One cylinder to be tested
at 7 days and one cylinder at 28 days, or as directed by
Architect. Sampling, curing, and testing of cylinders to be
'
in accordance with A.S.T.M. Designation C-31-69 (sampling) and
C-39-69 (testing)."Field" cylinders and tests are to determine
safe stripling and loading of members. In no case shall less than
ayllpd®rs per . 25 yards of concrete placed on the job be
'em
made. : In addition, the Contractor shall make any additional
cylinders as required by the Architect.
[
I
I
I
I
I
I
Li
I
I
I
I
D. •...Tast•reports to be furnished directly by the laboratory
to Contractor"'and the Architect for all tests made on jb as
daily report of pours and results of cylinder tests.
For every cylinder testing under
strength:,: the Architect may require removal
deductioh'of the full value of the 25 yards
price, at the option of the Architect.
the specified
of the concrete or
from the contract
9. INS CTION, SAMPLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIAL
A. `t Architect and testing laboratory to hav
to all points where concrete materials are stored,
or mixed and all materials, equipment and methods
subjeet..to their inspection, tests and approval.
e
free access
proportioned
used to be
B. Samples of materials for tests to be furnished by the
Contractor, either at the site or source of supply as directed.
C. Storage of materials and aggregates will be handled
and stored separately in manner to prevent segregation or
intrusion of foreign matter, and in sufficient quantities to
prevent wide fluctuation in moisture content.
S. CONCRETE FOUNDATION
A. Materials, test, workmanship. etc., for concrete
foundations shall be in accordance with Specifications for
"Concrete Work" of the Specification. Concrete shall be 3000$
at 28 days.
1) Piers shall be drilled cylinderical straight shaft
cast in place concrete piers, to diameter, depth and size as
shown on the plans. All holes shall be drilled vertically in
location where shown on plans. Error in location of piers
affecting the loading condition of the piers shall be corrected
by abandoning the piers and drilling of new piers, or as directed
by the Architect.
I
3-2
' FOUNDATION AND CONCRETE WORE
2) All holes shall be free of water and loose earth
'
before concrete is placed. No drilled hole to remain open with-
out concrete being placed for more than two (2) hours.
Penetrate rock strata a minimum of 6" on the low side of the
rock.
3) Provide steel casing as required by soil conditions
to prevent sloughing of drilled side walls of piling, or to
stop water from entering holes.
4) Reinforcing shall be of steel grade as covered under
' "Reinforcing", Paragraph 9, and by plans and shall be securely
fixed in place during pouring operation.
' 51 concrete shall be placed in drilled holes within two
(2) hours after drilling, in such manner as to prevent displac-
ing steel reinforcing and prevent separation of aggregate.
Concrete shall be 3000# concrete at 28 days. Where minor
amount of water is encountered in holes, place concrete by the
use of closed end tremie.
' 6) This Contractor and the Architect shall inspect shafts
and pier bottoms to insure that all holes are free of earth
and are size to shaft as shown on plans. No concrete shall be
' placed in any pier hole until approval is issued by the
Architect.
' 6. WOOD FORMS
A. Construct all form work in a most substantial manner
to produce the sections and units of size shown on the plans:.
' All surfaces shall be plumb, square, straight and level and
leakproof° Brace forms in a substantial manner.
' B. `For wood forms, use good No. 2 grade yellow pine
lumber Sfthe proper dimensions to make substantial, and for
finish eaosed surfaces, use plywood forms to make smooth,
' thereby'gequiring the minimum amount of pointing and rubbing.
to get a proper effect. Reuse lumber or plywood if in good
conditidS after removing nails. All contact form lumber to be
oiled w.:'ttir.a non -stain oil or shellac except where plaster or
' stucco 1W !t� be applied to surface. All lumber for exposed
concrete shall be sized, dressed and seasoned.
' work for concrete receiving stucco, plaster or
cement •bed coat, shall be rough -surfaced forms to provide a
mechanical bond on the scratch coat of plaster, stucco or bed
coat.
C. Use removable metal wall ties as approved by the
Architect to produce a surface straight and free from metal in
' surface of concrete. Same to be removed at depth of 1-1/2",
with holes pointed up and rubbed to blend into wall. Wire ties
will not be permitted.
1
I 3-3
FOUNDATION AND CONCRETE WORK
7. ANCHOR SLOTS
' All brick, concrete, masonry or other masonry wall butting
into or passing adjacent to concrete walls, columns, or piers
' shall be anchored to concrete using Dovetail Dayton, or
approved equal, double lock anchor slots and anchors spaced
approximately 16 inches on center full height.
' 8. REINFORCING STEEL
A. Materials shall be made from new billet steel, inter-
'• mediate grade, A.S.T.M. A615, or rail steel, standard grade,
A.S.T.M.gA616. Use deformed bars.
B. Steel fabric reinforcing shall be according to
Standard Specifications of A.S.T.M., A185 size and gauge as
shown oz Plans, cold drawn welded wire for slabs.
IC. Submit fabrication plans for approval by Architect.
See Paragraph 18, this section, for reinforcing shop drawing.
Bend and locate as indicated on Plans and at location to pro-
' duce the required strengths of units. Errors in fabrication
shall be corrected by this Contractor to satisfaction of
Architect.
' D. Tie together, with wire all reinforcing steel. Pro-
vide seats, chairs, supports, etc., to hold steel in proper
location while depositing concrete in accordance with ACI A318.
' Extra chairs and supports shall be installed as directed by
the Architect.
Ii) All chair legs and other supports for reinforcing
steel in slabs, beams or joist having exposed to view underside,
either inside or outside the building shall be galvanized.
' E. Provide minimum concrete coverage over all reinforcing
steel, in accordance with ACI 318. Splices in reinforcing
shall be in accordance with ACI 318.
' 9. AGGREGATES
1.
' A. ;':Rine aggregates shall be sand, free from loam, and
other impurities and shall be of angular grains, clean and
properly screeded. Fine aggregates shall meet the requirements
of Section 802, Paragraph 802.6 d) of the Arkansas Highway
Commission Standard Specifications for Highway Construction for
concrete fine aggregate. Samples to be tested by laboratory
and approved by Architect.
' B. Coarse aggregates shall be gravel, same to be clean,
hard and free from foreign material. Size to be that which
will pass mesh. Sample shall be tested by laboratory and
approved by Architect. Size graduation to be call 5 (AE)
Arkansas Highway Commission Standard Specifications for Highway
Construction adjusted as directed by the Architect.
' 3-4
I
FOUNDATION AND CONCRETE WORK
I
I
10. PORTLAND CEMENT
Shall be a high grade fresh Portland Cement meeting the
standard specifications of the A.S.T.M. C-150-69. A cement
is to be selected and shall be approved by the architect
before purchase. It is required to use one brand of cement
for all exposed concrete.
' 11. WATER
Shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil,
'
acid, alkali, organic matter, or deleterious substances, and
shall be potable.
12. STRENGTHS
A. Strength of concrete shall be designed as to mix and
' the amount of water by laboratory used in the different por-
tions of the structure. For use in estimating quantities,
the Contractor may base his material on the following table;
(Not light weight concrete)
' Water Gal. Sacks of Lbs. of Lbs. of
Strength per sack Mix Cement Sand Gravel
3000# 6 1--3-3 6.0 1320 1800
Ii) Strength of concrete at 28 days shall be 3000 p.s.i..
2) The laboratory design for the strength specified shall
be used in all cases.
13. MIXING AND PLACING
It will be the Contractor`s responsibility to furnish
concrete which will conform to strengths specified.
B. Concrete to be of consistency and composition that can
' be worked readily into corners and angles of forms around
reinforcing cement faces. Within the prescribed limits,
Contractor to adjust consistency of concrete as necessary to
' provide mixtures which will be placeable with reasonable methods
of placing and compacting. When high frequency mechanical
vibration is used, the limiting consistencies may be modified
subject to approval, to give proper workability.
C. Water -cement ratio consistencies maximum gross water
per sack of cement for 3000 lbs concrete to be 6 gal. and slump
' from 1" to 3". Field adjustment of water may be made by the
Contractor, subject to approval of the Architect.
I
' 3-5
FOUNDATION AND CONCRETE WORK
ID. Ready -Mixed concrete will be approved if meeting
all requirements as to tested cement, design mix and consisten-
cies as specified.
' E. Measurements of cement, fine and coarse aggregate
shall be made separately, based on dry, loose weight per cu. ft.
for aggregate. Batches requiring fractional sacks of cement
' other than:l/2 sacks will not be allowed unless the cement is
weighed for each batch. Aggregates to be proportioned by
weight, with compensation made for weight of moisture. Weighing
' equipment to meet Architect °s approval and device capable of
measurement to one pint plus or minus.
F. No change in materials or established mix to be made
without Architect°s approval.
G. All mixing shall be done in mechanical batch mixer,
' equipped with automatic water measuring device. Mixer, tools,
and equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened
concrete.
IN.. Each batch shall be mixed for at least one minute
after all ingredients are in the mixer. The entire contents
of the mixer drum shall be discharged before recharging.
' Y. Retempering or remixing of concrete which has par-
tially set will not be permitted.
' J. Concrete shall be deposited continuously and as
rapidly as possible between construction joints as approved by
the Architect. Concrete must not be dumped a distance greater
'
than 12°. Over 12' - 0" shall be placed using a closed end
tremie, and/or in a manner that will not cause segregation of
cement and Aggregates.
' K. Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by rodding'or
vibrating to provide a dense concrete, free of honeycombing of
' the dimension and shapes shown on the plans.
L. All pits, holes, and trenches for piling or walls
must be kept covered or protected to prevent water entering
same or excessive drying. All water shall be removed from
excavations before pouring concrete. Where minor amounts of
water occur in piling excavations, contractor may place con-
' Crete by using a closed end tremie, under direction of the
Architect*
M. . Tops of concrete pours and edges of construction
'
joints shall be trowelled straight and true while concrete is
plastic. Remove all laitance, dirt and hardened concrete
from concrete and exposed reinforcing steel at construction
' joints before making adjacent pours, slush clean surfaces with
neat cement grout immediately before beginning pour.
' 3-6
FOINDATION AND CONCRETE WORK
N. Pipes under concrete floors on earth shall have
received tests required before being covered.
O. Immediately before pouring slabs on earth the surface
' of ground or fill shall be brought to a true, even plane, and
compacted to a solid bearing. ktyttrniitable material shall be
removed and replaced with materials approved by the Architect.
P. Care shall be taken to see that all reinforcing
of slabs is kept 3/4" above bottom concrete slab.
' Q. Mix only the amount of concrete that will be placed
within 45 minutes. Concrete mixed over 45 minutes shall not
be used and shall be abandoned.
tR.. Clean forms before depositing concrete. The Contractor
shall call•the Architect upon completing placing of all reiniforc-
' ing steel and form work for the pour next intended, and shall
not comma`ence pouring operation until all forms and steel are
approve�'.'by the Architect.
S.. Construction joints and points of ending the pouring
of concrete shall be approved by the Architect. Concrete
floor slabs on grade shall be placed in sections and size ;of
pour shallbe adjusted so that construction joints fall under,.'
partitioness; where possible. Place alternate section to allow
for dryingshrinkage of concrete slab. Joints if necessary
' in grade beams shall be located in general near midspan.
T. Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating the
concrete materials and protecting the concrete during freezing
' or near -freezing weather. All concrete materials and all
reinforcement, forms, fillers, and ground with which the
concrete. is to come in contact shall be free from frost. No..
' frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be used.
When the mean daily temperature is below 40O F., tempera-
ture of 'concrete when placed shall be between 55O and 90O F.
'
and shall be maintained at a temperature of between 50O and..
70O F. for at least seven days for regular concrete and three
days for high -early -strength concrete, or for as much more time
' as is necessary to insure the proper rate of curing.
During hot weather, steps shall be taken to reduce concrete
temperature and water evaporation by proper attention to ingre-
dients, production methods, handling, placing, protection and
curing.
' Changes in temperature o€ concrete shall be as uniform as
possible and shall not exceed 5O F. in any one hour or 500 F.
in any 24 -hour period.
' U. Placing of concrete not to be started until necessary
preparations have been completed and Architects approval given.
Preparation to consist of completing all form work involved,
' 3-7
FOUNDATION AND CONCRETE WORK
placing all reinforcing steel, pipes, conduits, sleeves,
' hangers, anchors, fastening device, outlets, openings, and
other such work to be built in or provided for in the section
to be poured, and any other preparations required for concret-
' ing operations.
V. Concrete for grade beams to be placed on loose soil
or loam and a strip of .006 mil visqueen 2" wider than grade
beam placed to separate concrete from soil. No concrete is
to be placed on frozen soil and adequate protection against
frost action shall be provided during freezing weather.
' W. Concrete is to be transported from mixer or from
transporting vehicle to place of final deposit as rapidly as
' practicable by methods which prevent separation or loss of
ingredients or displacement of reinforcing steel. When
deposited in forms, concrete to have quality required by
' specifications.
X.• Concreting not to be started during rain and not to
be continued during such weather after having been started
' except long enough to come to a suitable cut-off point. Con-
crete placed during rain to have cement content increased in
the amount of one sack of cement per cubic yard of concrete.
Y. Concrete slabs on fill shall not be placed until exterior
walls and roof are placed, and until all fill material has been
thoroughly settled and approved by the Architect.
Z. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor
to notify concerned subcontractors of his intention to pour
' concrete and the area involved in sufficient time to allow
all concerned time to place necessary and required equipment
or items of work.
' 14. CURING
A. Concrete to be maintained in moist condition for at
t least first 7 days after placing. This may be accomplished
by one of the following methods, which must be approved by the
Architect.
1) Surface remaining in contact with forms.
2) Covering with waterproof paper, Sisalcraft, or
' as approved.
3) Covering with I" layer of thoroughly wet, non-
staining sand, earth or 2" of non -staining sawdust.
4) Covering with burlap or cotton mats and kept con-
' tinuously wet.
5) Surfaces protected by ponding, complete water sur-
face.
' 6) Covering with 6" layer of thoroughly wet straw hay
or similar material. (non -staining)
71 Continuous sprinkling of exposed surfaces.
' 3-8
FOUNDATION ANT) CONCRETE WORK
15. FINE ISHS
'
A. All interior or exterior concrete surfaces, other than
floors, exposed to view shall be free of all form and tool marks
' and shall have finish as covered in B below,
B. All interior and exterior walls, beam sides, and
' columns exposed to view shall have side forms removed within
24 to 30 hours after placing concrete, and finish applied in
strict accordance with steps below:
1) Patch all holes, voids, and honeycombs with grout
mixture.
2) Hand rub surface lightly with carhorundum stone
' using water. Rub out any form marks, keeping sur-
face wet during first rub.
3) Second rubbing shall be applied after all exterior
' work has been completed prior to final acceptance
inspection and shall he a rich grout mixture of
sand and cement, mixed with "Surco" latex binder,
or an approved equal.
1 (a) "Surco" or approved equal hinder as manu-
factured by the Surco International Corpora-
' tion of Atlanta, Georgia.
(b) Mix and apply as directed by the manufac-
turer. Apply in thickness as needed to
' obtain uniform finish and texture and to
square all edges and alignall corners.
Use wood float finish.
IC. Trowel Finish Floors - 1) All interior and other
trowel finish concrete floors shall have trowel smooth finish
applied as follows:
' (a) After placing concrete screed surface to a
level, true plane.
' (b) Float surface with a wide straightedge
extended arm float to obtain smooth surface.
(c) Use an expanded wire "Jitterbug" puddler
over entire surface to depress surface
' aggregate below the finish surface 3/4"
and to puddle -concrete.
(d) After initial set has occurred in concrete
' floor slabs, trowel surface with steel
trowel to a smooth, even and level surface.
(e) t there necessary to fill low spots, use
ready mixed concrete, thoroughly puddled
'
into concrete floor. No dry dust shall
be.applied to floor slabs.
' 2) Slab finishes to be level except where water condi-
tions exist,, then same shall be sloped to drain. No water
pockets shall he permitted.
1
I
3-9
L
FOUNDATION AND CONCRETE WORK
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
H
I
I
I
H
H
I
H
3) Work shall be done in such a manner so there will be
no defective surfaces such as crazing, cracks, dusting or pits
or holes in the surface.
4) All exterior and interior exposed cement finish
floors shall have floor hardener applied. Same to he Lapidolith
or approved equal. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's
directions and as directed below:
(a) Surface to be treated shall have dried and
aged seven (7) days, or as directed, and
shall be clean and free of dust, oil or
paint.
(b) Apply in three coats, first application
solution of 1 part Lapidolith or approved
equal to 2 parts water. Flush solution on
floor and distribute with brush or broom.
Mop up excess solution. Allow floor to
dry a minimum of 24 hours between applica-
• tions.
(c) second application to be 1 part Lapidolith
or approved equal to 1 part water. Use
same directions for applying first appli- .
cation.
•(d) Third application to be 2 parts Lapidolith
or approved equal to one part water. Use
same directions for applying first appli-
cation. After third application has
thoroughly dried, flush entire surface
with water.
D.` Broom Finish Non -Slip Finish - 1) Platforms, ramps,
walks, and outside concrete steps shall receive broom finish.
(a) Al]. exterior ramps shall have score marks
spaced 6" o.c. short dimension of ramp.
Finish to be stiff broom finish.
(h) Outside concrete steps as covered in 1)
above, except omit score marks.
16. BUILT-IN WORK
Items such as scuppers, ventilators, piping, anchors, etc.,
specified elsewhere, shall be built in as the work progresses
or provisions shall be made for building in at a later date
without cutting and patching which would impair the strength
or appearance of the concrete. This Contractor shall work
with electrical and mechanical subcontractors in setting and
preparing openings for the mechanical or electrical work.
17. EXPANSION JOINTS
Prepared strips of asphaltic impregnated fiber hoard are
to be used as detailed. Same shall be 1/2" as detailed, of
asphaltic treatment wood or cane fiber. Provide plastic Water -
stops where indicated on drawings, as manufactured by B. F.
Goodrich Company, size 4" x 3/16" x 7/16".
L
3-10
L
FOUNDATION AND CONCRETE WORK
18. SHOP DRAT17INGS
L
L
A. Shop drawings for all reinforced concrete work,
including steel order list, bending diagrams, placing dia-
grams and placing plans showing inside dimensions of all forming
for members, openings, etc., together with proper location of
such members, openings, etc., shall be developed at the
Contractor's Expense by an approved reinforcing steel fabrica-
tor, who shall employ, or have in his employ, a competent
registered engineer*,
' B. Forming, fabrication or placing of any work or
material, prior to release by the Architect of approved shop
drawings will be at the risk of the Contractor.
' C. Any errors in dimensions or detailing on shop draw-
ings, list, etc., shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
ID. All listing, detailing, etc., will generally be in
accordance with the latest standards adopted by the American
Concrete Institute.
' 19. CLEANING UP
This Contractor shall remove all debris, trash, forms,
'
etc., upon completion and shall leave all exposed surfaces
clean. Apply final finish to concrete after completion of
outside work and before final acceptance.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3-11
I
SECTION 3A
I
I
C
I
I
I
L
I
II
I
I
I
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
1. GENERAL
The following concrete work shall be constructed using
lightweight concrete:
Roof Slab
Requirements of the preceeing Section covering normal
weight concrete shall apply equally to lightweight concrete
except as specifically modified in this Section.
A. Aggregates - The coarse aggregate shall consist of
expanded shale or equal approved in writing by the Architect
prior to commencement of any work on the building. Aggregate
shall conform with requirements of the "Specifications for
Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete" (ASTM C330),
combined fine and coarse aggregate: 1/2 inch to 0. The
minimum splitting ratio, Fsp, for aggregate shall be 5.50
determined as specified in ACI 318.
Admixture
sand shall
conform with
the requirements
of "Specifications
for Concrete
Aggregates"
(ASTM C33).
The Contractor shall have the aggregates tested by
an approved testing laboratory who shall submit 4 copies of
certificates to the Architect indicating conformance of
representative samples with the specifications, and shall, in
addition, furnish satisfactory evidence that the samples
tested continue to be representative of materials used.
Certificates from the supplier may be accepted as such evidence,
but the Architect shall have the right to have any inspections
made by representatives of the Owner. Original analyses shall
be paid by the Contractor, and when subsequent inspections dis-
close deviations, these shall be paid for by the Contractor.
The lightweight aggregate shall be pre -wetted by the
manufacturer prior to shipping to the mixing site and care
shall be used to maintain the moisture content uniformly
throughout the aggregate until the aggregate is used in the
mix. The Contractor shall have the testing laboratory inspect
the prewetting of the aggregate and immediately thereafter
transmit four copies of certificates certifying proper pre -
wetting to the Architect.
B. Admixtures - A dispersing agent shall be used in all
lightweight concrete. Unless approved otherwise in writing by
the Architect, this shall be "Protex Dispersing Agent" as
manufactured by Autolene Lubricants Company of Denver, Colorado.
If other agent is approved by the Architect, the quantity used
shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer°s direc-
tions. The quantity required in the paragraph on mix design
is based upon use of the agent named.
3A-1
I
I
I
I
I
C
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
An air entraining agent shall be used in all light-
weight concrete. Unless approved otherwise in writing by the
Architect, this shall be "Aerolith" as manufactured by
Sonneborn Chemical and Refining Corporation of New York City.
If other agent is approved, the quantity used shall be adjusted
in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. The quan-
tity required in the paragraph on mix design is based upon
use of the agent named.
2. MIX DESIGN
Unless adjustment is required and approved by the Archi-
tect, the quantities of materials per cubic yard of lightweight
concrete shall be as follows:
Cement (minimum)
Sand (dry weight)
Lightweight Blend (dry weight)
Total water (maximum including
moisture in aggregates)
Dispersing Agent
Air Entraining Agent
564 lbs.(6 sacks)
1110 lbs.
1190 lbs.
44 gals.
1.37 lbs.
1 oz.
' Consistency of the mix shall result in the following
characteristics:
I
n
I
I
Maximum Slump
Maximum Dry Weight
3 inches
110 lbs. per cu.ft.
at 28 days.
The Contractor shall have wet weight of random batches
checked for each 15 cubic yards of lightweight concrete placed.
Any deviation from the requirements of this item not
approved by the Architect in writing discovered prior to or
after placing of the material will result in its rejection
regardless of the result of cylinder test reports.
3. PLACING AND FINISHING
' Care shall be used in placing and vibrating lightweight
concrete to avoid segregation. Vibration shall be limited to
the extent necessary to achieve satisfactory placement due to
the tendency of lightweight concrete to become segregated from
'excessive vibration.
After screeding to grade the surface of lightweight con-
' Crete slabs shall be tamped with a jitterbug constructed with
expanded metal on a metal frame. Using pressure about one-
half that which would be required for standard concrete the
' coarse particles of aggregate shall be forced to from IA" to
1/2" below the surface.
I
r
3A-2
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
4. STRENGTH TESTS
Six compression test specimens shall be taken from each
50 cubic yards of lightweight concrete or for each day's
concreting if less than 50 cubic yards is placed. A minimum
of five sets of six specimens each shall be made. Two speci-
mens from each set shall be tested at 7 days, two at 14 days,
and two at 28 days.
3A-3
SECTION 4
MASONRY UNITS
1. GENERAL CONDITIONS
' The General Conditions stated herein are a part of this
Specification, and the Contractor shall consult them in detail
for instructions pertaining to his work.
' 2. EXTENT OF WORK
I
I
'J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
This Section of the work includes all materials and
equipment required to complete the masonry walls in accordance
with the plans and specifications using concrete masonry units
with Korfil insulation inserts as specified in following
Paragraph 3.
3. MATERIALS
A. Masonry Units - All masonry units shall be concrete
masonry units, conforming to ASTM C90-59 for Grade A hollow,
load -bearing concrete masonry units. Units to be cured a
minimum of eight hours at a minimum temperature of 325O F.
under a minimum pressure o€ 125 lbs. p.s.i. Provide Korfil
insulation insert for each unit. .
B. Mortar - Masonry cement mortar shall be used in
laying masonry units, and shall be a brand approved by the
Architect conforming with tentative specifications for
Masonry Cement (ASTM designation C-91). mortar shall be
mixed and made up in batches for the work immediately at hand,
and mortar shall not be retempered for use.
4. LAYING OF MASONRY UNITS
All walls of block shall be true and plumb and built to
the thickness as shown on the plans, laid in straight uniform
courses with units in the courses above regularly breaking
joints with the courses below. All workmanship shall be of
the highest grade. Partitions shall extend from concrete
construction of floor to metal roof deck. Where block walls
extend through steel joists or structural steel, cut and fit
block in neat workmanlike manner making partition airtight.
They shall be set with care around frames. All joints shall
be tooled and care shall be taken in fitting blocks to all
utility outlets in finished walls. Block walls are to be
finished as indicated on "Finish Schedule". During erection
use proper care to prevent marring or damaging face, edge or
corners of units. Use no chipped, cracked, broken or other-
wise defective material in finished walls.
Mortar joints shall he 3/II„ thick with full mortar cover-
age on vertical and horizontal face shells. Vertical joints
shall be shoved tight.
I
4-1
L
MASONRY UNITS
I
I
I
L
5. LINTELS & BOND REAMS
Over openings in block partitions, provide reinforced
lintels, and where indicated install beams with steel reinforc-
ing bars of required sizes by using Arkhola Sand and Gravel
Company, Fort Smith, Arkansas, No. 27 solid bottom bond beam
blocks poured full of concrete.
6. BUILT-IN ITEMS
The Contractor shall build in all wood blocks, strips,
wedges, metal wall plugs, frames, loose lintels, miscellaneous
iron and other such items furnished under other sections of
the specifications.
7. PROTECTION
' At the end of each day the block backing shall be carried
to the full height of the stone face, and then shall be care-
fully covered with waterproof paper and boards. Walls are to
be kept clean of mortar and upon completion be cleaned in an
approved manner.
8. WALL REINFORCEMENT
I
L
I
11
L
I
H
I
I
Dur-O-Wall Masonry Wall reinforcement shall he installed
in the first and second bed joints 8 inches apart immediately
above lintels and below sills at openings and in bed joints
at 16 inch vertical intervals elsewhere. Reinforcement in
the second bed joint above or below openings shall extend
two feet beyond the jambs. All other reinforcement shall be
continuous except it shall not pass through vertical masonry
control joints. Joint reinforcement shall be wide enough to
tie both materials and shall be 2" less in width than the
nominal thickness of the wall. Reinforcement shall be lapped
sufficiently at splices to insure continuity, and corners shall
be cut and bent as shown in application instructions.
4-2
I
SECTION 5
I
C
I
I
I
NATIVE FIELD STONE WORK
1. SCOPE OF % ORK
A. Extent - The work required under this section consists
of all exterior stone work and related items necessary to
complete the work shown on the drawings and described in the
specifications.
B. Work Not Included - The following items of related
work are specified and included in other sections of these
specifications:
1) Steel lintels.
2) Masonry work in connection with stone.
3) Flashings in connection with stone.
' 2. SAMPLES AND MODELS
I
L
LI
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
A. Samples - Before proceeding with any stone work, sub-
mit to Architect for approval, sufficient samples of stone to
be used. Samples shall range in sizes as specified, and shall
represent the extremes as well as the average of color range,
markings and characteristics which the Contractor proposes
to furnish. The approved samples shall become the standard
for selection and finish o€ the stone supplied under the
contract.
1) Submit samples of each type of anchor, ties or
accessory proposed for use.
2) Before the installation of any stone work, erect
at the jobsite, sample wall panels 3 feet long by 2 feet high.
Panels shall show the proposed color range, texture, bond,
mortar joint and workmanship of stone work proposed. No stone
work shall be done until the Architect has approved the sample
panel of the work involved. The approval panels shall become
the standards of comparison for all stone work built. The
panel shall not be altered, moved or destroyed until the work
is completed.
3. MATERIALS
A. General Requirements For All Stone - Stone shall be
sound and free from defects that would impair its strength,
durability or appearance. The color and texture shall be
within the range of variations specified and as represented
by the approved sample.
B. Native Field Stone - All stone indicated on drawings
shall be native field stone, full range of face sizes from.
6" x 6" to 24" x 24", approximately 6" thick where veneer
occurs. Stone to be laid on natural bed with weathered surfaces
showing, laid in random rubble pattern.
' 5-1
NATIVE FIELD STONE WORK
' C. Mortar - Mortar for stone work shall consist of one
part Portland Cement, 1/2 to one part hydrated lime and not
less than 2-1/4 to not more than 3 parts clean sharp sand
by volume. Mix to stiff consistency; retempering will not be
'
permitted. Masonry Cement as specified under Paragraph 3B
of Section 4 may be substituted for mortar specified above,
subject to approval of Architect, All mortar for stone work
' shall he colored black with alkali -proof mineral oxide mixed
in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use carbon
black not to exceed 3 percent of the weight of the cement.
4. SETTING STONE
A. Do not set stone in freezing weather unless suitable
' means are provided to heat the materials, protect the work from
cold and frost, and insure that mortar and grout will harden
without freezing. No anti -freeze ingredient shall be used in
' the mortar or grout.
B. Stone shall be set by experienced stone masons.
' Thoroughly clean stone with clean water just before setting.
When setting in cold weather, clean stone by brushing instead
of wetting.
C. Set each stone plumb, level and true to line in a
full bed of mortar and tap to even bearing, same as laid in
approved panel. Joints shall be finished by slightly raking
t and rubbed smooth with tool. Do not use pinch bar on exposed
face of stone.
D. Parge entire back of each piece of stone with 1/2
inch of .setting mortar. Allow parging to harden before stone
is backed up.
E. Do not build stone more than 2 courses above backing
and do not set stone having greater depth of bed than the one
below it until lower course is backed up.
I
I
I
F. Stone veneer shall be anchored or tied to masonry
backing and to sheathing with heavy-duty galvanized steel
corrugated ties spaced not more than 24" on centers in each
direction. At masonry backing ties shall be embedded a
minimum of 4" into masonry and into stone work. For frame
construction ties shall he attached to sheathing with proper
attachment or screws.
5. SHIPPING, STORING & PROTECTION
' A, Deliver stone from field to job in accordance with
schedule and in proper setting sequence. Stone when unloaded
shall be done to be adequately protected to prevent breakage.
I
' 5-2
NATIVE FIELD STOTTE WORK
B. During construction, tops of stone in walls shall he
' covered at end of each day's work and in had weather. Protect
stone at all times from drippings and heavy rains.
IC. Protect stone work as necessary to prevent damage.
Replace damaged or defective stones.
I
6. CLEAPMING
After completion of setting, all stone shall be cleaned
with fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes or acid solutions.
' Cleaninq:shall begin at the top of the building and proceed
€iownwarcL Upon cnr..pletion, leave stone clean and free from
mortar stains and with all joints pointed. -
1
1
I
C
U
I
I
n
I
I
' 5-3
' SECTION 6
STRUCTURAL STEEL,.STEEL JOISTS & STEEL ROOF DECK
' 1. SCOPE OF WORK
?A. Rxtent - The work required under this section consists
• of all structural steel, steel erection, steel joists, painting
and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on
drawings and described in specifications.
1) Loose lintels, shelf angles, anchor bolts, bearing
plates and other incidental items of structural steel required
to he built into concrete or masonri shall be provided as
indicated or specified and be furnished to respective trades
' at proper time; include instructions or templates for their
installation.
A. List of Items Included - Without restricting the volume
or generality of the above "Extent", the work to he performed
under this section shall include, but is not limited to, the
following:
I
I
L
I
I
I
L
I
I
I
1) Columns, beams, lintels, channels, plates, angles
and other structural shapes as detailed. Steel anchors,
steel joist, etc.
C. Bidding Documents - Refer to General Conditions which
are applicable to this section and shall form a part of the
contract` s
2. SHOP DRAT%TINGS
A.; Shop drawings for all work included in this section
shall he submitted to Architect for approval. Submit drawings
in accordance with requirements described in the General Condi-
tions. Obtain approval of drawings prior to fabricating any
material or proceeding with the work.
B. Shop drawings shall include all information necessary
for the fabrication of the component parts of the structure.
They shall indicate size and weight of members, type and loca-
tion of shop and field connections, the type, sizes and extent
of all welds, and the welding sequence when required. The
welding symbols used in the shot) drawings shall he as adopted
by the American TJelding Society. Shop drawings shall indicate
joist type, number, sizes, spacings, bridging, connections,
headers, anchoring, bearing plates and all other details of
erection. Shop drawings shall indicate size and location of
roof framing supports and the location, lengths and markings
of deck units to correspond with the sequence of installation.
Drawings shall indicate fastening methods for deck units,
accessories, closure pieces, fittings, and the type and
sequence of welded connections.
I
6-1
STRUCTURAL STEEL, STEEL JOISTS
& STF;EL ROOF D
C. The approval of shop drawings will be for size and
arrangement of principal and auxiliary members and strength
of. connections. Any errors in dimensions shown on shop draw-
ings shall he responsibility of the Contractor.
D. Measurements and Dimensions - All measurements and
dimensions shall be verified by the fabricator at the jobsite.
Any conflict between actual measurements and dimensions and .
those shown on the drawings which will prevent the fabrication
and erection of steel work as detailed shall be brought to the
attention of the Architect as soon as they are discovered.
3. COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATIONS
' A. Any material or operation specified by reference to
the published specifications of a manufacturer, The American
I
Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), The American Insti-
tute of Steel Construction (AISC), the American Welding Society
(AWS), The Steel Joist Institute (SJI), The Metal Roof Deck
Technical Institute (MRDTI), or other published standard, shall
comply with the requirements of the standard list. In case
of a conflict between the referenced specification and the
project specifications, the project specifications shall govern*
IB. When compliance with such specifications in speci-
fied for materials or a manufactured or fabricated product,
t the Contractor, if requested, shall furnish an affidavit from
the manufacturer or fabricator, certifying that the materials
or product delivered to the job meets the requirements specified.
However, such certification shall not relieve the Contractor
I
from the responsibility of complying with any added requirements
specified herein.
' 4. INSPECTION
A. The materials and workmanship to he furnished under
this specification shall he subject to inspection in the mill,
'
shop and field by the Architect, the Engineer, or by qualified
inspectors retained by the Owner. Inspection will be conducted
without expense to the Contractor; however, inspection in the
' mill or shop shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsi-
bility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with
contract requirements.
' 5. STEEL MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel - Structural steel for all work
' (except as otherwise indicated or specified) shall conform to
ASTM Snecif£cation A-36.
' Be Bolts - All bolts used in connection with structural
steel shall conform to ASTP1 Specification A-325, friction type.
C
' 6-2
STRUCTURAL STEEL, STEEL JOISTS
& STEEL ROOF DECK
' C. Filler Metal for Welding - Welding electrodes for
manual shielded metal -arc welding shall conform to AWS Speci-
fications E7S series. Bare electrodes and granular flux used
' in the submerged -arc process shall conform to A?9S Specifica-
tions.
' D. Evidence of Conformity - Certified mill test reports
of structural steel shall constitute sufficient evidence of
conformity with the specifications. Manufacturer's certifica-
tion for bolts and nuts and filler material for welding shall
tconstitute evidence of compliance.
6. FABRICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
' Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified,
the fabrication of structural steel shall he in accordance with
' the American Institute of. Steel Construction "Specifications
for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel
for Buildings", latest edition. Punch and drill steel for
attachment of wood nailers and other materials indicated or
specified to be attached to the steel. In general, except as
shown otherwise, shop connections shall be welded and field
connections shall be bolted or welded. Where connections or
' reactions are not shown on plans, the member will he assumed
to carry a uniform load of full capacity of member and the
connections shall he designed accordingly.
7. ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Applicable Standards - Except as otherwise indicated
Ion drawings or specified, the erection of structural steel
shall be in accordance with the American Institute of Steel
Construction "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and
' Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings".
B. Welding - Where structural joints are made by welding,
the details of all joints, the technique of welding employed,
the appearance and quality of welds made, and the methods used
in correcting defective work shall conform to requirements of
the "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection
I
of Structural Steel for Buildings" of the American Institute
of Steel Construction, and the "Code for Welding in Building
Construction" of the American Welding Society. In addition,
' welds shall he made only by operators who have been previously
qualified by tests, as prescribed in the "Standard Qualification
Procedure" of the American Welding Society to perform the type
' of work required.
C. Cutting Holes - The use of a gas -cutting torch in the
field for correcting fabrication errors will be permitted on
structural framing members provided that approval of the
Architect and Engineer is first obtained for each specific
condition.
1
6-3
n
STRUCTURAL STEEL, STEEL JOISTS
& STEEL ROOF flECK
In. Setting Plates - Column base plates shall be set
level to correct elevations and temporarily supported on steel
wedges or shims until the supported members have been plumbed
' and grouted. The entire bearing area under plates shall be
grouted solid with non -shrinking grout as specified in Section
3, Concrete Work.
' E. Templates - Templates shall be furnished for bolt
setting as indicated on drawings. The Contractor shall furnish
instructions for the setting of anchors and bearing plates
' and shall ascertain that the items are properly set during
the progress of the work.
IF. Framing - The Framing shall he carried up true and
plumb and temporary bracing shall be introduced wherever neces-
sary to take care of all loads to which the structure may be
submitted, including erection equipment and its operation.
' Such bracing shall be left in place as long as may he required
for safety. It shall finally be removed by the Contractor as
part of his equipment. As erection progresses, the work shall
be securely connected to take care of all dead load, wind and
erection stresses.
' Be PAINTING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Shop Painting - After inspection and approval and
before leaving the shop, thoroughly clean steel of all loose
' mill scale, rust, spatter, slag or flux deposit, oil, dirt
and other foreign matter. Apply one shop coat of red oxide
paint to all steel surfaces, except machined surfaces,
' edges and surface areas adjacent to field welds, and contact
surfaces of high -strength bolted connections. Surfaces must
be dry when paint is applied. Protect machined surfaces from
' corrosion by a suitable coating. Remove paint from surfaces
to be welded for a distance of two inches on either side of
joint.
'• Be Field Painting - After erection, touch-up field
connections and abraded places, with same type of paint as used
for shop coat.
9. JOIST TYPE, FABRICATION AND ERECTION
A. Open tleb Joist -fl Series - (Short Span Type) - Open
Web H - Series joists shall be provided for roof framing where
indicated on framing plans. The joist shall be designed,
fabricated an' erected in accordance with the Standard Speci-
' fications and Load Tables for Open Web Steel Joist, H -Series
as adopted by the Steel Joist Institute.
El
I
I
6-4
STRUCTURAL STEEL, STEEL JOISTS
& STEEL ROOF DECK
B. General Requirements
1) Painting - Joists, bridging, anchors and other
accessories shall be cleaned of all rust and scale and given
one shop coat of red oxide paint.
After erection, the field connections and all abraded
places of shop paint shall be painted with same kind of paint
as the shop coat.
2) Extended Ends - Provide extended ends for top chords
of joists where indicated. Extension members shall be of
depth and type indicated and/or detailed.
3) Ceiling Extensions - Where ceilings occur below
underslung type joists, ceiling extensions shall he provided,
or the lower chord member extended.
4) Erection - Set joists level to spacing shown with
minimum bearings of four inches on masonry and concrete, and
2-1/2 inches on steel. Ends of joists resting on masonry
shall be bedded and anchored as detailed. Provide headers,
trimmers and bearing plates as indicated.
a) Anchor ends of joists to masonry or concrete
with anchors as detailed.
h) Each joist resting on steel supports shall be
welded to each support with two welds, each one inch long.
c) Bridge fl -Series joists with horizontal bridging.
Space bridging at intervals indicated and in accordance with
the Steel Joist Institute.
d) The joists shall be permanently fastened to
supports and all bridging and anchors completely installed
before any. construction loads (other than workmen) are placed
on the joists.
e) Welding shall be executed in accordance with
the "Code for Welding in Building Construction" of the American
Welding Society as amended to date, and only by welding opera-
tors who have been previously qualified to perform the type
of work required. The Architect may require evidence, in the
form of certificates, to be submitted for welders proving their
qualifications in accordance with "Standard Qualification Pro-
cedure" (AWS 03.0).
10. CORRUGATED METAL FORMS
A. Scope - Concrete for roof deck fill shall he placed
on Wheeling Tensilform 75 as manufactured by Wheeling Corrugating
Company, tmeeling, West Virginia.
1
r -S
I
STRUCTURAL STEEL, STEEL JOISTS
& STEEL ROOF DECK
' 13. Material - Tensilform 75 shall be formed from cold
rolled steel with a minimum yield strength of 90. Sheets
shall be hot dip galvanized by Wheeling patented (Cook-
' Norteman) process with 1.25 oz. per square foot coating class
conforming to AST14 A-525-71 specification. Base Steel shall
conform to ASTM A446-69 Grade E.
IC. Erection - Place Tensil€orm 75 with edges up, flutes
at right angles to supports. End laps shall always occur over
supports. Minimum end lap is 2" for welded attachment. Lap
' all sheets one-half flute at side laps. Attach sheets to top
chord of supports by plug welding through special washers.
Fasten each end lap in the trough of the flutes at each corner
(through four thicknesses of metal) and at center of end lap.
'At sides and side -lap fasten sheet at each intermediate support.
When delivered, the Contractor responsible for this
' portion of work shall see that Tensilform is stored off the
ground, that it is covered to protect material from the elements
and that it is sloped to permit drainage.
' D. Reinforcement - Place reinforcement over Wheeling
Tensilform of 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh.
' E. Caution - Calcium chloride or admixtures containing
chloride salts must not be used in concrete on Tensilform.
IF. Traffic and Storage - Exercise care to control
traffic and storage of materials on Tensilform before pouring
slab. Excessivespans should be planked or otherwise protected
' against damage from workers walking on material, heavy
construction traffic and storage.
G. Roofing - Roofing shall be applied after concrete
'
requirements for curing time and weather conditions have been
met. See Section 8 for tracks, clips and attachments for roofing
which are embedded or attached to concrete slab.
' 11. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ITEMS
' Furnish all structural and tubular steel items wherever
detailed, called for or required. Provide reinforcing bars for
all reinforced lintels, bond beams, etc. as shown or required.
' 12. PREFABRICATED FIREPROOFED STEEL COLUMNS
The two structural columns in west wall of Space 101
' shall be as manufactured by Fire-'Trol Corp. for 2 hour U.L.
laboratory rating, No. X 106, square type SS, 6" x 6" shell
size, weight 38 lbs. per foot.
i
C
6-6
SECTION 7
OR UVIBIT °AL & MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK
• 1. SCOPE
IA. Extent - The work required under this section consists
of all miscellaneous metal work and related items necessary
to complete the work indicated on drawings and described in
• ' specifications.
B. List of Items Included - Without restricting the
volume or generality of the above "Extent", the work to be per-
' formed under this section shall include, but is not limited to,
the following:
Ii) Anchors, bolts and inserts
2) Aluminum security partition
3) Miscellaneous steel items
' 4) -Structural steel door frames
C. Work Not Included - The following items of related
work are specified and included in other sections of these
' specifications.
1) Hollow metal doors and frames
' 2) Metal fire extinguisher cabinets
3) Metal suspension systems for ceilings
4) Rough hardware
5) Steel joists
'
6) Steel roof deck
7) Structural steel work, except as specified herein
2. SUBSTITUTIONS
The materials or products specified herein and indicated
Ion the drawings by trade names, manufacturer's name or catalog
number shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will not
be permitted, except as described in General Conditions.
' 3. SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings to Architect for
' approval of all miscellaneous items. Submit drawings in accor-
dance with requirements described in General Conditions.
Obtain approval of drawings prior to proceeding with manufactur-
' ing. Shop drawings shall indicate the fabrication, assembly and
erection details; sizes of all members; fastenings, supports
and anchors; patterns; clearances; and all necessary connection
to work or other trades.
4. MISCELLANEOUS LINTELS, SHELF ANGLES, BEAMS AND PLATES
' Provide miscellaneous lintels, shelf angles, etc. as shown
on drawings. Lintels shall have six inch bearings at each end
I
' 7-1
' ORNAMENTAL & MISCELLANEOUS
MEtAL WORK
' unless shown otherwise. Weld, bolt or rivet members together
where so indicated, to form a complete assembly. Set beams
on plates as indicated. Where shelf angles are attached to
' concrete with bolts and adjustable inserts, provide slotted
holes of proper size and spacing in the vertical leg of shelf
angles. Provide angles, channel and hanger rods for toilet
compartments as detailed on plans.
' 5. STRUCTURAL CHANNEL DOOR FRAMES
Where called for on drawings, furnish structural steel
channel door frames as detailed, complete with necessary
anchorage at floor and for setting into stucco frame wall
' construction.
6. AIICHORS, BOLTS AND INSERTS
' Anchors and bolts shall be as shown on the drawings, con-
forming with sizes and shapes indicated. Where not shown or
specified, anchors and bolts and other miscellaneous items
' shall conform to the best trade practice. Expansion and
toggle bolts shall conform to the requirements of Federal
Specification FF-B-561 or FF-B-571, shall be galvanized or non-
ferrous, shall be of the sizes indicated or suitable for the
' work, to be anchored, and shall be used where built-in bolts:
are not practicable.
' Inserts of suitable and approved type shall be furnished
and installed where necessary for the support of equip.°nent,
apparatus and other work.
7. SECURITY PARTITION
Partitions shall he constructed of 9000 Series Panel Rails
' manufactured by Blumcraft of Pittsburgh and built in strict:;
accordance with manufacturer's specifications shown in
Blumcraft's current catalogue and as detailed on drawings.
Aluminum rails shall be ;{9718, aluminum posts #9003 spaced
and height shown, complete with #9096 inserts. All aluminum
shall he bronze duranodic finish. Partitions to be glazed with
1/2" clear plastic as specified under Section 18.
I
I
I
H
7-2
' SECTION 8
' ROOFING ANT) SHEET METAL
1. SCOPE OF WORK
IA. Extent - The work required under this secton consists
of all roofing and sheet metal and related items necessary to
complete the work indicated on drawings and described in speci-
fications
B. List of Items Included - Without restricting the
volume or generality of the above "Extent", the work to be ' per-
formed under this section shall include, but is not limited to,
the following:
U. 1) Kaiser #6000 Bronze Aluminum Zip -Rib Roof Panels
with 2" thick factory applied foam insulation
2) All accessories for Zip -Rib roofing including
' closure channels, closure supports, closure foam,
clips, screws, etc., track and clips
3) All aluminum, roof flashings, gutters, downspouts,
valleys, hips, gravel guards and miscellaneous
' sheet metal
4) Vent flashings through roof for vents from all
mechanical equipment
Us) Metal louvers
6) Stainless steel cover for baggage claim rack
' C. Work Not Included - The following items of related
work are specified and included in other sections of these speci-
fications:
' 1) Wood blocking and nailers for securing sheet metal
flashings, etc.
•' D. Bidding Documents -,Refer to General Conditions which
are applicable to this section and shall form a part of the
contract.
' 2. SUBSTITUTIONS
The materials or products specified herein and indicated
t on the drawings by trade name, manufacturer's name or catalog
number shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will not
be permitted, except as described in General Conditions. No
' substitution of roofing material will be allowed for any company
who excludes responsibility for roofing materials for this
type of installation.
' 3. SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings for sheet metal.
' work to Architect for approval. Submit drawings in accordance
with requirements described in General Conditions. Obtain
approval of drawings prior to proceeding with manufacturing.
' Shop drawings shall indicate thickness and dimensions of all
parts, fastening and anchoring methods, expansion joints and
other provisions necessary for thermal expansion and contraction.
' 8-1
' ROOFING MID SHEET METAL
' 4. COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATIONS
Any material or operation specified by reference to the
published specifications of a manufacturer, the American Society
' for Testing and Materials,. The Copper and Brass Research Asso-
ciation, and other published standards shall comply with the
requirements of the current specification or standard listed.
' In case of a conflict between the referenced specification
and these project specifications, these project specifications
shall govern. In case of conflicts between the referenced
' specifications or standards, the one having the more stringent
requirements shall govern. The Contractor, if requested, shall
furnish an affidavit from the manufacturer, certifying that
the materials or product delivered to the job meets the
requirements specified.
5. GENERAL REQUIREPNTS
A. Proper Surfaces - Surfaces to which roofing and sheet
metal are to be applied shall he even, smooth, sound, thoroughly
clean and dry and free from all defects that might affect the
application. Report any unsatisfactory surfaces to Architect.
B. Materials to be Built In - Materials furnished under
' this section which are to be built in by other trades shall be
delivered to the site in time to avoid delays to construction
progress.
C. Accessories - All accessories or other items essential
to the completeness of the sheet metal installation, though not
specifically shorm or specified, shall be provided. All such
items, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified,
shall be of the same kind of material as the item to which
applied. Nails,screws, and bolts shall be of the types best
' suited for the purpose intended, and shall be of a composition
that is compatible with the metal to which it will contact,
D. Dissimilar Materials - Where sheet metal abuts or
'
members into adjacent dissimilar materials, the juncture shall
be executed in a manner that will prevent electrolysis between
the two materials.
1 E. Workmanship - Except as otherwise shown on drawings
or specified, the workmanship of sheet metal work, method of
' forming joints, anchoring cleating, provisions for expansion,
etc. shall conform to the standard details and recommendations
of the Copper and Brass Research Association in effect on the
' date of this specification.
G. SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General - The type and locations of the various kinds,
gauges, thickness and finish of sheet metal to he used is
L
I 1 8-2
ROOFING AND SHEET METAL
•' specified 'hereinafter under the individual. items; however, where
sheet metal is indicated on drawings and kind or type of metal
is not definitely specified or noted, 0.040 inch thick aluminum
alloy shall be provided, bronze colored.
B. Aluminum Alloy - Aluminum alloy flat sheet shall be
alloy 3003, conforming to Federal Specification QQ-A-359D,
and not less than 0.040 inch thick, bronze colored.
7. ALUMINUM ROOFING
A. Scope of Work - Contractor to furnish all labor,
materials and equipment to complete the installation of aluminum
roofing shown on drawings or herein speci€ied.
' B. Roofing shall be Kaiser Aluminum Zip -Rib Panels 12"
wide formed from 0.032" thick, stucco embossed aluminum,
' fluorocarbon -painted alloy 3004. Leading vertical edge shall
have a continuous groove in the bulb -rib top for anti -siphon
protection when hook -rib top of next panel is zip -locked over
' it to form a 2-1/2" standing seam. Two 3/8" stiffening ribs
shall be provided 4" o/c between legs. Length of panels shall
be continuous ridge-to-eave.
' 1) Finish - Fluorocarbon baked enamel exterior, standard
color in .032":6000 - Spartan Bronze.
IC. Insulation - Zip -Rib Aluminum panels shall have bonded
insulation of 2" thick urethane. Insulation shall be backed
with vapor barrier and a foam tape seal laminated to one edge,
In. Ridge and eave closures shall be low pitch closure
with foam insert, 1920073 painted.
' E. Flashings shall be fabricated from 0.40" aluminum
in the same alloy, finish and embossing as the Zip -Rib panels.
F. Fasteners for all £lashings and accessories shall be
' of aluminum or'stainless steel.
C. Storage of aluminum roofing and accessories shall he
'• in a dry place to avoid water trapping or condensation or con-
tact with materials which might cause staining, such as lime,
cement, fresh concrete or chemicals.
Si. Protection of Surfaces - Where any aluminum component
is in contact with, fastened to, or contacted by drainage from
' dissimilar metals other than stainless steel or zinc, such
dissimilar metals shall be given one or more of the following
treatments:
' 1) Apply a heavy brush coat of approved zinc -chromate
primer followed by two coats of approved aluminum
metal -and -masonry paint.
' 8-3
ROOFING AND SHEET METAL
' 2) Apply a heavy coat of approved alkali -resistant
bituminous paint.
3) Separate contact surfaces with approved non -
absorptive tape or gasket.
' Where aluminum will be in contact with masonry, concrete
or plaster, apply a heavy coat of approved alkali -resistant
' paint.
Where aluminum will be in contact with wood or other
absorptive material subject to wetting, or treated with preserva-
tive noncompatible with aluminum:
1) Seal joints with approved compound.
' 2) Apply one heavy brush coat of approved aluminum -
pigmented bituminous paint, and/or two brush coats
of approved metal -and -masonry paint, and/or two
' brush coats of aluminum house paint.
I. Caution - Never allow copper to contact or provide
drainage to aluminum. Never use copper- or lead -base primers,
' paints, or other preparations in contact with or providing
drainage to aluminum products.
I. J. Assembly of Zip -Rib Roofing Panels shall be with
concealed anchor clips of design, material and fabrication
furnished by Kaiser Aluminum.
' K. Roofing anchor clips #1920028 shall be applied to
the structure in track 1920042 at each panel joint at spacing
to allow for a positive uniform load of 35 psf and negative
' uniform load of 35 psf.
L. No perforation shall be made in Zip -Rib Roofing
' Panels by fasteners except as shown for flashing,closures or
trim.
M. Proper engagement of anchor clips with bulb rib shall
'be assured before positioning hook rib of next panel.
N. A Kaiser Aluminum zipper tool shall be used to close
' the interlocking seam securely between panels.
O. A Zip -Rib pan end tool shall be used to form a pan
Ion ridge panels where shown on the drawings.
P. Caulking shall be applied between the interlocking
' seam for its entire length.
8. METAL FLASIIINGS, GUTTERS, DOWNSPOUTS, MISCELLANEOUS SHEET
METAL, ETC.
A. Flashings, Etc.
I
' 8-4
ROOFING AND SHEET METAL
1) Provide metal base and cap flaS,ings at top edges of
base flashings, and at other locations indicated on drawings.
Flashings shall be installed at all intersections of roofs
with vertical surfaces and elsewhere as shown on the drawings
or required to provide watertight protection. Flashings shall
be .040 bronze colored aluminum.
C
I
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
G
11
I
I
2) Flashing shall be in 10 --foot lengths, except where
shorter pieces are required; lap end joints 3 inches; do not
solder joints. Make flashing continuous at angles. Cap
flashing shall overlap base flashing a minimum of 3 inches.
3) Extend cap flashing into masonry not less than 3
inches.
B. = Gutters and Downspouts - Gutter and downspouts shall
be provided where shown on plans, constructed of bronze colored
aluminum alloy not less than .040 inch thick. Gutter and down-
spouts shall be formed of sheets having a maximum length of
10 feet. Inside and outside corner sections shall be shop
fabricated with mitered and welded or brazed joints. Sections
shall be connected with slip connectors caulked with "Alumilastic"
compound. The gutter shall be fastened to the deck as detailed
on plans with proper fasteners. Downspouts shall be furnished
full length and extend into drain line provided under Section 2
and be secured to wall with straps at two points.
9. METAL LOUVERS
A. Provide stationary type sheet metal louvers of sizes
and design indicated in exterior walls... - Construct
louvers of bronze colored aluminum alloy; use 12 gauge for
box frame unit and 18 gauge for blades. Louvers shall be
complete with channel sub£rame, anchors, insect screens and
collars for connecting to duct work where required.
B. Construct subframe ofchannels; miter and weld
corner joints. Anchor subframe to wall. Space anchors near
each corner and approximately 30 inches apart. Prime all
surfaces of steel subframes with rust -resisting paint before
setting.
C. Form blades to shape, set level, and accurately
spaced. At corners and intersections, lap metal ,rivet and
solder or weld. Provide vertical mullions where indicated
or where the unsupported length of louver blades between jambs
exceed 36 inches. Construct louver as a unit so it can be
inserted in opening and secured.
Do Provide metal. collars of sheet aluminum where ducts
are to be connected to louvers. Provide a remove.ble screen
on outside of louvers.. Fabricate screen frame of aluminum
alloy; where louvers are connected to ducts, use 1/4 inch
mesh aluminum wire; for louvers not connected to ducts, use
16 mesh aluminum cloth.
r
8-5
' ROOFING AND SHEET METAL
' 10. BAGGAGE RACK COVER
Install 18 gauge, type 302, 18-8 with 44 satin finish
stainless steel cover on baggage claim rack as detailed on
1 plans. Covering to be erected and installed in accordance with
best standard practice with welds ground smooth and polished.
Where covering fits to walls, columns or door jambs, it shall
be turned up to a height of approximately 4" and shall be
finished at top with a 180 -degree hem.
I
I
I
I
H
U
I
H
I
I
' 8-6
I
SECTION 9
I
I
Li
Ci
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
WATERPROOFING, CAULKING & PERIMETER INSULATION
1. SCOPE OF WORK
A. Extent - The work required under this section consists
of all waterproofing, caulking and related items necessary to
complete the work indicated on drawings and described in speci-
fications.
B. List of Items Included - Without restricting the
volume or generality of the above "Extent", the work to be per-
formed under this section shall include, but is not limited to,
the following:
1) Membrane waterproofing under concrete floor slabs.
2) All caulking required.
3) Perimeter insulation.
C. Work Not Included - The following items of related
work are specified and included in other sections of these
specifications.
1) Concrete topping over waterproofing.
2) Masonry protection courses over waterproofing.
3) Setting of metal sleeves passing through water-
proofing.
4) Installation of pipes passing through water-
proofing.
5) Insulation in connection with waterproofing.
6) Nailers and grounds.
7) Reglets.
8) Integral waterstps in slabs and foundations.
9) Sealants for curtain wall.
D. Bidding Documents - Refer to General Conditions
which are applicable to this section and shall form a part of
the contract.
2. COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATIONS
Any material or operation specified by reference to the
published specifications of a manufacturer, the American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) or other published standard
shall comply with the requirements of the current specification
or standard listed. In case of a conflict between the refer-
enced specification and the project specifications, the project
specifications shall govern, unless written approval is obtained
from the architect.
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The waterproofing and caulking work shall be performed
by a Contractor who is regularly engaged and specializes in work
C
Ow
E
WATERPROOFING, CAULKING &
PERIMETER INSULATION
I
I
I
c. If., prior to beginning work, the Contractor does not
' notify the Architect in writing of any proposed changes, it
will be assumed that he agrees that the materials and methods
specified will produce the results desired, and that he will
' furnish the required guarantee.
4. ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES TO RECEIVE WATERPROOFING
' Before beginning work, the Waterproofing Subcontractor
shall inspect surfaces to receive the waterproofing and caulking
specified; he shall notify the Architect in writing o€ any
' serious defects or conditions that will interfere with, or pre-
vent a satisfactory installation. The beginning of application
work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces to receive water-
proofing or dampproofing for that area.
5. WATERPROOFING OF SLABS
I. A. Location and Extent - Apply membrane waterproofing
under concrete floors and over crushed stone fill.
' B. Material - Material shall be 100 mil thickness, in
48" wide rolls, premolded membrane vapor seal with plasmatic
core as manufactured by W. R. Meadows, Inc.
of the character required by the contract and in the applica-
tion of the materials specified herein. Material shall be
delivered to job in manufacturer's original unopened containers
with manufacturer's brand and name clearly marked therein.
B. The materials and methods shall be as specified herein,
unless they are contrary to the manufacturer's directions or
to approved trade practice; or unless the Contractor believes
they will not produce a watertight job which he will guarantee
as required. Where any of the above conditions occur, the
Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing. Deviation
from the procedure specified will be permitted only upon Archi-
tect's approval and providing the work is guaranteed by the
Contractor as specified.
• ' CO Application - Apply film over fill. Subgrade shall
be smoothed by a suitable method which will prevent protrusions
that may cause damage or rupture of the membrane. Lap membrane
' not less than 6 inches with the top lap placed in the direction
of the spreading of the concrete* Apply and seal laps in
strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
' 6. CAULKING
A. Location and Extent - All door frames and any other
openings in exterior walls shall be caulked. See Section 13,
Curtainwall Systems, for sealants and caulking specified to be
installed under that section for aluminum entrances and curtain -
wall.
' 9-2
WATERPROOFING CAULKING &
PERIMETER INSULATION
B. Materials -
1) Caulking Compound - Caulking compound shall conform
t to Federal Specification TT -C-598, Grade 1, in color to match
the color of adjoining surfaces and shall be delivered to the
building site in the manufacturer's original unopened packages.
I2) Sealant - Sealant shall be either a two-part or one -
part polyurethane conforming to Federal Specification TT -S -00227E,
IType 11, Class A. and of two-part, mixed at the time of use, or
other type of liquid sealant approved by the Architect.
3) Rope Yarn - Rope yarn shall be the raveled strands
of rope fiber free from oil or other staining element.
C. Preparation - Grooves in concrete and masonry shall
be cut and cleaned out to a minimum depth of 3/4 inch and
ground to a minimum width of 1/4 inch without damage to adjoin-
ing work. Where necessary to provide a suitable backstop, the
' back of grooves shall be packed tightly with rope yarn. All
particles of mortar, dust and other foreign matter shall be
brushed out just prior to caulking, and grooves shall be given
a uniform coating of sealant,
' D. Application - All joints between frames and masonry,
stucco or other surfaces to be finished, caulked by this
' Contractor. To joints of all openings, caulking compound shall
be applied with gun, using a nozzle of proper size to fit the
joint width, and shall be forced into grooves with sufficient
' pressure to expel all air and fill the groove solidly. Caulking
shall be uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles, and unless
otherwise noted, shall be left sufficiently convex to result in
a flush joint when dry. Caulking around openings shall include
' the entire perimeter of each opening. All joints of sills
exposed to weather shall be sealed and caulked.
' E. Cleaning - The surfaces adjoining caulked joints
shall be cleaned of smears or other soiling resulting from the
caulking application.
7. PERIMETER INSULATION
All perimeter insulation shall be installed as detailed
' on plans.
A. Materials - Insulation shall be Styrofoam as manu-
t factured bytheDow Chemical Company and installed in accor-
dance with manufacturers recommendations.
Be Insulation - Perimeter insulation shall be Styrofoam
1-1/2° thick. The insulation shall be applied both horizontally
and vertically around the perimeter of the foundation, as
detailed.
I 9-3
' WATERPROOFING, CAULKING &
'PERIMETER INSULATION
C. Installation - Styrofoam shall be applied to the
foundation as the backfilling is accomplished.
' Insulation shall be applied to walls with Styrofoam
brand insulation mastic #7 or #11 as distributed by Amspec,
Inc., mixed and applied in strict accordance with labeled
instructions.
I
U
[I
I
I
I
L.
I
I
I
9-4
' SECTION 10
CARPENTRY & MILL19ORK
A. CARPENTRY
1. SCOPE
The work under this section includes all framing, sheath-
ing, scaffolding, centering, guards, bucks, forms, furring,
ground, etc., and installation of all wood finish and finish
hardware. This section of the specifications also includes
the batt type mineral wool insulation.
2, CONCRETE FORMS
See heading "Concrete" for form work.
3. SCAFFOLDING
'
Scaffolding for all work, as needed, is to be erected in
a strong and substantial manner with provisions made for cbn-
' venient access to same, and with care taken to prevent injury
to any finish work. All supports shall be placed so as not to
overload or injure any structural positions o€ the building and
railing shall be provided where necessary to provide safety
for workmen.
4. GUARDS FOR FINISH WORK
Furnish and place temporary wooded guards firmly secured
in place to protect all finish work that may be damaged during
' construction. Provide guards at jamb of door openings, on
door sills and window sills, and all projection members in masonry
work that falling objects might injure. Guards are to be placed
immediately after each portion of finish is completed and shall
not be removed until danger of damage is over.
5. CENTERING
Provide all centering or bracing that may be necessary
for erection of concrete, masonry, structural steel, etc. All
' centering to be erected with sufficient strength to prevent
deflection from loads during construction.
' 6. GROUNDS, NAILING STRIPS AND BLOCKING
Provide permanent dressed wood ground as required for the
installation of all finish. Furnish dressed wood nailing
strips, wood blocking, and grounds of the sizes indicated and
required, and install on or in concrete or masonry as required
for the attachment of carpentry and the work of other trades.
' Grounds shall be set rigid, in perfect alignment, and shall be
trued with a long straightedge. Adjust thickness of roofedge
blocking to the thickness and dimensions required to conform
to detail shown.
10-1
ICARPENTRY & MILLWORK
Consult and cooperate with other trades for blocking or
grounds required by them as casework, etc.
7. NAILERS
IWood tapered edge strips or wood nailers at edges of roof
and bordering openings in roof as may be required, shall be
' Wolmanized treated No. 1 yellow pine or No. 1 grade redwood,
or sizes as shown on plans. All strips and edges shall be
securely attached to the structure or roof deck with nailers
' installed level, plumb and true.
8. FRAMING
' All framing lumber shall be certified kiln -dried, select
structural No. 2, southern yellow pine or fir, exposed to be
#1, free from all defects that will impair spacing as shown on
' plans and details.
All framing is to be executed in a strong and substantial
manner, well nailed to the satisfaction of the Architect.
All framing is to be accurately cut and fitted in best
workmanlike manner, level, plumb and with surfaces straight
and true to slopes as shown. See Section 8 for stainless
steel covering for baggage claim rack.
' 9. MISCELLANEOUS
Furnish and install all miscellaneous items required for
completion of work, regardless of whether each item is specifi-
' tally mentioned in these specifications or not, including yellow
pine or fir framing lumber, sheathing, etc.
I10. ROUGH HARDWARE
All nails and other miscellaneous rough hardware to be
' furnished under this section of the specifications.
11. INSULATION
Install 3-1/2" and 6" thick Fiberglas insulation batts in
frame walls and elsewhere as detailed on drawings.
' 12. PLYWOOD SHEATHING
Install plywood sheathing 3/4" thick, Fir Fire -retardant -
treated, exterior grade, covered with 15 lb. tarred felt.
Attach sheathing to steel studs with self -drilling screws of
proper size and spacing as per steel framing manufacturer's
recommendations.
' 13. FINALLY
These specifications are intended to provide for a complete
'carpenter job in every respect, and anything not shown on plans
' 10-2
' CARPENTRY & MILLWORK
and specified, or vice -versa, or anything which is neither shown
nor specified, but which is necessary for the proper execution
of plans and specifications, is to be included in this work.
El
I
I
11
I
L
C
I
I
I
I
I
[l
I
I
C]
The work must be first class in every respect and any
defects in materials or workmanship which occur within the year
after building is completed are to be corrected without charge
to Owner.
B. MILLWORK
1. SCOPE
A. Extent - The work required under this section consists
of all millwork and related items necessary to complete the work
indicated on the drawings and described in the specifications.
1) See Section A, °Carpentry", for work included under
these headings.
Be List of Items Included - Without restricting the
volume or generality of the above "Extent", the work to be per-
formed under this section shall include, but is not limited to,
the following:
1) All wood doors
2) All wood cabinets and counters
3) All finish woodwork, trim, etc.
4) Graphic band
5) Wood grille
C. Bidding Documents - Refer to General Conditions which
are applicable to this section and shall form a part of the
contract.
2. SUBSTITUTIONS
The material or products specified herein and indicated on
drawings by trade names, manufacturer°s name or catalog number
shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will not be per-
mitted, except as described in the General Conditions.
3. SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings to Architect
for approval of all items of millwork; submit drawings in
accordance with requirements described in General Conditions.
Obtain approval of drawings prior to proceeding with fabrication.
B. Shop drawings shall indicate the materials and species,
matching of panels (side, end or other), arrangement, full-size
profiles of mouldings, thicknesses, size of parts, construction,
I
10-3
I
CARPENTRY & MILLWORK
I
I
I
I
I
I
H
I
I
[I
I
n
n
fastenings, blocking, clearances, assembly and erection details,
applied finishes and surfacing, built-in hardware, and necessary
connections to work on other trades.
4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Quality Standards - All material shall be thoroughly
kiln -dried before being milled and shall be protected from
moisture and dampness of any nature until completion of the
building. No finish material is to be brought to building or
installed in building until the building is in a dry and suit-
able condition to prevent damage to finish.
All finish woodwork is to be milled in an accurate manner
with first-class workmanship in accordance with the best
practice for this type of work. All finish surfaces, including
moulded work and edges, shall be machine- or hand -sanded at•
the mill so that no machine marks or defects will be visible,.
The quality standards of the Architectural Woodwork
Industry shall apply and by reference are made a part of this
specification.
B. Competence - The Architect reserves the right to
approve the woodwork manufacturer selected to furnish all of
the woodwork. The approved woodwork manufacturer must have a
reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have
successfully completed comparable work.
C. ..-Details - All work is to be in strict accordance
with details as shown on plans; where work is not fully detailed
on contract drawings, it will be detailed by the architect upon
reasonable notice as to when these details will be required.
The Architect's details shall give information in regard to
mouldings and finished appearance.
D. Field Dimensions - The woodwork manufacturer is
responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job
conditions, and shall show on his shop drawings all required
field measurements beyond his control. The General Contractor
and the woodwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish
and maintain these field dimensions.
This Contractor shall take measurements at the building
and make adjustments as may be necessary for his work to be
installed correctly.
E. Job Assembled Work - The General Contractor, when
installing items not shop assembled, shall distribute to best
overall advantage the defects allowed in the qualf.ty grade
specified.
F. Delivery and Storage - The woodwork manufacturer and
the General Contractor shall jointly be responsible to make
certain that items of woodwork are not delivered until the
I
10-4
CARPENTR'( & MILLWORK
' building and/or storage area is sufficiently dry so that the
woodwork will not be damaged by excessive change in moisture
content.
IC. Installation - The installation and erection of all
wood finish or millwork shall be performed by skilled mechanics
and be erected in straight, true and plumb lines. All joints
' shall be neatly and tightly fitted and all work left smooth.
The work shall be securely fastened together and in place with
all exposed nail heads set. No hammer marks or other defects
' shall show.
5. QUALITY GRADE AND MATERIALS SELECTION
A. Interior Woodwork for Transparent Finish -
1) Scope - The following interior woodwork shall be made
t for transparent finish'-- All exposed surfaces of cabinets and
counters to be white birch, oak or laminated plastic as noted.
' 2)_ Quality Grade - Material and workmanship of all wood-
work for transparent finish shall conform to the premium grade
requirements of the AWI Quality Standards.
' 3) Wood Species - All interior wood for transparent
finish on counters and cabinets shall be birch or oak where
noted.
' B.. Casework -
II) Quality Grade and Species - All casework shall conform
to the quality grade and species called for here.:inab� under
woodwork. Quality grade is as defined in AWI Quality Standards,
Section 400.
' 2) Semi -Exposed Parts - Woodwork material used for semi -
exposed or concealed parts - that is parts fully concealed
' when opaque case doors are closed or material if: covered with
laminated facing, shall be optional with the manufacturer.
' 3) Hardware - The woodwork manufacturer shall furnish
and install the following items of hardware if they are
required by the drawings: hinges, pulls, catchers, metal or plas-
tic drawer slides, drawer rollers, metal shelf, standards and
' brackets.
4) Laminate Facing of Counters - The cores of high
t pressure laminate counter tops and facing shall be of the
thickness shown on the details, but not less than 3/4 inch
thick. The face laminate shall be Formica of c3lor selected.
' 5) Stainless Steel - The baggage rack covering shall be
18 gauge, type 302, 18-8 stainless steel with t4 satin finish
attached in a neat, workmanlike manner.
I 10-5
' CCAARPENTR r & M
6. WOOD DOORS
' All interior, flush doors shall be General Electric
Textolite Surfaced Solid Core Doors as made and guaranteed
' by Ideal Wood Products Company, Louisville, Kentucky. They
shall be surfaced with 1/16th" Textured Textolite in pattern
and color selected and shall be constructed in accordance
with Ideal Wood Products Company manufacturing and engineering
' procedures. Glass lights shall be glazed with 1/4" wire plate
glass.
' 7. WOOD GRILLE
Furnish and install wood grilles between Spaces 106 and
' 107 as detailed and described on drawings* Grilles to be•
size and ,design shown, of aged redwood, factory framed and
finished in dark oil walnut finish as manufactured by Custom -
wood Manufacturing Co. of Albuquerque, New Mexico. No substi-
tution will be approved.
8. GRAPHIC BAND
' Provide graphic band throughout building as detailed on
plans, constructed of Formica or Textolite. Wood trim to be
white birch as specified in Paragraph 5A. See plans and
tbuilding sections for locations of graphics band.
I
I
I
H
H
II
C
I
10-6
' SECTION 11
' FURRING, LATHING, PLASTERING & STUCCO
1. SCOPE OF WORK
A. Extent - The work required under this section consists
of all exterior work required in connection with metal furring,
' lathing, plastering, stucco and related items necessary to
complete the work indicated on drawings and described in speci-
fications.
B. Special Items and Conditions - The following special
items and conditions shall apply where applicable:
1) Install metal frames furnished under another section
for recessed lighting fixtures in plaster ceilings and cornice
soffits.
2) The Portland Cement plaster scratch coat at building
cornice shall be included herein.
' 3) Where recessed lighting fixtures occur in plaster
ceilings, the plastering subcontractor shall be responsible
for coordinating the ceiling layout and correct locations of
' all openings in ceilings.
C. Work Not Included - The following items of related
' work are specified and included in other sections of these
specifications.
1) Wood grounds and wood furring in connection with
plastering.
D. Bidding Documents - Refer to General Conditions
' which are:applicable to this section and shall form a part of
the contract.
' 2. SUBSTITUTIONS
The materials or products specified herein and indicated
on drawings by trade name, manufacturer's name or catalog
'
number shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will not
be permitted, except as described in General Conditions.
' 3. THICKNESS AND NUMBER OF COATS
A. Thickness - Except as otherwise indicated or specified,
' the minimum thickness of plaster as measured from face of lath
to finished plaster surfaces shall be as €ollows:
1) Portland cement plaster base coat to receive stucco:
1/4 to 3/8 inch.
I
2) Exterior Portland cement plaster: 3/4 inch.
B. Number of Coats - Plaster on metal lath 3 coats.
Doubling back with brown coat over scratch coat before it is
partially dry and set will not be permitted on 3• -coat work.
' FURRING, LATHING,
PLASTERING & STUCCO
' 4. PLASTER MATERIALS
IA. Basic Materials - Exterior finish stucco shall be
standard products as manufactured by U. S. Gypsum Company or
National Gypsum Company and conforming to the manufacturer's
applicable specifications. Hydrated lime and quicklime shall
'
conform to soundness tests as described in Appendix I of
American Standard Specification for Gypsum Plastering A 42.1
(or latest revision). Manufacturer shall furnish evidence of
compliance. Portland cement shall be an approved standard
brand, gray or white as specified. When plaster is machine
applied, the type of plaster materials used shall be designed,
' formulated and prepared for application by spraying.
B.'' Aggregate - Aggregates for use in base coat plaster
shall be sand, as hereinafter specified and conforming to
' ASTM Specifications C35-59. Sand used in sand float finish
coats shalt be graded silica sand, all passing a 30 mesh screen.
co Water - Water used for mixing shall be clean, fresh
and free from quantities of mineral and organic substances
that will retard or accelerate the setting of plaster.
5. DELIVERY AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS
A. Deliver all manufactured materials in the original
' packages, containers, or bundles and bearing the name of the
manufacturer and the brand. Except as otherwise specified
herein, the mixing, installation and application of manufactured
' material shall be in strict accordance with the printed direc-
tions of the manufacturer.
B. Protect lath and all cementitious materials against
'
dampness until used. Store materials off the ground, under
cover and. away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces.
Protect metal accessories in manner to prevent rusting. Do not
' install rusted metal accessories in the work.
6. METAL FURRING
' Provide metal furring at building cornices and ceilings
indicated on drawings, as specified herein and elsewhere
required to provide a suitable base for plastering. Include
all steel shapes, clips, crimped sand irons, wire and other
attachments necessary to bring plaster to lines indicated.
Where furring is shown or required and the size o spacing of
members is not indicated, it shall consist of 3,4 incih steel
channels spaced not more than 16 inches on center and with
adequate bracing. secure furring to adjacent construction.
7. SUSPENDED OR FURRED CEILINGS
A. Extent and Location - Provide suspended and plastered
' ceilings at canopy to spaces 102 and 104, roofed area outside
departure doors on east and cornice soffit.
11-2
' FURRING, LATHING,
PLASTERING & STUCCO
B. Main Runner Channels - Main runner channels shall
consist of 1-1/2 inch cold -rolled painted channels weighing
not less than 475 lbs. per 1000 lin. ft. Space runner channels
not more than 4 feet on centers and 3 inches from parallel
walls. Support runner channels at each end at 4 foot intervals
with hangers of No. 8 gauge zinc coated steel wire, or .125
' inch diameter monel wire. Embed looped ends of hangers in
concrete a minimum of 2 inches or secure to approved inserts
that will develop full strength of hangers. Attach hangers to
' steel construction. The lower ends of wire hangers shall be
saddle -tied or wrapped around the runner channels in a manner
to develop the full strength of hanger and prevent turning or
twisting of the channels. Where runner channels are spliced,
overlap ends not less than 12 inches with flanges interlocked;
secure splice near each endttth 16 gauge tie wire or equivalent
clips.
U
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
[1
I
I
C. Cross Furring Channels - Cross furring shall consist
of 3/4 inch cold -rolled painted channels weighing not less
than 300'"Ibs. per 1000 ft. Attach cross furring channels to
runner channels at right angles and securely saddle -tie with
No. 16 :gauge galvanized annealed steel wire or .062 inch
diameter"tmohel wire, or secure with equivalent clips or attach-
ments. Space furring channels 16 inches on centers unless
otherwise ihdicated or specified. Provide framing around
recessed'=lghting fixtures and other openings in ceilings.
When furring channels are spliced, overlap ends not less than
8 inchet eith flanges interlocked; secure splice near each
end with 16 gauge tie wire or equivalent clips.
8. METAL LATH
A. Extent and Location - Metal lath shall be used for
stucco and as a plaster base for furred and suspended ceilings
and cornice soffits, over exterior metal furring.
B..Type and Weights of Lath - Lath shall be of the
following. types and weights for the spacing of supports listed.
The weights specified are in pounds per square yard. Where
more tha'n-one type of lath is listed for the same spacing of
supports, the type used shall be optional with the Contractor.
1) Self -furring 3/8' expanded rib metal lath: Fabricate
lath from zinc -coated steel sheets.
a) Lath weighing 3.4 lbs. may be used on any
type vertical or horizontal support up to
16 inch spacings.
C. Application of Lath - Lap rib lath 1/2 inch at sides,
or by nesting side ribs depending upon the type and depth of
ribs. Lap all metal lath 1 inch at ends or by nesting. Make
and stagger end laps over supports or lace together between
supports. Space all other attachments for securing lath not
more than 6 inches apart.
I
11-3
'• FURRING, LATHING,
N & STUCCO
Ii) Secure lath to metal supports and to adjacent lath
with 18 gauge galvanized annealed tie wire; 12 gauge spring
steel clips, galvanized or painted; .0475 inch diameter monel
ttie wire or other approved attachment devices.
9. METAL BEADS AND ACCESSORIES
IA. Materials and Construction - Metal corner beads,
base screeds, casing beads, plaster stop beads and expansion
beads shall be fabricated from zinc -coated steel, not lighter
' than 26 gauge. Provide accessories with perforated or expanded
flanges or other suitable attachments that will permit complete
embedment•of the accessory in the plaster or stucco. The
' dimension of beads and stops shall be suitable for the plaster
and stucco thickness.
B. Plaster Stop and Casing Beads - Provide metal piaster
' stops and casing beads at locations as indicated on drawings.
Beads shall be of size and shape as detailed.
IC. Expansion Beads - Provide metal expansion beads in
plaster ceilings and stucco walls at locations and spacing
indicated. Beads shall be double stop type of size and
' shape similar to control joint as manufactured by U. S. Gypsum
Company.
D. installation - Set vertical beads plumb and horizontal
' beads level and from true arrises and neat mitres. Secure at
ends and not more than 12 inches apart with galvanized staples,
wire ties or concrete nails staggered.
' 10. PLASTER AND STUCCO BASE COATS
A. Portland Cement Plaster - Use standard gray Portland
'
cement plaster for base coat under all Portland cement plaster,
for exterior plaster and for base coats to receive stucco.
Scratch and brown coats shall consist of one part gray Portland
' cement and three parts sand by volume; add ten (10) to twenty
(20) percent hydrated lime or lime putty by volume for each
bag of cement.
11. APPLICATION OF PLASTER BASE COATS
A. Before Plastering or Stucco Work - Inspect surfaces
'
to receive plaster or stucco and see that grounds, furring,
screeds, base screeds, corner beads, casing beads, plaster
stops, corner lath, metal trim and lath are secured in place.
' See that grounds are set to receive the specified thickness of
plaster. Inspect metal accessories, metal lath and metal
frames for rusting or other conditions that will stain the
finished plaster or stucco; correct such conditions by touching
up with aluminum paint.
I
' 11-4
FURRING, LATHING,
PLASTERING & STUCCO
B. Three -Coat Work - Apply scratch (first) coat with
sufficient material and force to adhere firmly to plaster base;
prior to final set, scratch with a scarifier or scratcher to
produce a suitable bond for the next coat. Apply brown (second)
coat to true planes and screed in both directions to within
IA inch of the finished surface; float and leave rough to
receive finish (third) coat. Scratch coat must be dry before
brown coat is applied. At Contractor's option a chemical
bonding agent may be substituted for the scratch coat of bond
plaster on concrete surfaces.
C. Special Provisions for Base Coats - At the intersec-
tions of masonry walls and plastered ceilings, apply metal
plaster ;stops to break the continuity and provide free movement.
12.
A.:; Cortland Cement Finish - Use standard gray Portland
cement finish coat over Portland cement base coats. Finish
coat sh4)_%;consist of one part gray Portland cement to 3 parks
sand by?volume; add 10 to 20 percent hydrated lime or lime {'
putty bM: 2ume for each bag of cement. Trowel or float as
required.;to;produce a uniform sand textured finish to match
approved;sthuple.
s.. Stucco - Use exterior precolored stucco finish coat
where shown on drawings. Apply over a base coat of cement f.
plaster, •.$ix with water to consistency required for the method
of application and in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
13. APPLICATION OF FINISH COATS
A. .General Provisions - The thickness of finish coats:
shall be -from 1/16 to 1/8 inch. Apply finish coats to a
partially dry base coat or to a thoroughly dry base coat that
has been'evenly wetted; the use of excessive water shall be
avoided. In general, base coats shall be dampened uniformly
to the degree recommended by the manufacturer for the materials
and methods used in the base coats and finish coat. The
finish coat of Portland cement plaster shall be moist cured
by keeping it damp 48 hours after application.
B. Sand Float Finishes - Apply finish coat over base
coats to true even surface and then float with a wood, carpet,
cork, rtebber or other type float to produce the texture to match
approved sample. Finished surface shall be uniform in texture
and color and free from slick spots or other blemishes.
C. Apply precolored stucco to thickness required to
obtain frieze texture applied by double -back method of vertical
rake with broom or brush, splatter dash using stiff mortar
partially covering surface, then trowel down high stops, to
match an approved sample.
11-5
I
L
H
El
I
I
I
L
L
I
I
L
L
FURRING, LATHING,
PLASTERING & STUCCO
14. PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION FOR PLASTER
A. Temperature and Ventilation - Protect plaster from
freezing and from uneven or too rapid drying. Do not apply
plaster to surfaces that contain frost. After plaster has set
hard, provide and maintain free circulation of air to prevent
sweat -outs.
B. Protection of Adjacent Surfaces - Where finished
surfaces such as metal frames, metal windows, exposed masonry,
etc.- have been installed prior to completion of plaster work,
the finished surfaces shall be protected from damage during
plastering. Protection shall consist of covering with a non-
staining kraft paper or polyethelyne sheet and joints sealed
with tape or adhesive. Metal frames may be protected with a
removable type of masking tape or an approved type of non-
staining petroleum jelly mixed in accordance with manufacturer's
directions. Maintain protection in place during plastering and
remove when plaster work is completed. Any damage to finished
surfaces caused as the result of plaster operation shall be
corrected and the cost thereof paid by the plastering sub-
contractor.,:
Examination of Surfaces - Before plaster is applied,
the surfacesto be plastered in each room or space shall be
carefully.::examined by the plastering contractor and the
Architect'notified of any unsatisfactory surfaces or conditions.
Applicat:toa.of plaster shall not proceed until such unsatis.fap-
tory conditions have been corrected.
15. MI}ll24G PLASTER
Mixing of plaster shall be done in mechanical type mixers.
Provide. a sufficient number of mixers to carry on the work.
Measurement shall be by volume or weight as specified. Do not
use any frozen, caked or lumpy materials, or material that has
partially set. Retempered plaster that has partially set shall
not be used. Clean mixer of all set or hardened material
before materials for a new batch are loaded. Keep mixing tools
and equipment clean. Mix each batch separately. The mixing
sequence and cycle of operations and time shall be in accordance
with the material manufacturer's directions.
16. PATCHING
Upon completion, point®up plaster around trim and other
work. Cut out and patch defective and damaged plaster. Patching
of plaster shall match existing work in texture and finish and,
at joining with plaster previously applied, shall finish flush
and smooth.
' 11-6
SECTION 12
Extent - The work required under
metal and glazingentrance work and
ry to complete the work indicated o
ed in the specifications.
B. List of Items Included -
volume or generality of the above
performed under this section shall
to, the following:
Aluminum entrance doors and fran
hardware and related items
installation of aluminum frames,
panels.
See Se
thereunder.
this section
related items
the drawings
restricting the
the work to be
but is not limited
Except as otherwise specified herein or specifically
approved by the Architect in writing, all metal and glass
entrance work shall be products of the following manufacturers,
subject to compliance with specification requirements.
Kawneer Company, Niles, Michigan
Pittsburg Plate Glass Company
Armalite Division of Anaconda, Atlanta, Gel
Keane Monroe Corp., Monroe, North Carolina
Horton Automatics, Corpus Christi, Texas
SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings of metal and glass
entrance work and accessories to Architect for approval. Submit
drawings in accordance with requirements described in General
Conditions. Obtain approval of drawings prior to proceeding
with fabrication.
Shop drawings shall indicate the materials, arrangement,
profiles, thicknesses, size of parts, size of openings,
assembly and erection details, fastenings, supports, anchors,
reinforcement, clearances, hardware coordination and all
necessary connections to work of other trades.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES
4. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES
A. Automatic Sliding Entrances
1) Scope - The Keane Monroe door specifications shall
be comparable to the following Kawneer specifications:
' This Contractor shall furnish labor and materials
for the complete installation of Slidematic-SE automatic
sliding aluminum entrances as manufactured by the Kawneer
' Company, Inc. Entrance units shown on the drawings shall
include entrance doors, frames, automatic operator, door con-
trols and related accessories as specified herein and as
recommended by the manufacturer for this installation. No work
shall begin until entrance manufacturer's shop drawings have
been approved by the Architect.
2) Work Not Included -
General - The General Contractor shall coordinate
' the work of all trades required to prepare the structure for
the sliding entrance and to install the electrical service
for the operators and controls.
' Electrical Service - The following requirements for
Slidematic-SE automatic sliding entrances are described under
the Electrical section of the Specifications:
"Furnish labor and materials required for connect-
ing 115V single phase 60 cycle service with grounding
' conductor to junction box located inside the transom
bar of each Slidematic-SE automatic entrance. Provide
separate 15 amp service and separate circuit breaker
for each entrance unit using No. 12 gauge wire for
t entrances less than 150 feet from breaker panel or
No. 10 gauge wire if entrance is 150 feet to 250 ft.
from breaker panel."
' "Provide additional 115 VAC service to 24 VAC
transformers supplying power to the automatic entrance
sensors. One transformer per entrance (furnished
by the entrance manufacturer) shall be installed by
this Contractor within 15 feet of each entrance unit
and wired to the 24V control circuit located inside
the entrance transom bar,"
3) Materials - Frame and panels shall be constructed of
' 6063T5 extruded aluminum moldingse Sliding carriage and
carriage reinforcing, miscellaneous clips and brackets, shall
be steel with protective coatings of zinc chromate paint, or
cadmium or zinc plating. All fastenings and fastening devices
'
shall be of aluminum, stainless steel or other non -corrosive
materials compatible with aluminum.
I
' 12-2
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES
4) Construction - Entrance framing shall be completely
factory fabricated using clipped corner, and joint connections
for job site assembly.
I Sliding panel, corners shall be accurately fitted to
flush hairline joints, mechanically reinforced, and welded
with a minimum of three deep penetration sigma welds at each
corner. Entrances shall be equipped with an emergency break-
away device in each sliding panel which shall permit the
unlocked panel to be pushed open in the direction of exit at
any position in its line of travel.
Sliding panels suspended from the transom bar track
shall be supported on an overhead steel carriage rolling on
two single -row ball bearing wheel assemblies and guided at the
bottom by a bottom Guide Shoe concealed in the sidelite base
track.
Glazing beads in the sliding panels shall position
the glass off -center in the stiles to maintain a finger -safe
operating clearance of not more than 3/8" between the moving
glass and the fixed interlock stile.
5) Hardware - Sliding panels shall be fitted with one
Adams -Rite Maximum Security hook -bolt deadlock with 2 -point
bottom Ygdk added for bi-parting pairs. Strike for hooklock
shall be 'Steel reinforced. Sliding panels with emergency,
breakaway,'shall be fitted with concealed pivots, spring loaded
latch release with breakaway tension adjustments, and concealed
limit a. with adjustable tension.
6)0..P;finish - All exposed door and framing members shalt
be free ;ofscratches and other serious surface blemishes.
Expose 'us invms sur£arcr. shall be finished in #40 Dark Bronze
Permanoi#c': to conform to Aluminum Association Standard
AA-M12C7;2'P42.
7; :b or Operator - The sliding panels shall be operated
• automati,slsy by Magic -Slide All -Electric Operators as manu-.
factured:.y Stanley Door Operating Equipment, Division of The.
Stanley Wdf"k.s, Farmington, Connecticut. The solid-state
operatorcontrol unit, junction box for connection of 115V
electrical. :service and the operator assembly containing linear
actuator,:. drive motor and limit switches shall be factory
installA 4, Ad totally self-contained in the transom bar of the
entranceets'ee. Operator control shall provide separate cusk4on
adjustments for opening and closing cycles. Operator drive
mechanistu'ahali permit doors to slide manually with power off'..
Entranoea equipped with emergency breakaway in the sliding panel
shall bd"fitted with a power disconnect switch to cut power to
the operator when the breakaway panel is swung open.
8) Control Switch - Operation of the doors shall be
controlled by a rotary selector switch installed in the stile
of the f•.$ud sidelite 5°8" above the finish floor. The seledtot
112-3
' ALUMINUM ENTRANCES
' switch shall have four positions clearly identified as "Off",
"fold -Open". "Automatic" and "One-way". Two-way entrances
shall be instantly convertible to actuation from only one side
' by turning selection switch to "One-way" position.
9) Actuating Controls - Actuating controls shall be
Stanley "Magic -Scan" motion sensors surface mounted on the
' entrance transom bar to serve traffic approaching the doorway
from both directions or one direction only on exterior side of
entrance to Space 103. Sensors installed 84" above floor level
shall detect objects moving at a rate of two or more inches
per second within a semi -circular area approximately five
feet deep and five feet wide. Sensor units shall be equipped
with zone size and sensitivity adjustments which shall be
inaccessible when sensor cover is installed.
Each entrance equipped with "Magic -Scan" controls
' shall be fitted with a door holding device emitting a beam of
infra -red light into a retro-reflector located across the door-
way on a horizontal line approximately 24" above the finished ,
' floor and. parallel to but not more than 1-1/2" from the sliding
panels. The holding device shall prevent an open door from
closing :when the light beam is blocked.
' 10) Installation - Entrance frame and panels, and
actuating controls shall be installed in accordance with
entrance manufacturer's recommendations. Operator shall be
' factory installed in the frame transom bar. Following the
installation of electrical wiring, this Contractor shall be
responsible for having final adjustments made to operator and
controls to attain normal operation of each Slidematic-SE
entrance unit.
11) Glass and Glazing - Glass in fixed lites, breakaway
' sidelites panels and sliding panels shall be 1/4" thick, tempered,
under Section 18 of Specifications. Sliding panels shall be
glazed with adhesive glazing tape on one side of glass and
' EPDM roll -in glazing gasket on opposite side. Glazing shall
be done after sliding panels have been installed and adjusted
to lock and slide properly.
I
.1
L
I
12) Protection and Cleaning - After installation, it shall
be the responsibility of the General Contractor to protect the
work from damage by other trades and to provide final cleaning.
13) Guarantee - This Contractor shall guarantee his work
against defective materials and workmanship for a period of
one year following completion of the entrance installation.
The entrance manufacturer shall provide the owner with a parts
and service labor warranty covering normal use of the Stanley
automatic operating equipment for a concurrent one-year period.
I
12.4
I
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES
I
I
I
C
U
I
I
I
I
I.
n
I
I
B. Narrow Stile Entrances
1) Scope - Furnish labor, material and other services
to complete the fabrication and installation of frames, doors
and related items as shown on the drawings.
2) Work Required - Aluminum entrance doors, the
TRIFAB frames, sidelights, and related items shall be as manu-
factured by Kawneer Company, Niles, Michigan; Visalia,
California; Atlanta, Georgia; Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania; and
Toronto, Ontario, Canada.
Doors shall be Narrow Stile "190" Entrances with
450 TRI-FAB framing.
3) Work and Materials Not Included - Glass and glazing.
4) Materials - Sections shall be extruded from 6063-T5
aluminum alloy (ASTM B221 -54T alloy GS 10A T5). Major portions
of the door stiles shall be .125" in thickness and glazing
molding shall be .050" thick.
5) Construction - Vertical stiles shall be 1-29/32",
top rail 2-9/32", and bottom rail 3-29/32". Corner construc-
tion shall consist of both sigma deep penetration weld and
mechanical fastening. Glazing stops shall be snap -in type
with neoprene bulb -type glazing. No exposed screws shall be
required to secure stops. Stops on exterior side shall be
lock -in tamper proof type. Door leaf shall be equipped with
adjustable mechanism located in top rail near lock stile which
will provide for minor clearance adjustments after installation.
Door shall he weatherstripped on three sides with
metal -backed pile cloth installed in the door and/or frame.
Bottom will he weathered with a pile sweep strip applied to
door rail.
6) Finish - All exposed members shall he free of
scratches and other serious surface blemishes. All aluminum
shall be given Permanodic Dark Bronze $40 which is an Archi-
tectural Class I Anodic Coating with Integral Color
(AA-M21C22A42).
' Permanodic finish shall be obtained on all exposed
aluminum sections by huffing and etching followed by an anodic
treatment to produce a high density aluminum oxide coating.
' 7) Hardware - Hardware for Aluminum Entrances shall be
furnished and installed in the doors by the door manufacturer,
and shall include the following Kawneer standard items:
' a) Pivoting and Hinging - Butt hinges - ball bearing.
b) Locks - Dead bolt.
IC) Flush Bolt.
d) Closers - Surface mounted - streamline with
hold open.
12-5
I
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES
' e) Push Pull Hardware - Stype "P" with bronze
finish.
f) Thresholds.
8) Erection - After erection and glazing, this Contrac-
tor shall check and readjust as required all items of operating
hardware on doors installed under this section.
I
I
I
I
U
I
n
I
J
I
I
I 12-6
' SECTION 13
' CURTAINWALL SYSTEM
1. SCOPE OF WORK
Includes finishing and installation of perimeter sealing
and all metal windows complete with all necessary anchors and
accessories.
1 A. Work Not Included
Ii) Structural supports at mullions.
2) Interior furnishings or closures between mullions
t and partitions.
3) Metal sub -sills and masonry.
' 4) Final cleaning of windows and glass.
5) Glass.
' 2. TYPE AND QUALITY
For purposes of designating type and quality for work of
'
this Section, drawings and specifications are based upon pro-
ducts of Kawneer Company, Inc., a Subsidiary of American Metal
Climax, Inc. Whenever substitute products are to be considered,
supporting technical literature, samples, drawings, and per-
formance data must be submitted in order to make a valid
comparison of the products involved.
3. MATERIALS
A. Structural gaskets shall have separate lock strips
that are 10 points Shore A harder in durometer than the gaskets
to transmit extra pressure to the gasket sealing lips.
' Neoprene compound shall be formulated from the best
available virgin materials, quality controlled to insure
uniformity, and compounded for optimum physical properties and
' function.
The following physical properties shall be incorporated
into the Neoprene compound, and the gasket shall meet or exceed
' these physical properties when tested by approved independent
testing laboratories.
PHYSICAL PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS
ASTM
' Physical Test
Properties Method
Tensile 2300 psi min. O412
Elongation at rupture 200% min. O412.
Tear resistance, min. 150 lb./Lin.in. O625 (Die C)
' 13-1
L
CURTAINWALL SYSTEM
L
L
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
Hardness, Shore A
Compression Set max. percent
22 hrs. at 212O F.
Brittleness Temp., min.
Ozone Resistance, 1 ppm
100 hrs. at 100O F., 20%
elongation
Heat aging, 70 hrs. at
212O F..
Hardness
Tensile
Elongation
Flame Resistance
75+5
35% max.
-40O F.
no cracks
+10-0 duro
-15% max,
-40% max.
Gaskets must
not propagate
flame
D676
D395 Method B
D746
D1149
C542 -65T
Fetter
B. Extrusions shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper. Exposed
aluminum sheets to receive an anodic finish, shall be 5005
alloy to match extrusions. Sheet which is not exposed may be
3003 alloy with mill finish. All sections shall be formed true
to detail' and free from defects impairing appearance, strength
or durabiStty. Flashing shall be mill finish 5005 alloy,
0.018" .h`icjc. Joints shall be lapped not less than 6" and
sea led.;?*Screws, bolts and fasteners where used with aluminum
shall be, 'a mum or or stainless steel. Where used with carbon,
steel,;faSteners shall conform to requirements of the RISC.
'.
4. COIES1RUCTION
A. Wall shall be Kawneer Zipperwall 2 described as
follows:'
1) Mullions may be tubular or split for expansion,.and
may project inside or outside the plane of the glass. Mullions
shall accommodate one gasket section. There shall be no
through metal in horizontal rails or vertical mullions.
2) System shall accommodate 1" insulating glass and/or
1" unflanged panels.
3) Neoprene gaskets with separate Zipperstrips shall be
used to join aluminum framing, panels, vents and glass.
' Structural aluminum members shall be designed to support a
windload of 25 psf on the wall surface.
' 4) Gaskets shall be installed under compression accord-
ing to dimensions recommended by the manufacturer and shall be
sealed at all joints with Kawneer 27-134 Joint Seal Tape. All
joints shall be flush.
' 5) Internal drainage shall lead any infiltrated water to
the exterior through 1" long weep slots in the extruded aluminum
' sill.
' 13-2
CURTAINWALL SYSTEM
6) The system shall provide for expansion and contraction
of the component materials as will be required by an ambient
temperature range of 120O F. without causing harmful buckling,
or cracking, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners, or
other effects detrimental to weathering performance.
5. PERFORMANCE
All wall products furnished under this section shall meet
' or exceed the following performance requirements:
A. Resistance to Air Infiltration - Air infiltration
' shall not exceed .06 CFM/Sq.Ft. of wall area plus .5 CFM per
foot of ventilator crack when tested at a pressure of 1.56
psf in accordance with ASTM E-283.
' B. Resistance to Water Infiltration - When tested in
accordance with ASTM E-331, the wall shall not leak at a mini-
mum test pressure of 4.0 psf.
C. Performance Under Uniform Load - When tested in
accordance with ASTM E-330, the maximum deflection of any
member shall not exceed 1/175 of its span, and when the load
is removed there shall be no evidence of permanent deformation
or damage when tested under a load of 25 pat.
6. FINISH
A. All exposed grid framing members shall be free of
scratches and other serious surface blemishes. All aluminum
shall be Permanodic Dark Bronze $40, which is an Architectural
Class 1 Anodic Coating with integral color (AA-M21C22A42).
Permanodic finish shall be obtained on all exposed
aluminum sections by etching followed by an anodic treatment
to produce a high density aluminum oxide coating.
' B. Mild steel framing shall conform to ASTM designation
A-283 Grade C. All steel to receive one coat of zinc chromate
primer after fabrication. Field welds and scratches shall
'receive one touch-up coat after installation.
7. INSULATED PANELS
Par.els.shall be as detailed on drawings of bronze colored
aluminum metal with 3 lb0 cubic foot density polyurethane foam
' insulation backing. Bronze metal to be f40 Dark Bronze to
match other glass settings.
8. ENTRANCES
1 Entrance door shall be as specified in Section 12.
I
' 13-3
n
CURTAINWALL SYSTEM
' 9. SEALANTS
C
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ii
I
I
L
Ii
All splice cover
Joint sleeves shall b
skinning type elastic
jambs shall be sealed
on inside and outside
conduction.
10. INSTALLATION
s
e
shall be set in non-drying mastic.
sealed to adjacent members with a
sealant. Aluminum heads, sills and
to surrounds with a skinning type sealant
perimeter joints to block through metal
• Walls shall be installed, glazed and
experienced workmen in accordance with th
instructions and approved shop drawings.
under Section 18 of Specifications.
11. PROTECTION AND CLEANING
e
windows adjusted by
manufacturer°s
Glass to be furnished
After installation, metal surfaces of the walls, windows,
panels and entrances shall be cleaned on both interior and
exterior of all mortar, plaster, paint, and other contaminants.
After being cleaned, all work shall be protected against damage
until it is accepted by the General Contractor. Thereafter, it
shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to main-
tain protection and provide final cleaning.
12. GUARANTEE
This Contractor shall guarantee his work against defective
materials or workmanship for a period of two years following.
acceptance of the materials by the Architect.
L
13-4
F
SECTION 14
1
L
G
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. SCOPE
The work covered by this section of the Specifications
consists of furnishing all labor, materials, supplies and
equipment and in performing all operations in connection with
the construction of the rolling and vertical sliding steel
doors and rolling aluminum grille, complete, in strict accor-
dance with this Section of the Specifications and the applicable
drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the
contract.
2. GENERAL
A. Rolling steel doors and frames and rolling aluminum
grille shall be as manufactured and furnished by The Cookson
Company. Vertical sliding steel door shall be as manufactured
by Electric Power Door Co. of Ribbing, Minnesota.
B. Except as otherwise specified herein, or specifically
approved by the Architect, all doors, grilles and frames shall
be products of the following manufacturers, subject, however,
to compliance with specification requirements and comparable
to the product specified.
1) Security Fire Door Co.
2) Windsor Door Co.
3) J. G. Wilson Corp.
4) Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co.
5) Mahon Division of RCM Corp.
6) Kinnear Division of Rarscon Corp.
7) The Cookson Company
3. ROLLING STEEL DOORS
A. Curtains - Curtains shall be constructed of inter-
locking rollformed galvanized steel tslats, to provide a curtain
stiffness to withstand wind pressure of 20 lbs. per square foot.
Galvanized steel slats shall be tight -coat galvanized with a
coating of zinc of 1.25 ounces per square foot of flat metal,
per ASTM standards., free from flaking or peeling. Curtains shall
be equipped with a rolled steel bottom bar consisting of two
angles of equal weight, one on each side, securely fastened to
the bottom of curtain for reinforcement and to provide contact
against the sill when closed. The ends of alternate interlock-
ing slats shall be fitted with malleable -iron endlocks which
shall act as a wearing surface in the guides and prevent lateral
movement of individual curtain slat.
B. Guides
- Guides
shall he
formed
of
standard rolled
steel angles not
lighter
than 3/16"
thick
and
of sufficient
I
14-1
r
ROLLING & VERTICAL SLIDING STEEL
DOORS & ROLLING ALUMINUM GRILLE
C
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
depth to retain curtains in place under normal wind pressure.
They shall be attached to jambs, plumb and true, by bolts of
not less than 3/8" in diameter, spaced not more than 2'6" on
centers. Guides shall be fitted at top into slots cast in the
mouth of the roller shaft brackets.
C. Roller Shaft - Roller shaft shall be steel pipe of
sufficient diameter to reduce deflection to not to exceed
0.03 inch per foot of span. Ends of roller shaft shall be
completely closed by cast-iron plugs machined to fit I.D.
of pipe and secured by cap screws - NOT WELDED. Roller shaft
shall house all counterbalancing mechanism including an oil -
tempered helical steel spring capable of producing sufficient
torque to assure easy operation of the door curtain from any
position. Spring tension shall be adjustable by means of an
adjusting wheel on the outside of the end bracket.
D. Brackets - Brackets shall be of heavy cast iron or
steel, designed to form an end closure support for the hood.
Ends of roller shaft shall be journalled into bracket hubs
of sufficient thickness to provide ample bearing surface for
load of roller shaft and curtain. Operator bracket hub and plug
in spring end of shaft shall be fitted with self -lubricated,
sealed ball bearings.
E. Hoods - Hoods shall be of not less than #24 gauge
Bonderized-hot-galvanized steel formed to fit contour of end
brackets in a neat manner and reinforced with stiffening rolls
at top and bottom edges.
F. Paint - Galvanized steel for curtain slats shall
have 1.25 ounces of zinc per sq. ft. per ASTM Standard, and
shall be chemically cleaned and Bonderized for paint bond, and
shall be given one dip coat -of rust -inhibiting synthetic
enamel which shall be baked on at 350 P. prior to roll forming.
All other surfaces of door parts shall be given one shop coat
of rust -inhibiting paint.
G. Shipping Preparation - Curtain to be assembled in
one piece, rolled and wrapped in metal bound wood matting to
prevent scratching of material and paint. Brackets to be
packed in wood boxes for safe handling in transit.
H. Operation - Doors shall be mechanically operated by
means of a chain -gear operator. Hand chain to be galvanized.
II. Erection - All doors shall be erected by the manufac-
turer or his authorized representative and shall be guaranteed
for a period of one year from the date of completion of erection
' that any part defective in material or workmanship will be
repaired or replaced without charge to the Owner.
I
H
14-2
ROLLING & VERTICAL SLIDING STEEL
DOORS & ROLLING ALUMINUM GRILLE
4. VERTICAL LIFT STEEL DOORS
Furnish and install as detailed on plans, 6'0" x 3'0"
insulated, single section steel, hand operated, vertical lift
steel doors, complete with frame, counterweight enclosure,
' etc. Doors to have three vision panels each, exterior mounted
where shown on plans. Doors to be equipped with rubber
weathering edges at top and bottom and at each side. Sections
' shall be fabricated of structural channels, with 14 gauge
prime flat steel sheeting attached by spot or skip welding or,
screw fasteners. Tubular construction with recessed sheeting
will be acceptable. Insulation shall be 1" thick polyurethane
or similar insulation material.
Guide track shall be structural angles welded and bolted
Ito support channel with heavy-duty cam follower guide rollers.
Cable sheave and rollers shall have anti -friction bearings,
with steel counterweights and lift cables.
' 5. ROLLING GRILLE
A. Work included - Furnish aluminum rolling grilles as
manufactured by The Cookson Company, San Francisco, California.
B. Work Not Included - Design and preparation of opening
' and field painting.
C. Grille Curtain - Shall be Design G5036 with aluminum
' 5/16" horizontal rods and 5/8" hinged vertical connecting links
on 9" centers. The footpiece shall be tubular in shape. Pro-
vide cylinder lock on push-up grilles.
ID. Guides - Extruded aluminum with a return lip to
prevent grille from pulling out of guides. Guides to be com-
plete with wear strip to eliminate metal -to -metal contact.
' E. Brackets - Shall be fabricated from steel plate.
F. Barrel - 4" diameter steel tubing or greater to limit
'
deflection to .03" per foot. Grille curtain to be counter-
balanced by oil -tempered torsion springs.
' 1) Operation - Shall be manual or push-up operation.
G. Finish - Aluminum Dark Bronze, Duranodic 313 finish.
' H. Erection - the Cookson Company standards and erection
instructions provided and shall be followed.
r
H
H
I
14-3
I
SECTION 15
I !
I
I
C
1
I
I
H
11
I
I
I
1. SCOPE
The work covered by this Section of the Specifications
consists of furnishing all labor, materials, supplies and
equipment and in performing all operations in connection with
the construction of the steel frames and doors, complete, in
strict accordance with this Section of the Specifications and
the applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions
of the contract.
2. GENERAL
A. All steel doors, door frames and frame shall be as
manufactured and furnished by Kewanee Mfg. Division, Kinkead
Industries, Inc. See Section 17 for Finish Hardware.
B. Except as otherwise specified herein, or specifically
approved by the Architect, all metal doors and frames shall
be products of the following manufacturers, subject, however,
to compliance with specification requirements and comparable
to the product specified.
1) Ceco Steel Products Corporation
2) Amweld Metal Door Company
3) Dusing and Hunt, Inc.
4) Firedoor Corporation of America
5) Steelcraft Manufacturing Company
3. SHOP DRAWINGS
All doors, frames and hollow metal work shall be fabricated
as shown on the shop drawings, submitted to and approved by
the Architect before fabrication.
4. DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Doors and frames shall be delivered to the Contractor
at the jobsite. They shall be handled so as to avoid damage
and stored upright in a protected area on wood skids, covered
with tarpaulins or plastic, vented to avoid condensation and
entrapped moisture, until ready for installation. Damaged or
deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises.
5. MATERIALS
A. Doors - Hollow metal, full flush seamless steel
construction, 1-3/4" thick, completely filled with small cell
phenolic resin -impregnated kraft honeycomb core bonded to
18 -ga. skin sheets with heat and pressure activated adhesive,
14 -gachannel perimeter reinforcement spot welded to skin
sheets top and bottom, continuously welded to vertical channels
with welds ground and finished smooth, invisible on exposed
I
15-1
I
HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES
I
surfaces. Top of exterior swing -out doors filled flush with
additional channel to prevent moisture accumulation. Lock
edge betel 1/8" to 2".
Hinge and lock reinforcements integral with vertical
perimeter channel, additional reinforcing box for lock speci-
fied, internal reinforcing for overhead surface -mounted closers,
and for surface -mounted hardware as required, for field drilling
and tapping by Contractor. Hinge mortise drilled and tapped
3 full threads minimum for standard weight 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
hinges.
Doors to be cleaned, phosphatized and primed with
oven -baked enamel of neutral color, ready for finish painting
and shipped in individual cartons. Cartons to be protected
from moisture during shipment and handling.
B... Door Accessories -
1) Louvers If Required - Manufacturer's standard sight -
proof design, 18 -ga. steel, minimum 65% free air area,
exterior side nonremovable, interior side moulding loose for
screw -attachment.
2) Glazing Beads - 18 - qa. steel, bevel profile with
max. 1/lb'" projection from door face, neatly coped and mitered
at corners, exterior side nonremovable, interior side screw -
attached,, provided with all glazed styles.
6. LINE. FRAMES
Prints'; cold -rolled steel, (KD for field assembly with
minimum?4 interlocking tabs each jamb to secure head or
a
s
s
e
mb
l
e
d
ire-welded, ground and finished smooth) mortised,
reinforceii.,.drilled and tapped for standard weight, prepara-
tions. ;Provide 1 welded -in floor anchor and 3 lock -in anchors
each jamb.'for field insertion, 24" o.c. max., and furnish
with rubber mutes, 3 for single doors, 3 for pairs.
Franes to be cleaned, phosphatized and primed with oven -
baked enamel of neutral color, ready for finish painting.
Series P418 frames, 18 -ga. for 1-3/4" doors, hinge
reinforcements 7 -ga. strike reinforcement 14 -ga. prepared
for 1-1/2.pr. or 2 pr. 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" hinges and ABA 1.151
4-7/B" strike.
7. PAWL -FIT FRAMES
Prime, cold -rolled steel, KD construction and formed with
additional return leg for installation into complete drywall
partitions; mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped for
' 15-2
' HOLLOW METAL DOORS S FRAMES
' standard weight, full mortise template hinges and template
strike. Provide countersunk screw hole at bottom of each jamb
face for anchorage into rough opening, and patented compression
lug assembly to close and lock corner miters. Furnish with
rubber mutes, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs.
' Frames to be cleaned, phosphatized and primed with oven -
baked enamel of neutral color, ready for finish painting.
Series PF418 frames, 18 -ga., for 1-3/4" doors, hinge
' reinforcements 7 -ga. strike reinforcement 14 -ga. prepared
for 1-1/2 pr. or 2 pr. 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" hinges and ASA 115.1,
4-7/8" strike.
' 8. LABELS
Nonremovable labels, o€ the hourly rating shown on door
' schedule, shall be permanently affixed to fire -rated doors
and frames,, showing compliance with Underwriters Laboratories
Requirements.
' 9. EXECUTION
A. Doors - Hang doors level and plumb, shimming as
'
necessary at hardware mortises to provide proper clearance
and smooth operation with no binding.
I
B. P -Line Frames - Set plumb and square, securely anchor
to floor construction and brace for erection of surrounding
walls. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to frame surfaces
Ito be concealed in masonry walls.
C. Pan -L -Fit Frames - Install according to manufacturer's
directions, after partition is completely erected, for snug
'fit over partition surfacing.
D. Labeled Frames - Install labeled frames in accordance
' with NFPA Publications No. 80 and No. 101, and all applicable
codes.
1
I
I
L
I
' 15-3
SECTION 16
STEEL FRAMING, SHEETROCK & TEXTONE GYPSUM PANELS
Ii. SCOPE
The work under this section includes the installation of
steel framing 1/2" vinyl clad Group I Textone Gypsum Panels,
all furring, fireproofing of structural steel, 1/2" sheetrock
backing for Textone, wall and backing which cover with ceramic
tile, all as shown on the plans or called for in the specifi-
' cations. This Contractor shall furnish all material, labor,
scaffolding and staging which will be required to execute this
work.
' 2. STEEL FRAMING
A. Scope - Where steel framed walls and partitions are
' specified or indicated on plans, Super -C Steel Studs, Lintels
and Runner -Tracks as manufactured by United States Steel shall
be installed.
' B. Materials -
1) All Super -C Steel Stud, Lintel and Runner Track
framing members shall be of type and size shown on the drawings
and specifications.
' 2) All Super -C structural framing members shall be manu-
factured from galvanized steel sheet or carbon -steel sheet with
corrosion -resistant paint coating. Field abrasions and welds
shall be touched up in the field after installation.
3) Galvanized steel used in the manufacture of Super -C
Steel Studs and Lintels shall conform to ASTM designation A446
grade C (minimum yield point 40,000 psi) with hot -dipped gal-
vanized coating conforming to ASTM designation A525.
4) Galvanized steel runner track shall be formed with
material meeting requirements of ASTM designation A446 grade A
(minimum yield point 33,000 psi) with hot -dipped galvanized
' coating conforming to ASTM designation A525.
5) Painted steel used in the manufacture of 14 gauge
Super -C Steel Studs and Lintels shall conform to ASTM designa-
' tiara A570 grade D (minimum yield point 40,000 psi) with one
coat of shop -applied red -lead or zinc -chromate primer or
prepainted with an equivalent coil coating.
' 6) Painted steel used in the manufacture of 16 gauge
and lighter Super -C Steel Studs and Lintels shall conform to
ASTM designation A611 grade D (minimum yield point 40,000 psi)
'
with one coat of shop -applied red -lead or zinc -chromate primer
or prepainted with an equivalent coil coating.
I
STEEL FRAMING, SHEETROCK &
TEXTONE GYPSUM PANELS
7) Painted steel runner track shall be formed with
material meeting requirements of ASTM designation A611 grade
C (minimum yield point 33,000 psi) with one coat of shop -
applied red -lead or zinc -chromate primer or prepainted with
an equivalent coil coating.
C. Assembly -
1) Panels and subassemblies may be prefabricated before
' installation using Super -C Steel Studs, Lintels and Runner
Track.
2) All framing members shall be cut squarely or at an
angle as required to fit squarely against abutting iaembers.
Members shall be held firmly in position until properly joined.
LI
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
L
C
nl
3) Joining of Super -C Structural Framing members shall
be made with self -drilling screws or welding. Wire tying of
members in structural applications shall not be permitted.
4) Attachments of collateral materials to steel members
shall be made with self -drilling screws or hardened screw -
shank nails. Metal lath may also be connected to steel by
staples or other fasteners as approved by applicable building
code.
5) Prefabricated panels and subassemblies shall be
square and braced to resist racking. Lifting of prefabricated
panels and subassemblies shall be done in such a manner so as
to prevent local distortion in any member.
n. Installation -
1) Top and bottom runner track shall be securely anchored
to ceiling or roof structure overhead and to floor structure
below.
2) Studs shall sit squarely in the top and bottom runner
track with firm abutment against track webs. Studs shall be
aligned or plumbed and securely fastened to the flanges of both
top and bottom runner track.
3) Studs shall be positioned in runner track so as to be
aligned directly below floor, roof or ceiling framing members
overhead. If unable to center and directly transfer loads from
floor or roof framing (such as at openings) to the studs,
lintels shall be provided.
4) Load -bearing walls with Super -C Steel Studs and runner
track shall be given continuous uniform base support underneath.
I
16-2
' STEEL FRAMING, SHEETROCK &
TEXTONE GYPSUM PANELS
5) Horizontal steel strapping, when required, shall be
attached to both sides of all studs before floor, roof or
ceiling structure overhead is installed. Ends of strapping
shall be securely anchored to suitable restraining columns or
walls.
6) Splices or butt welds shall be used at all butt
joints in the runner track. However, no splices shall be per-
mitted in track over lintels, diaphragm sheating or diagonal
bracing.
7) Splices in load -bearing studs shall not be permitted.
IS) Welded connections shall be made by resistance spot
or projecting welding, fillet welding, or plug welding, and
shall be done in accordance with the latest recommended prose-
' dures and practices of the American Welding Society.
3. SHEETROCK
' All steel framed walls where furring is required or where
vinyl -coated sheetrock or ceramic tile is called for in finish
schedule, shall be finished with U.S.G. 1/2" sheetrock in full-
' height lengths with long edges at right angles to the framing
members. All ends shall be supported on framing members and
joints shall be staggered. Joints on opposite sides of parti-
' tions shall not fall on same stud. Use screws for steel stud
application spaced not less than 3/8" from edges and ends of
boards and shall be spaced 8" apart. Screws to be driven home
with heads slightly below the surface. Screw application as
'
specified. by manufacturer shall be used.
Where-sheetrock is exposed, fill recess between boards
' with cement into which bed perf-a-tape, smooth down with
sheetrock knife. Apply the second and third coat of cement
in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
' Al3c:Screw depressions shall receive at least two coats
of cement, leaving them even with the surface of the board.
' Sand where necessary to leave all joints and screw spots
flush and smooth. Apply a fine spray texture to all finished
surfaces, leaving ready for decoration.
' 4. COLUMN FIREPROOFING
Drywall system for column fireproofing shall consist of
' 2 layers of Fire -Code "C" gypsum panels screw -attached to
1-5/8" steel studs of column corners, meeting U.L. Design X518
for 2 -hour protection.
' 5. FURRING CHANNELS
Install gird of 1-1/2" channel runners at 16" o.c. suspended
from steel roof joists for attachment of furring.
16-3
STEEL FRAMING, SnEF.TROCK &
TEXTONE GYPSUM PANELS
6. TEXTONE GYPSUM PANELS
A. General -
1) Scope - All walls as called for in finish schedule
shall be covered with Textone Vinyl Panels, manufactured by
United States Gypsum Company. Installation of Textone Vinyl
Panels shall be by workmen experienced in this trade.
2) Delivery and Storage of Materials - All materials
shall be delivered in their original, unopened packages and
stored in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage
and exposure to the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials
shall be removed from the premises.
' 3) Environmental Conditions - In cold weather the build-
ing shall be heated and ventilated during application of gypsum
vinyl panels to maintain temperature and ventilation consistent
t with good working conditions for finish work.
B. Products -
' 1) Gypsum Vinyl Panels - Textone, 6 mil vinyl, classic
eased edge Group I Linen or woodgrain, 1/2" thick, 4' wide,
full height where possible, otherwise 10 ft. lengths.
' 2) Moldings and Trim - Textone Moldings VP1 Series to
match with Textone Panels.
' 3) Adhesives - Durabond 200 and Durabond Joint Compound -
Taping.
' 4) Fasteners -
a) Matching color nails 1-3/8" or 1, USG Type S
' Screws.
b) Durabond Vinyl Foam Tape shall be used, to
' eliminate mechanical fasteners or temporary
bracing and for temporary attachment of
adhesively applied panels until adhesive
attains maximum bonding strength.
' C. Execution -
' 1) Textone Gypsum Panels - steel studs - Apply 8" long
strip of vinyl foam tape to face of each stud, positioned at
midpoint of studs up to 8' long, at third -points on studs up
to 12" long and quarter -points on studs over 12'. Where no
'
mechanical fasteners are to be used at top or bottom of stud#
apply an 8" long strip of tape. Apply a continuous 3/8" bead
of Durabond 200 to the entire face of studs between vinyl foam
' tape. Immediately apply Textone Panels vertically and apply
sufficient pressure to insure complete contact with both the
tape and adhesive.
16-4
I
SECTION 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1l
I
FINISH HARDWARE
1. SCOPE OF WORK
A. Extent - The work required under this Section consists
of all finishing hardware and related items necessary to com-
plete the work indicated on drawings and described in the
Specifications.
B. Bidding Documents - Refer to General Conditions which
are applicable to this Section and shall form a part of the
contract.
2. SUBSTITUTIONS
The, materials or products specified herein and indicated
on drawa by trade name, manufacturer 's name or catalog ,;;,
number s all be provided as specified. Substitutions will not.
be permitted, except as described in General Conditions.
3. AccE! : BLE MANUFACTURERS
Except as otherwise specified herein or specifically
approved: by the Architect, the following shall be the products
of the listed manufacturers, subject to compliance with Speci-
fication requirements:
1) Russwin - A Division of Emhart Corporation
2) Yale and Towne Manufacturing Company
3). Sargent and Company
4)•; Schlage Lock Company
5) P & F Corbin - Division of American Hardware
Corporation
4. KEYING
A. All locks to. be Master Keyed.
1) Furnish three (3) Change Keys each lock.
5. SCHEDULE
Heading No. 1
1 Pair Double
1 Pair Double
1 Pair Double
1 Pair Double
I Single Door
1 Single Door
Doors 1 Exterior to Entrance 101
Doors 1 Exterior to Entrance 102
Doors 1 Exterior to Entrance 103
Doors I Exterior to Entrance 104
2 Exterior from 105
2 Exterior from 120
I
17-1
C
FINISH HARDWARE
L
C
C
I
I
to re
6 pair Cylinders 20-001 x 108
Balance of hardware by door supplier
Heading No. 2
I Single Door 4A Exterior from 108
I Single Door 4A Exterior from 109
1 Single Door 4A Exterior from 118
1 Single Door 4A Exterior from 128
1 Single Door 4A Exterior from 143
3-0 x 7-10 1-3/4 MD flush x 6-3/4 MF
Schlage
LHR
RHR
LHR
LHR
LHR
Ii Single Door 5A Exterior from 135 RHR
1 Single Door 5A Exterior from 138 LHR
1 Single Door SA Exterior from 143 LHR
I
C
I
C
C
[H
I
I
Li
I
I
3-0 x 7-10 1-3/4 MD 2/6x36 lite x 6-3/4 MF
16 pair Hinges 450 TBB x PC x NRP
8 each Locksets A52PD Lara 613 x
11-051 x 10-025
8 each Closers EB1245-P9
'8•each Thresholds A208 x 36"
8 sets Weatherstrip A173 36 x 94
Heading No. 3
1 Single Door 3A Exterior from 136
1 Single Door 3A Exterior from 144
4-0 x 7-10 1-3/4 MD flush x 6-3/4 MF
4 pair
2 each
11-OI
• 3 each
• 2 each
2 sets
Butts 450 TBB x PC x NRP
Locksets A52PD Lara 613 x
it x 10-025
Closers E01245 P9
Thresholds A208 x 48"
Weatherstrip A173 48 x 94
Schlage
Sargent
Southern Metal
Southern Metal
Schlage
Sargent
Southern Metal
Southern Metal
• 1
Single
Door
6B
106
to
116
LH
1
single
Door
6B
105
to
125
LH
1
Single
Door
6B
137
to
143
RN
l
Single
Door
6B
107
to
108
LH
3-0 x 7-10 1-3/4 WD x 6-1/2 MF
8 pair Butts 450T x 10A
4 each Locksets A52PD Lara 613 x
11-051 x 10-025
Soss
Schlage
I 17-2
I
FINISH HARDWARE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Li
I
Heading No. 5
1.Single Door 10B 133 to 132 RB
1 Single Door 10B 135 to 132 LH
2-8 x 6-8 1-3/4 WD x 6-1/2 MF
3 pair Butts 450T x 10A Soss
2 each Locksets A52PD Lara 613 x
11-051 x 10-025 Schiage
Heading No. 6
1 Single Door 10B
1 Single Door 10B
1 Single Door 10B
1 Single Door 10B
ti, t' •. 2-8 x 6-8 1-3/4
'6 pair Butts 450T
4 each Locksets A
11-051 x 10-025
4 each Wall Stops
Heading No. 7
133 to 130
138 to 139
143 to 142
143 to 140
WD x 6-1/2 MF
x 10A
52PD Lara 613 x
406 BLOB
I Single Door 6B 105 to 131
1 Single Door 6B 129 to 133
1 Single Door 6B 129 to 135
1 Single Door 6B 106 to 119
3-9 x 7-10 1-3/4 WD x 6-1/2 MF
1 Single Door 7B 137 to 138
1 Single Door 7B 121 to 140
1 Single Door 7B 122 to 124
2�-8 x 7-10 1-3/4 WD x 6-1/2 HF
14 pair Butts 450T x 10A
7 each Locksets A52 PD Lara 613 x
11-051 x 10-025
7 each Wall Stops 406 B10B
Heading No. 8
1 Single Door 9C 115 to 109
3-0 x 7-10 1-3/4 WD x 6-1/2 MF B Label
2 pair Butts 450 TBB x 10A
1 each Locksets A52 PD Lara 613 x
11-096 x 10-025
1 each Closer EB 1234-0
LB
RH
RH
LH H.
Schiage.
Ives
j9
Lu
LH
LH
Soss
Sob lags
Ives
LH
Soss
Schiage
Sargent
17-3
I
FINISH HARDWARE
F'
C'
I
Li
I
C
I
I
11
I
H
I
F'
I
Heading No. 9
1 Single Door 7B 116 from 117
1 Single Door 7B 125 to 126
1 Single Door 7B 125 from 127
2-8x 7-10 1-3/4 WD x 6-1/2 MF
6 pair Butts 450T x 10A
3 each Passage Sets A105 Lara 613 x
11-020 x 10-025
3 each Wall Stops 406 BlOB
Heading No. 10
I Single Door 8B 116 from 118
1'Single Door 8B 140 from 141
2-6 x 7-10 1-3/4 WD x 6-1/2 MF
!pair Butts 450T x 10A
t2i:each Passage Sets A105 Lara 613 x
11-020 x 10-025
Reach sg No. 11
•1 Single Door 10B 131 to 133
l Single Door 108 135 to 133
2-8 x 6-8 1-3/4 WD x 6-1/2 MF
3 pair Butts 450T x 10A
2: each Passage Sets A105 Lara 613 x
11-020 x 10-025
2 each Wall Stops 406 BlOB
Heading No. 12
I Single Door lOB 138 to 143
2-8 x 6-8 1-3/4
1 Single Door 11B
2-6 x6-8 1-3/4
3 pair Butts 450T
2 each Passage Se
11-020 x 10-025
WD x 6-1/2 MF
134 to 133
WD x 6-1/2 MF
x 10A
is A105 Lara 613 x
Schlage
Ives
LHR
LHR
• ,�
Y i
�
Soss1
,.
;
'\.
I.
Schta#e
LU
RH
Soss
Schlage
Ives
LH
RH
Soss
Schiage
I
17-4
I
SECTION 18
I
I
I
I
C
I
L
C'
I
C
C
I
I
I
[1
GLASS SPECIFICATIONS
1. SCOPE OF WORK
A. Extent - The work required under this section consists
of 1/2" thick plastic panels and installation in security wall
and all glass and related items necessary to complete the work
indicated on drawings and described in Specifications. See
Section 13 where installation of glass is specified.
B.•.
List of Items Included - Without restricting the
volume orgenerality
of the above "Extent", the work to be per-
formed fader this section shall include, but is not limited to,
the following:
l).=,'l-1/16"
Tempered Solarcool Twindow units for
curtainwall. .
2)v
Tempered 1/4" Solarcool glass for entrances and
.'
interior curtainwall.
3) •1/2"
thick Plexiglas and glazing of security
..wall.
C.
Work Not Included - The following related items. of_
glass work are included in other sections of these specifica-
tions:
1)':x,.'Glasa
in fire equipment cabinets, directories,
I.'
etc.
Glass in pre-gla2ed items such as wood doors,
etc.
3)s
Beads and gaskets for securing glass in place.
See Sections 12 and 13, Entrances and Curtainwall..
D.:
Bidding Documents —Refer to General Conditions which
are applicable to this section and shall form a part of the
contract.:.
2. SUBSTITUTIONS
A.. The materials or products specified herein and indi-
cated 6W drawings by trade name, manufacturer's name or catalog
number Shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will not
be permitted,. except as described in the General Conditions.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Except as otherwise speci-
fied herein or specifically approved by the Architect in
writing, all glass and glazing materials shall be products of
one or more of the following manufacturers, subject to compliance
with specification requirements:
I•) Libbey-Owens-Ford Glass Company
2) Pittsburgh Plate Glass Company
I
18-1
I
GLASS SPECIFICATIONS
3. COMPLIANCE WITH INDUSTRY AND STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Any material or operation specified by reference to the
' published specifications of a manufacturer or to a published
standard, shall comply with the requirements of the current
specification or standard listed. In case of a conflict
' between the referenced specification and the project specifi-
cations, the project specifications shall govern, unless
written approval is obtained from the Architect.
' 40 TYPE AND QUALITY OF GLASS
A. General Requirements for All Glass - Except as herein-
1 after specified under specific glass types, all glass shall
comply with requirements o€ Federal Specifications DD -G -451A,
as applicable to the type specified.
B. Tempered Glass
1) For curtainwall, 1-1/16" tempered Solarcool Twindow
' Units.
2) For exterior aluminum entrances and sidelights and
' for interior curtainwall shall be 1/4" thick "Herculite"
Solarbronze Glass.
C. For Security Wall -,1/2" clear Plexiglas plastic
' sheets.
S. MATERIALS FOR GLAZING
Elastic Glazing Compound - Similar to "Plasti-Glaze"
as manufactured by Curtis Products, Inc. of Chicago, Illinois.
' in addition, compound used for back bedding and face glazing
shall conform to Interim Federal Specification TT -G -00410O
and compound used for channel or stop bead glazing shall con-
form to Federal Specification TT -P -781A, Type 1. Compound used
' for glazing in aluminum frames shall be colored to harmonize
with the frames and also be of type and composition that will
not require any paint or other coating to protect it. Use
elastic glazing compound for glazing in metal and frames of
security wall and entrances as hereinafter specified.
' 6. MANUFACTURER'S LABELS
Labels showing glass manufacturer's identity, type of
glass, thickness, and quality will be required on each piece
' of glass. Labels must remain on glass until it has been set
and inspected. In addition to manufacturer's labels, wire
glass must comply with requirements of the Underwriter's
' Laboratories, Inc. When glass is not cut to size by the
manufacturer, and is furnished unlabeled as "stock to cut",
the Contractor shall submit an affidavit, or other satisfactory
evidence, stating the quality, thickness, type and manufacturer
'
of the glass furnished. All putty and glazing compounds shall
arrive at the project site in labeled containers which have not
been opened.
' 18-2
I
GLASS SPECIFICATIONS
' 7. SAMPLES
If required, submit samples of each type of glass speci-
' Pied and glazing materials and accessories to Architect for
approval.
' 8. SIZES, DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A..' the sizes of glass indicated on drawings are approxi-
mate only; determine the actual sizes required by measuring.
' frames to receive the glass at the project site, or from
guaranteed dimensions provided by the frame supplier. Dimen
sions for glass and glass holdings surrounds shall be
coordinated to provide the following minimum clearances:
1). At perimeter edge of glass on all four sides provide:.
' clearance equal to glass thickness for single glass and 1/4•
.to
5/16 inch'.for insulating glass.
2) ''-:The sealer space between face of glass and fixed or
' applied" glazing stops, both indoors and outdoors, shall be not
less than 1/16 inch plus glass and sash tolerance, but 1/8
inch minimum.
B*.,.,,No attempt shall be made to change the size of heat
• strengthened,, tempered or insulating glass units after they
leave the:.:factory. All heat absorbing glass must be clean
cut. Nipping to remove flares or to reduce oversized dimen-
sions of zany type of glass will not be permitted.
' C. Deliver glass to site in suitable containers that
will protect glass from the weather and from breakage.
fully stare, material as directed in a safe place where breakage
'can be reduced to a minimum. Deliver sufficient glass to . 1
allow for normal breakage.
' 9. INSTALLATION OF GLASS
A. General Requirements for Plexiglas and 1/4" Glass
in Metal Frame - Apply putty or glazing compound uniformly
' with accurately formed corners and bevels. Remove excess
compound from glass and sash. Use only recommended thinners,
cleaners and solvents. Do not cut or dilute putty, glazing
' compounds or sealants without approval from Architect. Make
good contact with glass and frame when glazing and facing off.
Do not set glass in wood or steel frames until frames have been
' primed and paint is dry. Do not apply any compound or sealant
at temperatures lower than 400 F. or on a damp, dirty or dusty
surface,. After glazing, doors and ventilators in sash shall be
fixed so they cannot be operated until compound has set. All
' putty, compounds and sealants shall be removed from patterned
glass and other glass having a rough finish before it hardens.
I
' 18-3
' GLASS SPECIFICATIONS
Ii) Where a combination of sealing materials are required
for glazing in the same frame, the manufacturer must certify
that all the glazing materials furnished are compatible with
' each other and also compatible with the material used for setting
blocks and spacer shims.
' 2) Where setting blocks and spacer shims are required to
be set into a glazing compound or sealant, they may be buttered
with the compound or sealant, placed in position and allowed to
firmly set prior to installation of glass.
' B. Sash and Frame Preparation and Acceptance - Inspect
all frames and surrounds to be glazed under this section and
notify the Architect of any defects, improper materials or
workmanship or other conditions which will affect satisfactory
installation of glass. Do not proceed with glazing until such
conditions have been corrected. Absence of notification, or
the beginning of glazing will indicate acceptance of all pre-
viously placed related work executed by other trades; later
claims of defects in such work will not relieve the glazier
' from responsibility to produce satisfactory work. The follow-
ing work will be executed by other trades but before starting
glazing work, the glazier shall verify compliance with the
' requirements listed.
1) That frames are firmly anchored in proper position,
plumb and square within 1/8" of nominal dimensions on approved
shop drawings.
2) That all rivet, screw, bolt or nail heads, welding
fillets and other projections are removed from glazing rabbets
to provide the specified clearance.
3) That all corners and fabrication intersections are
sealed and frames are weather tight.
4) That rabbets at sills weep to outside and all rabbets
are of sufficient depth and width to receive the glass and
provide the required overlap of the glass.
C. Preparation of Glass and Rabbets - Clean the sealing
surfaces at perimeter of glass and the sealing surfaces of
rabbets and stop beads before applying any glazing compound,
tape, sealant or gaskets. use only the approved solvents and
cleaning agents recommended by the compound manufacturer.
D. Positioning Glass - Center in glazing rabbet to main-
' tain ceentereddpositionces at perimeter on all four of glass in rabbet and provide d the Niain-
required sealer thickness 1/8" minimum on both sides of glass.
' Whenever glass dimensions are larger than 50 united inches,
provide setting blocks at the sill and spacer shims on all
four sides; locate setting blocks one -quarter way in from each
end of glass.
' 18-4
' GLASS SPECIFICATIONS
' E. Stop Bead Glazing - Using Glazing Compound - Except
where other materials or methods are specified hereinafter, use
putty for bedding glass in wood frames and use elastic glazing
compound for bedding glass in metal frames. Apply as follows:
1) Apply ample back putty or compound to rabbet so that
' it will ooze out when pressing glass into position and com-
pletely cover glass in rabbet. Place setting blocks and
spacer shims as required. Press glass into position.
' 2) Secure glass in place by the application of stop
beads. Bed stop beads against glass and bottom of rabbet
with compound leaving proper thickness between glass and stop
' beads. Secure stop beads in place with suitable fastenings.
Strip surplus compound or putty from both sides of glass and
tool at a slight angle to shed water and provide clean sight
' lines.
10. REPLACEMENTS AND CLEANING
' .At completion of work, all glass shall be free from cracks
and other defects not allowed by the Specifications. Any
defective glass that may appear before acceptance, or within
the 1 -year warranty period that is a direct result of manufactur-
ing, transporting or the performance of the Contractor, shall
be removed and replaced with new glass without cost to the
' Owner. Remove from site all boxes, crates, containers and
other debris used for glazing operations. The washing of
glass is included under another section of these Specifications.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 18-5
I
SECTION 19
I
I
I
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
1. SCOPE
A. Extent - The work required under this section consists
of all acoustical treatment and related items necessary to com-
plete the work indicated on the drawings and described in the
specifications.
B. List of Items Included - Without restricting the
or volume generality of the above "Extent", the work to be
performed under this section shall include, but is not limited
to, the following:
1) Suspension systems for acoustical tile ceilings.
2) Acoustical tile ceilings.
3) Installation of all items listed herein.
2. SUBSTITUTIONS
The materials or products specified herein and indicated
on the drawings by trade name, manufacturers name or catalog
number shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will not
be permitted, except as described in General Conditions.
3. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Except as otherwise specified herein or specifically
approved by the Architect in writing, all acoustical treatment
materials shall be products of one or more of the following
manufacturers, subject to compliance with specification require-
ments:
• Celotex-Protectone
Armstrong -Fireguard
U.S. Gypsum-Auratone
4. SHOP DRAWINGS
' Submit five. (5) copies of shop drawings to Architect for
approval of all items of acoustical treatment and accessories
where so required herein. Submit drawings in accordance with
' requirements described in the General Conditions. Obtain appro-
val of drawings prior to proceeding with fabrication.
Shop drawings shall indicate type of material, layout and
' pattern of acoustical units, details of suspension system,
details at change of level, details at ceiling penetration,
details of fire -rated acoustical treatment, access door, special
edge treatment, and all necessary connections to work of other
trades.
I
' 19-1
I
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
5. SAMPLES (AND MANUFACTURER`S DATE)
Prior to fabrication or delivery, submit samples of the
following materials to Architect for approval;
1) Acoustical tile
2) Suspension System
3) Exposed Suspension Members
6. COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATIONS.
A. Any materials or operations specified by reference
to the published specifications of a manufacturer, American
Socisy for Testing and Materials CAST!'!), National Bureau of
Standards (NBS), Acoustical Materials Association (AMA),
Pederal.Specifications (FS) or other published standards
shall comply with the requirements of the standard listed.
l). :::m case of conflict between the referenced specifica-
tions or standards, the reference�iaving the more stringent'..,.
requirements shall govern.
2) In case of conflict amang the referenced specifica
tions or standards, the reference having the more stringent,.:..
requirements shall govern.
'• 3 f::The Contractor, if required, shall furnish an affi
davit Pram the manufacturer certifying that the materials or
products"delivered to the project meet the requirements speci-
fied.However, such certification shall not relieve the
Contractor from the responsibility of complying with any added
requirements specified herein.
7. MATERIALS
A. -General Notes -
' 1)Acoustical units shall be delivered to project site
in manufacturer°s original packages with seals unbroken, and
with manufacturer °s name and contents legibly marked theregn.
2) Texture of finished material shall match approved
samples.
B. Rough Suspension of Materials -
1) Metal channel runners; 1-1/2W, 475 lbs. per thousand
lineal feet and 3/4W, 300 lbs. per thousand lineal feet, cold -
rolled painted channels.
2) Hanger Wire - No. S galvanized soft -annealed steel.
I
I
r A
I
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
C. Fire -Rated Ceilings -
1) Acoustical units and suspension systems shall provide
' ceiling fire resistance for two hour fire resistance roof -
ceiling assemblies as listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
Guide No. 40 U 1811 for roof and ceiling assemblies construction.
U.L. design shall be No. G256 Assembly as manufactured by
'Armstrong.
rn
I
I
I
I
L
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
2) . Acoustical lay -in panel shall be Travertone Fireguard
as required for two hour fire resistance rating.
a) Panel shall have minimum thickness of 3/4".
b) Panel shall be 24 x 24 inch with Tegular
edges.
c) Panel surface shall be Sanserra design with
white factory applied finish of vinyl -latex
paint.
3)!, .Suspension system for lay -in panels shall be Armstrong's
ATS System with white enameled exposed flanges.
4) Acoustical units shall conform to F.S. SS -S -118A.
5): Acoustical units and suspension system shall have
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Label Service.
6)r. Acoustical units shall have minimum sound absorption.
coefficients at 250 cycles per sound of .40 and a minimum
Noise Reduction Coefficient Range of .65 - .70.
7) Acoustical units shall have AMA Light Reflectance
Classification LR-3.
1) System shall be Acoustical Fireguard Exposed grid
as manufactured by Armstrong.
2) Main runners shall be 1-1/2" width.
3) Space to receive acoustical tile shall be dry and
with no more dampening materials to be installed.
4) Application of acoustical tile shall be done by the
manufacturer or his authorized applicator# and in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's specifications except as
modified herein.
5) Furnish splices, springs, anchoring, clips and other
accessories required for and designed for this system.
6) Exposed flanges of perimeter mouldings and suspension
members shall be factory finished gloss white enamel.
H
19-3
I
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
' 8. INSTALLATION
A. General Notes -
' 1) Space to receive acoustical tile shall be satisfac-
torily closed and protected against the weather before
beginning work.
2) Maintain temperature of 50O F. or above while system
is being installed.
3) Space to receive acoustical tile shall be dry and with
no more dampening materials to be installed.
4) Application of acoustical tile shall be done by the
• manufacturer of his authorized applicator, and in strict accor-
dance with the manufacturer°s specifications except as modified
herein.
5) Install acoustical units in a true and even plane,
in straight line courses laid out symetrically about center
lines of ceiling or panel. Border tile shall not be less than
6" wide.
' 6) Fit border units neatly against vertical surfaces.
7). Seal joints in acoustical units. around pipes, ducts,
' and electrical outlets with caulking compound.
8) Install wall moulding at intersection of suspended
' ceiling and vertical surfaces. Apply continuous ribbon of
acoustical adhesive or caulking compound on vertical web
before attaching to vertical surface with mechanical fastener.
I
9) Keep finished surface of acoustical units free of
soiling.
' B. Location -
1) Materials, supporting systems, patterns, arrangements
and colors shall be as detailed, scheduled or indicated on
drawings.
C. Primary Channels -
' 1) Install hanger wires securely to structure at 4 ft.
on center, maximum both ways.
' 2) Install metal channel by saddle tieing hanger wire, to
a leveling tolerance of 1/8" in 12 feet each way.
' D. Exposed Suspension System -
1) Install in strict accordance with manufacturer °s
instructions.
19-4
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
2) Install wall moulding to a true level.
3) Space main runners at 48" on centers.
4) Space cross tees at 24" on centers in line and 12"
o.c. at light fixtures. See Electrical Lighting Plan.
9. CLEARING
A. Following installation, clean soiled or discolored
surfaces- of units.
Be- Remove and replace units which are damaged or
improperly installed.
19-5
I
SECTION 20
L
L
I
I
I
BUILDING SPECIALTIES
1. SCOPE. OF WORK
A. Extent - The work required under this section con-
sists of all building specialties complete with accessories
and related items to complete the work indicated on drawings
and described in the specifications.
B. List of Items Included - Without restricting the.
volume or -generality of the above "Extent", the work to be
performei under this section shall include, but is not limited
to, the -followings
1) Bronze tablet and letters
2) Entrance mats
• 3)- °'toilet Room Accessories
4). Flagpole
• 5) Fountains
• 6) vinyl letters
7)-" Plastic skylight
8) Telephone booths
9), Toilet partitions
C. Bidding Documents - Refer to General Conditions which
are applicable to this section and shall form a part of the
contract°,
2. SUBSTITUTIONS
the materials or products specified herein and indicated'
on drawings; by trade name, manufacturer's name or catalog
number sba li be provided as specified. Substitutions will not
be permitted,. except as described in General Conditions.
I3. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Except as otherwise specified herein or specifically
t approve& by. the Architect in writing, all materials shall be
the productsrof the manufacturers listed.
' 4. i3tio `1TRAWINGS
A. Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings of Building
' Specialties'► id related items to Architect for approval.
Submit drawings in accorr?ance with requirements described in
General Conditions. Obtain approval of drawings prior to pro-
' ceeding with fabrication.
' 20-1
' BUILDING SPECIALTIES
B. Shop drawings shall indicate plans, elevations,
details of'construction, sizes of openings and parts, anchor-
ing details, leveling details, brand name of item to be used,
' metal tti'idkness, protective coatings, finishes, colors,
hardware°slid accessories, fittings and fastenings, field work
required; to install, and necessary coordination with work of
• other ttades.
S. SAMPLES
Sutirgit representative samples to the Architect for agpra-
val of aiiy.<'manufacturer's material other than acceptable
manufactYire`rs listed. Approval must be obtained prior to
' fabricat 6W.,,
tn
6. MATE1tIALS, AND ERECTION
1 Bronze Plaque and Letters - Furnish and install cast
bronze plaque and letter as manufactured by Jas. H. Mathews
Co., Sedrd$ Arkansas. The plaque and letters shall be size.
as showi'''oh drawings, with Helvetica Regular letters having a-.
polishedf.;aee. Tablet shall have single line border, with
background of, leatherette texture. Border shall be polished.
'• Plaque and' letters shall have a spray -on lacquer finish.
Furnish 'full:'scale shop drawings of "rub" for approval prior
to casting:; Plaque shall be installed by a concealed method:
of fastening threaded rods mounted on back of tablet set in
grout. PIQque shall be as detailed on plans. Letters shall
have projected mount PM -2.
B. Toilet Room Accessories -
1) Mirror and Towel Units - Provide and install over.
each lavatory one Bobrick B-25 Soap Dispenser and one 24" x 36"
mirror With:stainless steel frame, Bobrick B-290. In space 122
and 123'`a'bobrick B-39142 Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle.
2) Toilet Stall Grab Rail - Provide type "$" toilet
grab rai],s;'series 3100 stainless steel tubing with #4 satin
finish eidere indicated on plans. Tamper proof mountings, for:
'
masonry 'wail or floor mounting as shown. Grab rails shall
projecte5"."from side walls and be 48" in length. Height of
installation shall be as per Architect's instructions. Grab
• rails a '.Zl be manufactured by Accessory Specialties, Inc..,
42-14 Astoria Boulevard, Long Island City, New York.
Co (Plastic Skylight -. Structural pyramid skylight
shall be- Model 161, double glazed, 14° x 14', as manufactured
by Plasteao, Inc., Houston, Texas. Manufacturer shall furnish
(1) complete K -D structural framing consisting of curb rail,
compresh16n ring, hip and side rafters of 6063 -TS mill finish
extruded:th minum for field assembly by others to support a
20-2
I
BUILDING SPECIALTIES
C'
LI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Li
Li
C
H
live load of 25 psf. (2) eight triangular preglazed units con-
sisting of #2404 Bronze-CCI formed acrylic panel mounted in a
6063 -TS mill finish extruded aluminum frame. Inner glazing
shall be of colorless acrylic. Curbs shall be constructed by
others in accordance with manufacturer's specification as to
dimension and curb thickness. Curbs to be flashed by others.
Assembled skylight shall have an integral system of condensa-
tion gutters with drainage to exterior.
D. Toilet Partitions -
1) General - Toilet compartments shall be Imperial Type
as manufactured by Global Steel Products, Deer Park, New York.
2) Doors - Shall be 1" thick constructed of 2 sheets
of 22 gauge bonderized galvanized steel formed and cemented
under pressure to a hexagonal honeycomb core. Face plates of
doors shall be welded together at intervals around the entire.
perimeter, to insure a rigid one-piece unit which will remain
flat despite extreme torsional stress. All edges shall be
bound with a 20 gauge interlocking molding; corners shall be:
welded and ground smooth. Doors shall have suitable internal
reinforcement to accommodate hardware items.
3). Panels - Shall be 1" thick constructed of 2 sheets.
of 20 gauge bonderized galvanized steel formed and cemented
to a honeycomb core under pressure. Partitions shall have a
20 gauge interlocking molding on all sides; corners shall be
welded and ground smooth.
4) Pilasters - To be 1-1/4" thick - constructed of 2
sheets of 16 gauge bonderized galvanized steel. Face plates
of all pilasters shall le formed and cemented under pressure
to a honeycomb core and shall be welded together at intervals
around the entire perimeter to insure a rigid integral unit,
which will withstand the severest abuse.
Edges shall be interlocked with an 18 gauge oval
shaped molding; corners shall be welded and ground smooth.
All pilasters shall have a 3" high polished stainless steel
plinth (18-8 type 301 stainless). Pilasters shall be fastened
to structural members with 3/8" cadmium plated studs, washers
and nuts as required. Structural members will be supplied and
drilled by others in accordance with layout supplied by Global.
5) Hardware - Each compartment is to be complete with
all hardware, door hinges, latch stop and keeper, coat hook and
all necessary fittings and fastenings for a complete installation.
Doors shall be hung on concealed universal type gravity hinges.
Lower hinge recessed in door shall operate on opposing DuPont
Zytel nylon cams. Upper hinge shall operate in a nylon bushing
on a stainless steel pin anchored above and below the hinge.
bracket. Concealed latch with emergency opening slot is
standard. Other types of latches available. All hardware is
Zamac chrome plated as standard. Provide paper holder for
each compartment.
20-3
BUILDING SPECIALTIES
6). Fittings and Fastenings - Wall fittings to be Zamac
chrome plated. Brass, chrome plated, or anodized aluminum
also available. Zamac hinge brackets, strike and keeper will
' be thru-bolted with -six bolts having theft -proof heads* All
other hardware items to have appropriate screws. All
fastenings to have a highly polished chrome finish.
71 Finishes - Shall be baked enamel.
IS) Wall -flung Urinal Screens - Panels shall be 1-1/4"
thick made of 2 sheets 20 gauge bonderized galvanized steel.
Face plates of panel shall have formed edges sealed with a
continuous oval steel locking strip, mitered, welded and
' ground smooth at corners. Panel shall be attached to wall
with heavy-duty diecast chrome wing bracket (No. 185) and
.standard wall bracket.
' 2. Floor Mats - Furnish and install in Spaces 101,
102, 103 and 104, in sizes and quantities indicated on draw-
ings C/S Carpet Pedimat as manufactured by Construction
Specialties, Inc., Muncy, Pa.; San Mateos, Calif.
Pedimat surface shall be Milstar carpet - 100%
Dupont Antron Nylon with a pile height of 1/4" and a yarn
weight of 28 oz./sq. yd. Such carpet shall be unitary fusion
bonded for maximum durability and to eliminate fraying, delamina-
' tion or moisture penetration of the carpet treads* Carpet
color shall be selected from one of sixteen standard tweeds
offered by manufacturer. Carpet tread shall be mechanically
locked into tread rails and fastened at each end to prevent
movement or slippage. Tread rails shall be continuously locked
in a ball -socket arrangement to provide easy roll -back for
cleaning beneath. Maximum spacing between edges of tread rail
is to be 3/16" to prevent penetration of the smallest of women's
heels.
I. F. Flagpole
1) Provide and erect where shown on plan, American con
tapered, aluminum ground set flagpole complete with all standard
' fittings'a.de by American Flagpole, East Setauket, New York.
Flagpole exposed height shall be 25 feet; overall height shall
be 27-1/2 feet; butt O.D. shall be 5-I/2"; top O.D. shall be
' 3-1/2®, with tapered section 11 feet long. Flagpole and all
component. accessories to receive standard Amtone finish*
2),,?• Cone tapered (6063T6 aluminum, tubin size) or .
(6063T66`:aiuminwn, extra heavy pipe size) shall be of seamless
construction throughout its entire length. Wall thickness of
straight section shall be .188 inches; of tapered section, *188
inches. Flagpole shall be installed in foundation as detailed*
I
20-4
I
I
BUILDING SPECIALTIES
I
I
I
I
I
[l
LI
I
I
I
I
3) Flagpole to be shipped in one section unless freight
costs are prohibitive# in which case shipment to be made in
two sections with American's precision field splicing sleeve,
which requires neither field welding nor tension rod. Pole
to be packed in recommended fashion to assure maximum protec-
tion during transit.
G. Telephone Booths - Provide and install where shown
on plans six (6) surface mounted, Model #S1331 indoor -acoustical
telephone booths as manufactured by the Sherron Division of
Redy-Ref Pressed & Welded, Inc. of Long Island City, New York.
Booths to be 26" x 37" x 15-1/2 of #4 finish, 16 gauge stain-
less steel with stainless steel acoustical interior.
H.: Signage - Provide and install on graphic band the
following ;signage of 5° high white vinyl, prespaced, press -
on letters in Helvetica regular style, similar to "Spectralegends"
as manufactured by Architectural Signing, Inc. of Marina Del
Ray, California. The signage shall be as follows:
GATE 1
GATE 2
SKYWAYS
JF'iRONTIER
(2)
CAR RENTALS
t2)
BAGGAGE CLAIM
(2),
Er4 PHONES
AIRLINES
.TO PLANES
' K.C1Ri\bIYV
RESTAURANT
(2'), REST ROOMS
EXIT
(4). A2000 ARROWS
II. :Fountain - Furnish and install in each fountain in
entrance court the following fountain components as manufactured
by Kim Lighting & Manufacturing Co., Inc. of El Monte, Califor-
• nia:
• One N-80 Jet Cluster 6' high Display Nozzle
One KSP-40 Bronze Submersible Pump
Complete piping as required
I
I
I
I
20-5
I
SECTION 21
' RESILIENT FLOOR COVERING, BASE AND CARPET
I. SCOPE
IA. Extent - The work required under this section.con-
sists of all floor coverings and base and related items
necessary to complete the work indicated on drawings and des-
cribed in the specifications.
1 Be. List of Items Included - Without restricting the
volume or -:generality of the above °Extent", the work to be
' performed under this section shall include, but is not limited
• to, the following:
1) Vinyl -asbestos tile
2) Vinyl or rubber cove base
3) Carpets
' C. Bidding Documents - Refer to General Conditions"
which are applicable to this section and shall form a part of
the contract.
' 2. SUBSTITUTIONS
The materials or products specified herein and indicated
'
on drawings by trade name, manufacturer's name or catalog
number shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will not
be permitted except as described in General Conditions.
' 3. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
' Except as otherwise specified herein or specifically
approved by the architect in writing, the following shall be
the products of the following manufacturers, subject to coin-
' pliance with specification requirements:
1) Armstrong
2) GAF
' 4. COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATIONS
A. ;.,,Any •materials or operation specified by reference to
the published specifications of a manufaoturer, Federal Speci-
fications (F.S.), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)s
or other published standards, shall comply with the requirements
' of the standard listed.
• 1) In case of conflict between the referenced specifi-
' cation and the project specifications, the project specifications
shall govern.
' 2) In case of conflict among the referenced specifications
or standards, the one having tiffliWre stringent requirements
shall govern.
' 21^ 1
' RESILIENT FLOOR COVERING,
• BASE ANII °CARPET
The Contractor, if required, shall furnish an affi'
davit from the manufacturer certifying that the materials or
products delivered to the project meet the requirements speci-
fied. However, such certification shall not relieve the
Contractor from the responsibility of complying with any added
' requirements specified herein.
5. MATERIALS
A. Resilient Floor & Base
1) General Requirements - Only first -quality resilient
' flooring materials applied in strict accordance with the manu-
facturer.s current specifications shall be furnished.
I. Adhesives and other application material shall be
those as recommended specifically by the manufacturer of the
material specified.
I
I
I
I
[1
I
I
!1
I
I
Products other than those listed below shall be bid
only if approved in writing by the Architect not later than
ten days prior to bid opening. Later substitutions will not
be considered.
During the normal heating season, as determined by
the Architect, the General. Contractor shall provide a constant
temperature of at least 70O F. 48 hours prior to installation,
during installation, and 48 hours after installation. A mini-
mum temperature of 55O F. shall be maintained thereafter. All
surfaces to receive resilient flooring finishes shall be dry,
clean and smooth. Concrete subfloor tolerances shall not be
over 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. Conventional concrete
curing methods shall be used; i.e., felt paper, straw, plastic
sheeting, water.
Subcontractor shall indicate adverse conditions of any
type by letter. to the General Contractor with copy to the
Architect. Any work start shall indicate acceptance by the
subcontractor.
Before installation is initiated, properly identified
•samples shall be submitted by the subcontractor to the General
Contractor and approved by the Architect. Samples shall be
marked with brand, size, gauge, and color.
2) Cleaning and Waxing - It shall be the responsibility
of the General Contractor to damp mop•,and apply a light coat of
floor polish immediately after installation of the floor, taking
care not to flood the floor. Newly installed resilient floors
shall not be scrubbed or thoroughly cleaned until 4 to 5 days
after installation to allow adhesive to set properly.
I
21-2
RESILIENTFLOOR COVERING,
BASE AND CARPET
The floor shall be protected with undyed, untreated
' building paper or traffic control as necessary.• immediately
prior to final inspection (not less than 4 to 5 days after
installation) clean and wax floors as follows:
' Clean with Armstrong S-321 Spruce -Up, rinse, dry
thoroughly, and apply one or two coats of Armstrong S-380•
Super Durelle Floor Finish or S-360 Mirasheen Vinyl Floor
' Polish:
3) Vinyl -Asbestos Flooring - Shall be Armstrong "Exelon"
3/32" thick, 12" x 12" size. Colors shall be selected from
current range manufactured by Armstrong.
4) Vinyl Cove Base - Floor as called for in Fbish
Schedule, shall be finished with .080" gauge Vinyl Cove Base.
4" or 6". high with preformed internal and external corner pieces
as marketed by Armstrong. Colors shall be from the range
' currently available from Armstrong. Cove base shall be applied
only with adhesives specified by Armstrong..
Be'' Carpet Specifications -
1 1) Scope of Work - Wherever indicated on the plans or
called for in the Finish Schedule or specified herein, this
Contractor shall furnish and install carpet as hereinafter spe-
cified..
' 2) Material - Carpet is to be high-performance, Lee,
Mohawk, Bigelow, or other approved brand of rugged, soil -
resistance Antron III nylon meeting Specification B 4894.
Carpet to be tufted level loop commercial weave with the follow-
' ing minimum specifications: 1/10" gauge (270 pitch) 7 stitches
per inch, .197 pile heights face yarn - 3 ply 100% continuous
filament DuPont Antron II nylon with Brunslon with face weight
' of 22 oz. per square yard. Primary backing to be polypropylene
Olefin with 1/8" bonded high density foam secondary backing of
38 oz. per square yard meeting flammability specification
' DOC-fl-1-70. Total weight of 84 oz. per square yard in 12-
foot roll widths.
6. DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer.
°s.
original unopened containers with manufacturer°s brand sass°, ,
' color and pattern number clearly marked thereon.
B. Store materials carefully in conformity with mane-
' facturer!a recommendations.
C. Store materials in original containers at not less
than 70O P. for at least 24 hours before installation.
1
' 21-3
RESILIENT FLOOR COVERING,
BASE AND CARPET
7. INSPECTION OF SURFACES
A. Surfaces to receive resilient flooring shall be
examined, and work shall not be started until defects have
been corrected.
1) This subcontractor shall notify the General Contractor
and the Architect in writing of any and all conditions which,
in his opinion, will affect the satisfactory execution of his
work or endanger its permanence.
2) Starting of application of resilient flooring shall
' constitute acceptance by this subcontractor that the surface
is in proper condition.
3) After such acceptance, this subcontractor shall be
liable for correcting all work and materials which produce
an unsatisfactory installation of the resilient flooring.
' B. Do not start work until all materials of other trades
have been installed which will penetrate resilient flooring.
' C. Do not start work until painting has been substan-
tially completed.
I8, TOLERANCES
A. Surfaces receiving resilient or carpet flooring shall
not vary more than 1/8" in any 6 foot distance, nor more than
' 1/16" within any one foot distance.
1) Any deviation from this tolerance of the surface
' receiving resilient flooring shall be filled with underlayment
material approved for use under adhesive and resilient flooring.
t S. PREPARATION OF SURFACES RECEIVING RESILIENT FLOORING AND
BASE
A. Surfaces receiving resilient flooring and carpet
' shall be turned over to this subcontractor broom clean, and free
of paint, grease, wax, oil, dirt, and any material which.will
inhibit adhesive bond,
' B. After surface is dry, fill minor remaining cracks
and depressions with crack filler.
' 10. INSTALLATION
A. In spaces where resilient flooring is stored ang is
Ito beiinstal ed, maintain temperature at not less than 70 F.
for 24.. hours before installing and at least 48 hours after
installing. Thereafter, maintain a temperature of 55O F. or
above..
21-4
I
RESILIENT FLOOR COVERING,
BASE AND CARPET
U.
C
I
I
I
I
TI
[I
I
I
I
I
B. Adhesives -
• 1) Adhesive shall be mixed and installed in accordance
with instruction of manufacturer.
• 2) Cover area evenly and only to the extent which can
be covered with resilient material in the recommended working
time of the adhesive. Remove any adhesive which dries or
films over.
3). Apply with trowel notched according to recommendations
of manufacturer. Clean and rework trowel notches as necessary
to insure proper application of adhesive.
4),. Observe caution to prevent soiling walls, bases and.
adjacent areas with adhesives.
C. Flooring -
1) n Resilient flooring shall be placed so that fields or
patterns run continuously throughout the floor level.
2) Fit flooring neatly into breaks and recesses around
pipes and around permanent cabinets and fixtures.
3) Fit flooring with tight, aligned joints.
4) Remove excess adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
Do.: ; Base
1) Set on Cove
a) Firmly cement to wall. Press down so that
bottom cove edge follows floor.
b) Form internal corners by coping.
c) Form external corners by using preraoulded
corners.
d) Scribe base accurately to abutting materials..
11. CLEANING AND WAXING
Upon completion of work under this section and on all
adjacent work, clean floors and wash with cleaner and treatment
specified.
1
I
21-5
I
G
I
I
RESILIENT FLOOR COVERING,
BASE AND CARPET
12. GUARANTY -WARRANTY
A. This subcontractor shall furnish a written warranty,
countersigned and guaranteed by the General Contractor
stating: This subcontractor shall and hereby does warrant,
and the General Contractor shall and hereby does guarantee
that:
I1) All work executed under this section will be free
from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of one
year from date of final certificate.
I
S
I
1
1
•
I
H
I
I
2) The above parties further agree that they will, at
their own expense, repair and replace all such defective work,
and all other work damaged thereby which become defective during
the term of the Guaranty -Warranty.
• 3) This Guaranty -Warranty will not apply to defects
caused by failure of work of others, if such defects were
impossible to detect at time of examination of others' work.
I 21-6
I
SECTION 22
L
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
QUARRY & CERAMIC TILE AND MARBLE
1. SCOPE OF WORK
A. Extent - The work required under this section con-
sists of all quarry and ceramic tile, marble (accessories);
and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on
drawingEl and described in specifications.
B. Type of Setting Beds - The type of setting beds to be
used for installing tile shall be optional with the Contractor
as follows for the locations listed:
1) ; Conventional Portland cement mortar setting bed may
be used for installing tile on floors and walls.
2) Dry -set or dry -cured Portland cement mortar thin,
setting bed may be used for installing tile on floors and
walls.
3)• Organic adhesives with thin setting bed may be used
for installing tile on floors and walls. Details reflect
this method of installation.
C.Bidding Documents - Refer to General Conditions which
are applicable to this section and shall form a part of the
contract.
2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Except as otherwise specified herein, or specifically
approved by the Architect, all ceramic tile and marble shall
be products of any of the following manufacturers, subject,
however, to compliance with specification requirements.
1)
American Olean Tile Company
6).
U. S. Ceramic Tile Co.
2)
The Cambridge Tile Mfg. Company
7)
Winburn Tile Mfg. Co.
3)
Florida Tile Company
8)
Carthage Marble Corp.
4)
Monarch Tile Company
9)
Batesville Marble Corp.
5)
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
3. SUBSTITUTIONS
The materials or products specified herein and indicated on
drawings by trade name, manufacturer es name or catalog number
shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will not be
permitted, except as described in General Conditions.
4. SHOP. DRAWINGS
Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings for special tile
pattern work or any marble work to Architect for approval.
Obtain approval of drawings prior to proceeding with maanufact%ring,
Li
22-1
I
QUARRY & CERAMIC TILE AND MARBLE
' 5. SAMP-LE3
If requested, submit samples of the following materials
Ito Architect for approval. Approval must be obtained prior to
deliver.
'
1)Panels of wall tile not less than four tile to each
panel, for.each color and type of tile to be used.
2) Panels of floor tile approximately 8" square of each
' type of pattern of tile used.
3) Sample of each kind of marble specified.
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
' A. ' Quality, Grade and Certificate - Tile shall comply,
with requi laments of U. S. Department of Commerce and National
Bureau o'f'Standards "Simplified Practice Recommendation R -61-b1",
' (Federal Specification SS -T -308O) and with*odifacations as
• specifie;:c'h Lein. Tile shall be of grade specified and. all
containers: grade -sealed in accordance with minimum grade sped-
fications: `described in SPR-R61-61. Deliver containers to 8i.t9
' with seats' Unbroken.
B. Factory Mounting of Tile - Factory mounting into
' sheets o;:patterns selected shall be required for all ceramic
mosaic Y1;o;and other tile hereinafter designated as."mounted".
Unless the.'specific type of mounting is specified, it shall be
optional.rovtth the Contractor.
C.'';.colors and Patterns - Colors and patterns of tile shall
be as se ed by Architects after award of contract, the
' Architect'Shail furnish Contractor with schedule showing loca-
tion of,4e colors and patterns selected.
' 7. S OF FLOOR TILE a MATERIALS ND LOCATIONS
Unglazed Porcelain Type Ceramic Mosaic Tile - Standard
grade, ungjazed dustpressed porcelain type, similar to °Clear-
' line orY..exlihe" as manufactured by American -Olean Tile Coinpsnys
not less,rth`an 1/4" thick in nominal face sizes of 2" x 2",
Pattern'1.$&-2000. Provide all necessary shapes and trimmers.
of simil_at'7tile* for curbs, depressions, corners, etc. Use
this tit:'for floors in toilet rooms,
Quaxz+ Tile - Quarry tile shall be 8" x 8" x 1/2" standard
'
grade V -Bak ground four sides after firing as manufactured by
� icars Glean Tile Company. Tile shall conform to ANSI
1967 and Federal Specification SS T 308C. Colors shall
be as selected by Architect.
1
' 22-2
QUARRY & CERAMIC TILE AND MARBLE
B. TYPES OF WALL TILE - MATERIALS AND LOCATIONS
' A. Glazed Wall Tile - Large Units - Standard grade
glazed tile similar to "Bright and Matte" as manufactured by
American -Olean Tile Company; not less than 5/16" thick with
'cushion edges, colored matt glazed finish and in nominal face
sizes of 4-1/4" x 4-1/4". Provide spacer lugs or other similar
features on edges of tile. Use this tile for walls in toilet
rooms. r
B. Wall Tile Trim Shapes and Bases - Trim shapes shall
be of same type, color, thickness and finish as wall tile.
Provide trim and base shapes in accordance with requirements
listed below. Shape numbers referred to are taken from catalog
of the Mosaic Tile Company. In addition to shapes, listed,
provide tile stops and returns as required at jambs of doors
and other frames at locations where they do not project a
sufficient distance to provide a stop for the tile:
1) Make interior corners of wainscot field square by
butting the field tile.
' 2) Make internal corners of cap and base square; form
square internal corners of bullnose cap using universal angle
AK106; form square internal corners o€ cove base in mitering
' lip on cove; form round internal corners of cap and base using
combination angle and stretcher shapes No. ABR and ABL. Where
surface type trim is used, internal corners shall be square.
' 3) Make all external corners of wall tile rounded,
using combination angle. and stretcher shapes.
' 4) Use cove base No. A3401, size 4-1/4" x 4-1/4", under
tile wails and wainscots where floor is tile and set in conven-
tional mortar setting bed.
' 5) Use thinelip base No. AT3401, site 4-l/4" x 4-1/4",
under tile walls and wainscots where floor is tile and set in
I. adhesive or dry -set cement mortar.
6). Use Bullnose cap No. A4402 at top of conventional
mortar set wainscots when tile projects beyond face of finish
' above.
7) . Use surface cap No. S4449 at top of adhesive set, or
dry -set cement mortar wainscot when tile projects beyond face
of finish above.
8). Form cap from straight piece of wall tile where
wainscot tile finishes flush with finish above.
' 22-3
QUARRY & CERAMIC TILE AND MARBLE
9. TYPES OF MARBLE - MATERIALS AND LOCATIONS
IA. Marble Thresholds - In all spaces shall be fabricated
of Ozark grey veined marble.
' B. Marble Finish - All exposed surfaces and edges of
all marble shall be polished to a fine even surface in accor-
dance with the approved samples.
' 10. MATERIALS FOR SETTING TILE AND MARBLE
A. Portland Cement - ASTM C-150-60, Type 1: white or
' gray as specified.
B. Hydrated Lime - ASTM C-206-49 or C-207-49, Type S.
C. Sand - ASTM C144 -52T, washed clean and graded; use
fine sand passing a 1/16" mesh screen when mixed for grouting;
use white sand with white cement.
1 D. Water - Clean and potable.
' E. Dry -Set Mortar - A powdered mortar mix complying with
requirements of ASA Specification A118-1-1959 for "Dry -Set
Portland Cement Mortar". The mortar shall be manufactured
under license by the Tile Council of American, Inc. and
containers shall bear their hallmark. The powdered mortar
mix maybe furnished premixed with Portland cement as a sanded
mix, or•as a concentrate to be job mixed with Portland cefuent,
' at Contractor's option.
F. .;Tile Adhesive - Water resistant organic type conform-
, ing to U:,,,8. Department of Commerce, Commercial Standard
CS 181$$20' In addition manufacturer must certify that adhesive
is a suitable type and is recommended for the application as
specified.. .Each container shall bear hallmark showing compliance
with commercial standards CS 181-52.
::Primers, Sealers, Underlayment and Solvents - Of type
' and consistency as recommended by manufacturer of adhesive,
or dry -sett mortar mix. Prime or seal wall surfaces before
applying adhesive or dry -set mortar. The application of under-
' layment,.over floor or wall surfaces shall be required only
where it is necessary to level or straighten the surfaces to
provide a satisfactory tile installation.
' 11. LAYING OUT WORK
Where possible, lay out work so that no tile less than
' half size occurs. For heights stated in feet and inches,
maintain full courses to produce nearest attainable heights
without cutting tile. Align joints in wall tile vertically
I 22-4
QUARRY & CERAMIC TILE AND MARBLE
and horizontally except where other patterns are shown or
specified. Align joints in floor tile at right angles to each
' other and straight with walls to conform to patterns selected.
Obtain exact locations of expansion joints and accessories
before installing tile.
' 12. ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES TO RECEIVE TILE
Prior to installing any tile the tile subcontractor shall
' inspect subfloors and wall surfaces which are to receive tile
covering; he shall notify the Architect in writing of any
serious defects or condition that will interfere with, or
' prevent a satisfactory tile installation; he shall not proceed
with installation until such defects or conditions have been
corrected. The starting of installation work in a room or
space shal1. imply acceptance of the surfaces to receive the
tile €n that space.
13. INSTALLATION OF TILE
' A. Compliance with Standard Specifications - Except as.
otherwise indicated on drawings or specified, the installation
' of all tile, shall be in accordance with the applicable General.
Requirements for Inspection, Preparation, Protection, Workman-
• ship and: Application as described in the following adopted aqd
' proposed American Standard Specifications:
A108.1-19.58 Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile Installed €n
Portland Cement Mortars.
' A1Q8.2.-1958 Ceramic Mosaic Tile Installed in Portland
Cement Mortars.
A108.3-1958 Quarry Tile and Pavers Installed in
' Portland Cement Mortars.
A108.5-1960 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set
Portland Cement Mortar.
ASA Project A108 -May 29, 1959 Proposed Standard
I.
Specification for Installation of Ceramic
Tile with Water Resistant Organic Adhesives.
' B..._° Special Requirements and Modifications - The specific
requirements listed below are intended to supplement, clarify
and modify the above referenced standard specifications for
installation of tile to suit this project. In addition, refer
to and follow the above standards for specific requirements
concerning delivery and storage of materials; tolerances per-
mitted for acceptable wall and floor surfaces; protection of
' tile work;, temperature for setting; mortar mixes, curing and
cleaning.
Ii) Unless glazed wall tile has spacer lugs on edges,
use string or other approved method to separate tile and pro-
vide approximately 1/16" wide joints for grouting.
I 22-5
I
QUARRY & CERAMIC TILE AND t2ARBLE
2) Use white cement for grouting wall tile and gray
cement for grouting floor tile.
' 3) Before setting wall tile using organic adhesive,
apply primer sealing coat over all surfaces to receive tile.
In addition, internal and external corners and joints around
tubs and receptors shall be filled with adhesive used for
setting tile.
I
I
I
I
I
C
I
I
I
I
I
14. INSTALLATION OF MARBLE
Setting - All marble throughout shall be set in the best
possible manner and in strict accordance with the best standard
practice. Only experienced and competent setters shall be
employed on the work. All marble shall be set level, plumb,.
square and true uniform tight joints to the full dimensions and
to the lines indicated, the work to be executed in accordance
with the details.
' 22-6
SECTION 23
PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS
' 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Extent - The work required under this section includes
' all field painting and related items necessary to complete
the work shown on drawings and included in specifications.
1) The work in general includes all exterior ferrous,
metal and exterior cement plaster ceilings, interior ferrous
metals, interior woodwork, sheetrock, masonry units and other
items normally requiring a paint finish unless otherwise sped-
' fled. This section also covers coating with silicone the
interior surfaces of fountain.
I
I
fl
I
I
[l
I
I
I
I
B. Prime Coats - Prime coats specified herein will not
be required on items delivered with prime or shop coats already
applied. (See other sections of the specifications for primers
specified for shop work.)
C. Items Factory Painted - Field painting will not be
required on items to be completely finished at the factory;
see other sections of the specifications for details. These
items in general are as follows:
1) Metal toilet partitions, doors.
D. Items not Requiring a Paint Finish - Field Painting
will not be required on the following:
1) Acoustical pre -finished ceilings.
2) Precolored stucco.
3) Prefinished wood door.
4) Formica facing on cabinets and graphics band.
5) Others as required.
E. Work Included in Other Sections - The following related
items of surface finishing work are included in other sections
of the specifications:.
1) Caulking
2) Sealants
F. Bidding Documents - Refer to General Conditions which
are applicable to this section.
I
23-1
PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS
' 2. PAINT MATERIALS GENERALLY
A. Paint, enamel, varnish and stains shall be of type and
' brands specified under "Schedule of Painting". Basic painting
materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, thinners,
driers, etc., shall be of highest quality and have identifying
tlabels on containers.
B. All paint shall be delivered to site in manufacturer's
sealed containers. Each container shall be labeled by the
' manufacturer. Labels shall give manufacturer's name, brand,
type of paint, color of paint and instructions for reducing.
Thinning shall be done in accordance with directions of manu-
' facturer. Job mixing or job tinting may be done when approved
by the Architect and for sample colors.
IC. Bids shall be based on the use of the specific brands
and quality as specified. No substitution shall be made except
as described in the General Conditions.
' D. Acceptable Manufacturers - Except as otherwise
specified herein or specifically approved by the Architect in
writing, the following shall be the products of the following
' manufacturers, subject to compliance with specification require-
ments:
1) Devoe and Reynolds Co., Inc.
'
2) E. I. DuPont de Nemours & Co., Inc.
3) Benjamin Moore Company
4) National Gypsum Co., Gold Bond Paints
'• 5) Pratt & Lambert, Inc.
6) Sherwin-Williams Company
' 3. COLORS AND SAMPLES -
Paint colors shall be as selected by the Architect.
' Before any work is done the Architect will furnish the Contrac-
tor with color chips, and a schedule showing where the various
colors shall go. The Contractor shall then prepare samples
at the job as required until the colors and textures are
' satisfactory.
4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
' A. Access panels, registers, etc. generally shall be
painted the same color as adjacent walls or ceilings. Where
' adjacent surfaces do not require painting, use color as directed.
B... Prime coated butts and overhead door closers shall be
painted the same color as door trim to which they are attached.
I
' 23-2
PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS
C. Exposed piping, conduit, duct work and hangers
generally shall be painted a color and texture to match walls
' or ceilings adjacent to it. Where adjacent surfaces are
unpainted# use color as directed.
ID. One sealer coat of a natural wood seal shall be
applied to sides and edges of interior wood trim before it is
erected.
I
E. Each coat of paint shall be of a slightly different
shade than preceding coat. The final undercoat shall be tinted
close to color of the finish coat as directed by the Architect.
F. The top and bottom edges of all unfinished wood and
metal doors shall be finished with two coats of paint or varnish
as used for finish coat. Apply after fitting and before faces
are painted.
G. Where open cabinets or shelves occur, room finish or
walls shall not be omitted. However, painting on walls will not
be required back of permanently built-in cabinets with closed
back.
5. PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Inspection of Surfaces - Do not begin painting on
' any surface until it has been inspected and is in proper condi-
tion to receive the paint as specified. Should any surface be
found unsuitable to produce a proper paint finish, the Architect
I. shall be notified in writing and no material shall be applied
until the unsuitable surfaces have been made satisfactory.
Be. Wood Sandpaper to smooth and even surface and then
dust off. After priming or stain coat has been applied
thoroughly fill all nail holes and other surface imperfections
with spackle, tinted with primer or stained to match wood
color.
C. Steel and Iron - Remove grease, dirt, mud, rust and
' scale as necessary to receive paint. Touch up any chipped or
abraded places on items that have been shop coated. Where
steel and iron have a heavy coating of scale, it shall be
t removed by de -scaling or wire brushing as necessary to produce
a satisfactory surface for painting.
D. Galvanized Metal - Thoroughly clean by wiping sur-
' faces with Pittsburgh Surface Conditioner and prime with
Pittsburgh Galvanized Iron Primer.
'E. Concrete and Masonry Block - Concrete and masonry
block surfaces to be painted shall be prepared by removing all
dirt, dust, oil and grease stains and efflorescence. The
' method of surface preparation shall be left to the discretion
of the Contractor provided the results are satisfactory to the
Architect.
I 23-3
PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS
F. General - Before painting, remove hardware, accessories,
plates, lighting fixtures and similar items or provide ample
protection of such items. On completion of each space, replace
above items. To paint bottom edge, remove doors, if hung. Use
only skilled mechanics for removing and connecting above items
when spray painting is used. Protect adjacent surfaces as
' required or directed,
6. APPLICATION
IA. Do not apply exterior paint in damp, rainy weather or
until the surface has dried thoroughly from the effects of such
weather. Do not apply varnish or paint when temperature is
below 50° F.
B. Surface to be stained or painted shall be clean, dry,
1 smooth and adequately protected from dampness. Each coat of
paint shall be applied smoothly, worked out evenly and allowed
to dry completely before the subsequent coat is applied.
IC. Finished work shall be uniform and of the approved
color. It shall completely cover, be smooth and free from runs,
sags, clogging or excessive flooding. Make edges of paint,
' adjoining other materials or colors, sharp and clean without
overlapping. Where high gloss enamel is used, lightly sand
undercoats to obtain a smooth finish coat.
' D. At completion, touch up and restore finish where
damaged and leave in good condition.
7. STORAGE AND WORKING SPACE
All materials used on the job shall be stored in a single
t place designated by the Architect. Such storage place shall be
kept clean and all damage to it or to its surroundings shall
be made good. Any oily rags, waste, etc., must be removed
from the building every night and every precaution taken to
tavoid the danger of fire.
8. SCHEDULE OF PAINTING
' The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required
on the various surfaces as they may apply to this project shall
' be as follows:
A. Exterior Metal
' 1) Ferrous Metals - All surfaces shall be given one coat
Pittsburgh primer Ironhide Inhibitive Red or Speedhide
Inhibitive Red Primer and two coats of Pittsburgh Ironhide
' Metal Paint or Sun -Proof House paint. Waterspar Enatel is also
suitable.
1
23-4
I
PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS
' 2) Galvanized Metals - All surfaces shall be given one
coat Pittsburgh Primer Ironhide or Speedhide Galvanized Iron
and two coats Sun -Proof House Paint or Ironhide Metal Protec-
ttive Paint.
B. Interior Masonry Surfaces -
Concrete Block Walls - All surfaces shall be given one
coat Pittsburgh Primer Wallhide or Speedhide Primer -Sealer,
and one coat Pittsburgh Wallhide or Speedhide Primer -Sealer
' tinted to approximate color of finish. One coat Wallhide
or Speedhide Alkyd Flat Wall Paint.
Co Interior Woodwork - Varnish Finish
1) Woodwork'and Trim - Stain and Varnish - All unfinished
hardwood, surfaces shall be given one coat Pittsburgh Primer
' Pigmented Wood Stain, (Wood to be filled with Pittsburgh
Natural Paste Wood Filler or Waterspar Clear Filler -Sealer
before finishing) and two coats of Pittsburgh Waterspar
' Extra Pale Satin Varnish. In spaces where prefinished wood
grille'occsrs, stain woodwork and trim to match.
' D. Interior Woodwork - Enamel Finish
1) Woodwork and Trim - Painted - Basically softwoods,
storage room and closet shelves. All surfaces shall be given
' one coat Pittsburgh Primer Speedhide Enamel. Undercoater and
two coats Pittsburgh Satinhide Lo -Lustre Enamel.
E. Interior Gypsum Board - Enamel Finish (See Section. 16
for surface texturing) All gypsum board surfaces shall be
painted with one coat Pittsburgh Primer Speedhide Enamel
' Undercoater and one coat Pittsburgh Satinhide Lo -Lustre Enamel.
F. Interior Metal - Enamel or Flat Finish
Ii) Metal doors and Trim - Factory Primed - All surfaces
shall be given one coat Pittsburgh Primer Speedhide Machinery
and Equipment Primer and two coats Pittsburgh Speedhide Semi-
' Gloss Enamel or Satinhide Lo -Lustre Enamel,
2) Galvanized Metal - All surfaces shall be given one
coat Pittsburgh Primer Ironhide or Speedhide Galvanized Steel
'
Primer and two coats Wallhide Alkyd Flat Wall Paint or Speedhide
Alkyd Flat Wall Paint.
' G. Interior Exposed Pipe and Ducts
1) Galvanized Ducts - Interior Exposed - All surfaces
' shall be given one coat Pittsburgh Primer Solvent Clean with
VM&P Naptha and two coats Pittsburgh Wallhide Latex one coat
flat or Speedhide Flat Emulsion.
I
' 23-5
PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS
9. BRICK COATING
on interior concrete surfaces of fountain, apply two coats
of exterior colorless silicone waterproofing. Silicone to
be "Dri-Seal" as manufactured by Concrete Service Materials Co.
and shall be applied to clean surfaces using one gallon to 75
sq. ft. for each coat.
1
1
1
I
23-6
' SECTION 24
' EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE SIDEWALKS & SURFACES
I1. SCOPE
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications
' consists of furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, appliances
and materials and in performing all operations in connection
with the construction of exposed aggregate finish Portland
cement concrete sidewalks and surfaces, complete, in strict
accordance with this section of the specifications and the
applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions
of the contract. All exterior horizontal concrete surfaces
except freight dock shall be exposed aggregate finish.
2. CONCRETE
' A. Concrete and the equipment, workmanship and materials
therefore shall conform to the applicable requirements of the
Structural Concrete Section of these specifications. Concrete
' shall be Class A. The maximum size of aggregate shall be
1-1/2". Concrete shall have a slump of not less than 2 and.
more than 5 inches.
' 3. SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The subgrade shall be constructed true to grade and
cross section as shown on the drawings. The subgrade shall be
thoroughly watered and rolled or hand -tamped until hard and
solid beZore placing the concrete. Any soft or spongy material
shall be'removed to a depth of not less than 40 below subgrade
elevation, and replaced with earth, sand or gravel of a quality
that will compact when moistened. This material shall then be
rolled or tamped until a firm and solid foundation is obtained.
Rollers Shall be hand rollers or small power rollers suitable
for sidewalk construction. The completed subgrade shall be
tested for grade and cross section with a template extending
the full depth of the sidewalk and supported between side forms.
The subgrade and forms shall be thoroughly watered in advance
of placing the concrete.
B. In cold weather, the subgrade shall be so treated,
protected and prepared as to produce and provide a satisfactory
' subgrade. entirely free from frost when the concrete is
deposited..
5. FORMS
Forms shall be of wood or metal, straight, free from warp,
of sufficient strength to resist springing during construction,
' and of a height equal to the full depth of the finished side-
walk. Wood forms shall be 2" surfaces plank, metal forms shall
be of approved sections with a flat top surface. Forms shall
i
' 24-1
' EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
SIDEWALKS 6 SURFACES
be set with the upper edge true to. line and grade and shall
be held rigidly in place by stakes placed on the outside of
t forms and set flush with the top edge of the form. Side forms
shall not be removed less than 12 hours after the finishing
has been completed.
6. CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
A. Concrete shall be placed in the forms in a layer of -
such thickness that when compacted and finished the sidewalk
will be of the thickness shown on the drawings. Sidewalks. shall
be continuous between expansion joints. After the concrete
' has been placed between side forms, a strike off guided by.;the
:
side fo4sshall be used to bring the surface to the proper;,:,.
section°",, lie compacted. The concrete shall then be tamped H.
• with a,4 d&ir consisting of parallel metal bars until a thin .:'•;
layer df:mortar has been brought to surface and given a fina!1'
tamping,b i;tb a light tamper consisting of a wire mesh having
' square Cp@nings not less than 1/8" nor more than 1/4" in size;.,;
B. The surface shall be finished to grade and cross ,
section with a wooden float at least 10 feet in length, 6to 8 ..
' inches in width, and at least 1 inch in thickness, with
handles at each end for longitudinally floating along the
surface. Immediately after the surface of the concrete has been
' leveled and surface water has disappeared, aggregate shall -be
spread uniformly over the surface to provide complete coverage
to the depth of a single stone.
I. The aggregate shall be brown colored washed gravel
as approved by Architect. The spread of selected aggregate
shall be embedded into the surface by light tamping and the
' surface shall be floated until the embedded stone is fully
coated with mortar and the surface has been brought to a true
plane. Exposure of the aggregate shall start after the matrix
' has hardened sufficiently to prevent dislodgement of the aggre-
gate. Water in copious quantities but without force, shall be
allowed, to flow over the surface of the concrete while the matrix
encasing the selected aggregate is removed by brushing with a
fine bristle brush. This operation shall continue until the
selected aggregate is uniformly exposed but not dislodged.. An
approved chemical retarder sprayed onto the freshly floated
surface may be used to extend the working time for exposure of
aggregate,
' 7. JOINTS
Transverse joints shall be installed at all sidewalk returns
and opposite expansion joints in adjacent curb and elsewhere as
directed by Architect in approximately 10 -foot intervals each
direction. Joints shall be 1 x 4 redwood in full length
installed vertically with top edge flush with concrete.
24-2
I
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
SIDEWALKS & SURFACES
1
8. CURING AND PROTECTION
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
H
I
I
L
L
n
G
I
A. Curing - Immediately after the finishing operations,
the exposed surface shall be cured by the blanketing method,
mat• method, or impervious -paper method, or by the membrane
curing method, as the Contractor may elect.
1) Blanketing Method - The entire exposed surface
shall be covered with a blanket of sand not less than 2" thick.
Immediately after placing, the blanketing shall be watered and
kept saturated for not less than 7 days.
2) Mat Method - The entire exposed surface shall be
covered with cotton mats conforming to Federal Specification
DDD-M-148 or with two or more layers of burlap conforming to
Federal Specification CCC-B-811 having a combined weight of
14 ounces or more per square yard when dry.• Immediately
after placing, the mat shall be thoroughly wet with water and
kept in a saturated condition for 7 days.
3) Impervious -Paper Method - The entire exposed surface
shall be covered with waterproof paper conforming to Federal
Specification UU-P-264, laid directly upon the concrete.
Transverse joints in the sheets shall overlap 12". Sheets shall
be securely at least 18" wider than the walk. The sheets
shall be securely weighted down by placing a bank of moist
earth on the edges of the sheets just outside the forms and
over the transverse laps of the sheet to form a closed joint.
The paper shall be allowed to remain in place for not less
than 7 days. Should the paper be broken or damaged during
curing, the broken or damaged portions shall be immediately
repaired with new paper.
4a Membrane -Curing Method - The entire exposed surfaces
shall be covered with a pigmented membrane -forming curing
compound conforming to Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C-300.
The curing compound shall be applied in two coats by hand
operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately
200. square feet per gallon for both coats. The second coat
shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles
to the direction of application of the first coat. The
compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that
will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes
or other imperfections. Concrete surfaces which are subjected
to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has
been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage
I 24-3
I]
Ti
I
L
I
I
I
I
J
I
r
I
I
I
I
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
SIDEWALKS El SURFACES
above, at no additional cost to the Owner. All expansion
and contact joint openings shall be sealed at the top by
inserting moistened paper or fiber rope or covering with
strips of waterproof paper prior to application of the curing
compound, in a manner to prevent the curing compound entering
the joint. Concrete surfaces which membrane -curing compounds
have been applied to shall be adequately protected for 7 days
from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and from any other
action which might disrupt the continuity of the membrane.
Any area covered with curing compound and damaged by subsequent
construction operations within the 7 -day curing period shall be
resprayed at no additional expense to the Owner.
B. Protection - After the concrete has been cured, all
debris shall be removed, and the area adjacent to the sidewalk
shall be:backfilled, graded and compacted in a satisfactory
manner in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the
drawings.: The completed sidewalk shall be protected from
damage until accepted. The Contractor shall repair, at his
own expense, all concrete damaged during construction. The
repair shall be made by removing and replacing the defective
sidewalks between the nearest joints.
' 24-4
IH
SECTION 25
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL PROVISIONS
APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL
AND ELECTRICAL WORK
25-01. GENERAL:
(a) The Architectoral and Structural Plans and, Specifications,
General Conditions, instructions to. Bidders, Supplementary General Con-
, ditions, Special Conditions and other pertinent documents issued by
the Architect are a part of these Specifications and the accompanying
Drawings and shall be complied with in every respect.
' 25-02. SINGLE NUMBER:
(a) Where any item is referred to in,a sdngle number; such
' item shall be deemed to apply to as many such items as are required
to complete the installation.
' 25-03. BIDDERS' QUALIFICATIONS:
(a) Consideration for award of the, Contract shall be limited
to Bidders who are regularly engaged in installing and servicing in-
'• tallations similar, in type to that described in this Specification.
Such experience shall include a period of time, of not less than three
(3) years prior to this bid.
25-04. MANUFACTURERS' QUALIFICATIONS:
(a) All materials and equipment installed shall be the pro-
duct of nationally recognized manufacturers who have been manufacturing
similar equipment for a period of not less than five (5) years.
' 25-05. CODES AND STANDARDS:
• (a) All work shall comply with all Federal, State and Local
' Codes, rules, regulations and laws.
(b) All work shall comply specifically with the following
codes, pamphlets, regulations and standards.
1 (1) Southern Standard Building Code, 1976 Edition.
(2) All applicable National Fire Protection Association
' pamphlets
(3) The National Electric Code, 1975 Edition
(4) All types of materials and equipment subject to
' listing by Underwriters Laboratories shall be UL
listed
(5) Normal industry standards
'6) NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, latest. edition,
(7,) Provide safety guards on all exposed belts, pulleys,
couplings, motor shafts, etc. per ANSI Standard 816.1
' (c) The Contractor shall complyrwi.th:all OSHA safety require- 71
-ments during the--perr.iod of construction.
25_1
I
(d) Where requirements of the above described codes, rules,
regulations, laws, pamphlets, requirements and standards are at varience,
the highest standard shall govern.
' (e) The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with
all of the above described codes, rules, regulations, laws, pamphlets,
requirements and standards, regardless of whether or not they are de -
ttailed on the Drawings or specified herein.
25O6. PERMITS AND FEES:
(a) Give all necessary notices, obtain allpermits and pay
all government sales taxes, fees, and other costs, including those
for utility connections or extensions. . File all necessary plans, pre-
' pare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all govern-
mental departments having jurisdiction. Obtain all required certifi-
cates of inspection for the work and deliver same to the Architect.
25-07. INSPECTIONS:
(a) The Contractor shall give the Architect requisite notice
'
relating to the work and shall afford the Architect and his authorized
representatives every facility for inspection.
• ' 25-08. SOIL CONDITIONS:
(a) The Specifications and the Drawings in no way imply the
' condition of the soil to be encountered. When excavating may be re-
quired in the execution of the work, the Contractor agrees that he has
informed himself regarding conditions affecting the work and labor and
material required, without recourse .to any representation as to soil
' conditions that may appear, or seem to be implied, in any portion of
the Contract Documents.
• ' 25-09. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS:
(a) No substitution of materials or equipment shall be made
' unless authorized in writing by the Architect. When offering an Item
as a substitute for a specified item, the Contractor shall describe
fully in writing all ways in which the proposed substitute differs
from the specified item. Failure to so state all differences will be
' considered sufficient cause for subsequently revoking any approval of
a substitution. Samples of proposed substitutes shall be submitted
for comparison when requested by the Architect.
(b) Shoulda substitution be accepted and should the substi-
tute material or equipment prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory
for the service intended within the guarantee period, the substituted
material or equipment shall be replaced with the material or equipment
specified by name.
' 25-10. STANDARD PRODUCTS:
(a) Each item of equipment furnished under this specification
' shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where
two or more units of the same kind or class of equipment are required,
' 25-2
I
I
I
L
U
I
C
I
I
I
I
I
these shall be the products of a single manufacturer''however, the com-
ponent parts of, the equipment need not be the products of one manufac-
turer.
(b) All material and equipment shall be of the best quality
normally used in good commercial practice and shall be the product of
reputable manufacturers. Each major component shall bear a nameplate
giving the name and address of the manufacturer and the catalog number
or designation.
25-11. EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS:
(a) Where it is proposed to use an item of equipment other
than that specified, or detailed •on the drawings which requires any
redesign of structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring, or any
other part of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all
such redesign, and all new drawings and detailing required therefor,
shall be prepared and submitted to the Architect for his approval.
(b) Where such approved deviation required a different quantity
and arrangement of ductwork, piping, wiring, conduit, and equipment
from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install
any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, control-
lers, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduit, and any other
additional equipment required by the sy-stem._at.no additional cost to
the Owner.
.-12. SHOP DRAWINGS:
(a) Submit for approval, detailed shop drawings, of all equip -
and all material required to complete the project, and no material
!auipment may be delivered to the job site or installed until receipt
the approved shop drawings for the particular material or equipment.
_enish the number of copies required by the General and Special Condi-
tions of the Contract, but in no case less. than six (6) copies.
(b) Submit for approval, detailed, dimensioned drawings or cuts,
showing construction, size, arrangement, operating clearances, perfor-
mance characteristics and capacity. Each item of equipment proposed
shall be a standard catalog product of an established manufacturer and
of equal quality, finish and durability to that specified.
(c) Samples, drawings, specifications and catalogs, submitted
for approval shall be properly labeled indicating specific service for
which material or equipment is to be used, section and article number
of. specifications governing, contractor's name, and name of job.
(d) Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to de-
scribe items on which approval is being requested shall be specific,
and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc., of item submitted shall
be clearly made in ink. Data of a general nature will not be accepted.
(e) Approval rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered
as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings
are approved, said approval does not mean that drawings have been checked
in detail and said approval does not in any way provide relief from the
25-3
C
' Contractor's responsibility of furnishing material or performing work
as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
(f) Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking
shall not constitute basis for an extension of contract time, and no
claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.
(g) See Paragraph 25-09. "SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS".
25-13. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS:
(a) At the completion of the project, provide the Owner with
a set of reproducible drawings showing all work installed under this
' Contract. These drawings shall be correct in every detail and shall
incorporate all changes made in the course of the conduct of the pro-
ject. These drawings shall be prepared in such a manner as to enable
' the Owner to properly operate, maintain, and repair both exposed and
concealed work. Reproducibles of the original drawings will be
available by the Architect to the Contractor and he can correct them
to as -built conditions.
' 25-14. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
' (a) The Drawings and Specifications shall be considered as
mutually explanatory and any work required by one, but not by the other,
shall be performed as though required by both.
' (b) It is the intention of these Specifications and Drawings
to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. Minor
details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper
' installation and operation, shall be included in the work, the same
as if herein specified or shown. Wherever the work "provide" is used,
it shall mean "furnish and install complete and ready for use".
' (c) The Drawings are diagramatic and indicate the general
arrangement of systems and work included in the Contract. Drawings
' are not to be scaled. Because of the small scale of the drawings,.
it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, valves and ac-
cessories which may be required. The Architectural and Structural
drawings shall be examined to determine the exact location of fixtures
' and equipment and the finish conditions affecting the work. Check
drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be in-
stalled. Make such offsets in piping, ductwork, conduit, etc. as may
' be required to maintain the designated head room and space conditions..
at allpoints in the building. Furnish the required fittings, valves,
junction boxes and accessories as may be required to meet the building
conditions.
(d) Where head room or space conditions appear inadequate,
notify the Architect before proceeding with installation. If directed
' by the Architect, without extra charge, make.reasonable. modifications
in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades
• or for proper execution of the work.
' (e) Locations and elevations of the various utilities.
:-' ...-ncluded within the scope of this work, have been obtained from ?'
25-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
[I
utility maps and/or other
offered separate from the
only, without guarantee as
examine the site and shall
tion and elevation of all
himself of their relation
substantially reliable sources and are
Contract Documents as a general guide
to accuracy. The Contractor shall
verify to his own satisfaction the loca-
utilities, and shall adequately inform
to the work before entering into a contract.
25-15. COOPERATION AND COORDINATION:
• (a)
Cooperate
fully
with all
other trades
on
the job so that
none of the
trades will
be
hindered.or
delayed
at
any
time.
(b) Examine all of the Drawings and Specifications relating to
all other trades and "plan and execute the work so as not to interfere
with the work of any other trade in the building, whether accomplished
under this or other sections In the Specifications. In the case of
interferences after part of the work is installed, the Architect will
decide which work is to be relocated regardless of which was first in-
stalled.
(c) Obtain from other trades .copies of approved Shop Drawings
'
which are needed to properly prosecute the work and furnish approved
Shop Drawings to other trades when they are required for the other trades
proper prosecution of their work.
' (d) If any part of the work depends for proper results upon
the work of any other trades, inspect such work by the other trades and
' report promptly to the Architect any such work which is unsuitable.
25-16. PROTECTION:
I
I
H
.1
(a) All areas traversed during the course of the work, and
• buildings, materials, appliances, fixtures and furnishing adjacent
to work site shall, be -protected against damage arising from or as a
result of work operations. Any damage incurred shall be repaired
without additional cost to the Owner.
25-17. CLEANING UP:
(a) During the period of construction, the Contractor shall
make every effort to keep the premesis free of debris and obstructions
at all times. When this part of the work is fintshed, remove from the
premesis all tools, machinery and debris.
25-18. HANDLING MATERIALS:
(a). Equipment and materials shall be delivered to the site and
stored in original containers, suitably sheltered from the elements and
readily accessible for inspection by Architect until installed. All
items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry heated spaces.
I
(b) Properly protect all materials and equipment from damage.
This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to
adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site and
' the covering of apparatus in incompleted buildings with protective
coverings. All items subject to moisture damage shall be stored In
dry heated spaces.. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply
' 25-5
I
C
.1
C
I
I
I
I.1
C
I
I
I
I
C
with the above to the entire satisfaction of Architect will be suffi-
cient cause for rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question.
25-19. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:
(a) Except as otherwise shown or specified, all materials and
apparatus required for the work shall be new, of first-class quality,
and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in
every detail, and shall be so selected and arranged as to fit properly
into the building spaces. Where no specific kind of quality of mater-
ial is given, a first-class standard article as approved by the Archi-
tect shall be furnished.
(b) Furnish the necessary supervision, together with all skillu.tl
;.workmen and labor required to unload, transfer, erect, connect -up,
adjust, start, operate and test each system.
(c) Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Plans or
Specifications, allcequipment and materials shall be installed in ac-
cordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes
the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends.
25-20. CUTTING AND PATCHING:
(a) Do all cutting made necessary by the work, subject to the
approval of the Architect. In no case cut through or into any structura
member without written permission of the Architect. Exercise due dili-
gence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong loca-
tions. Furnish and install all sleeves required for the work.
(b) Where openings are cut through masonry walls, furnish and
install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining
.masonry. Adequate support shall be provided during the cutting oper-
ation to prevent any damage to masonry by the cutting operation. All
structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size and type and
shall be installed as directed by the Architect.
(c) Where openings are cut, the patching shall be done by the
trade whose work is disturbed but shall be paid for by the sub -contrac-
tor cutting the opening or causing the damage.
25-21. WATERPROOFING:
(a) tihere any work pierces waterproofing including waterproof
concrete, the method of installation shall be as approved by the Archi-
tect before work is done. Furnish all necessary sleeves, caulking
and flashing required to make openings absolutely watertight.
25-22. SPECIAL TOOLS:
(a) If any part of the equipment furnished under these speci-
fications requires a special tool for assembly, adjustment setting or
maintenance thereof and such tool is not readily available on the commer-
cial tool market, it shall be furnished with the equipment as a stan-
dard accessory.
25-g
25-23. MOTORS, MOTOR CONTROLLERS AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
(a) The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, for instal-
lation by the Electrical Contractor, a motor and motor controller
' of adequate capacity and suitable speed for the proper operation of
each and every piece of equipment or apparatus requiring same,
except where controllers are shown to be.furnished by the Electri-
' cal as part of a power panel. All motors shall be General Electric,
Westinghouse, Century or approved equal, and shall be furnished
with open frame, unless otherwise noted or required by the National
Electrical Code for the service conditions encountered.- Motor con -
t trollers'shall be General Electric, Cutler -Hammer, Allen-Bradley, or
approved equal.
' (b) Unless:otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings,
all motors which are rated one-half (1/2) horsepower and over, shall
be general purpose, squirrel cage, induction type, for continuous
' duty arranged for constant speed across -the -line starting with ball
bearings (sealed or open where bearing enclosure adequately provides
for same) and constructed and rated in accordance with the latest
standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association for
'forty degree Centigrade (400C)rise, and wound for two hundred volt
(200V), three (3) phase, sixty (60) cycle power service.
I(c) Unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings,
fractional horsepower motors under one-half (1/2) horsepower shall
be National Electrical Manufacturers Association constructed and
:r
ated, rated, and shall be wound for single (1) phase, one hundred and fif-
teen volt (115V) operation. Single (1) shall be motors shabe capa-
citor -start, induction -run type. Unless otherwise specified, fur-
nish manual controllers with thermal overload for all such motors.
' (d) Unless otherwise shown, the Mechanical Contractor shall
.,.furnish with each three phase motor and across -the -line, non -reversing
magnetic controller, with overload and undervoltage protection in all
three legs. Construction and rating shall conform with the latest
standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Con-
trollers which are remotely or automatically operated shall be equipped
' with "Hand -Off -Automatic" switch and pilot light integral with the
enclosure. Others shall have pushbutton and pilot light in cover un-
less shown remote on the Drawings. Where motor starters are shown
Ion the electrical Drawings as a part of a motor starter panelboard
or motor control center, they will be furnished by the Electrical Con-
tractor and not the Mechanical Contractor.
' (e) The Mechanical Contractor shall pay the Electrical Con-
tractor for all electrical work in connection with the temperature
control system. The Electrical Contractor shall perform all manual
' and interlock control work. All control wiring shall be in conduit
25-24. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING:
' (a) Trenches for underground pipes and conduit shall be ex-
cavated by the Contractor to the required depths and bell holes shall
' be provided where required to insure uniform bearing. Excavation be-
low the required grade shall be refilled and firmly compacted. Where
rock is encountered, the same stall be excavated to a grade three inches
25-7
(3") below the lowermost part of the pipe or conduit and the
'
shall be refilled to the required grade as above specified.
shall be sheathed or braced and pumping or bailing performed
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
I
I
C
I
I
n
be necessary to protect the workmen and adjacent structures
permit proper execution of the work.
trench
Trenches
as may
and to
(b) After pipelines have been tested, inspected and approved
by the Architect, the trenches shall be backfilled with approved ma-
terials containing no large rocks, tamped or otherwise thoroughly
compacted in place.
25-25. ROUGHING -IN FOR AND FINAL CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED
UNDER OTHER SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS OR BY THE OWNER:
(a) The Contractor shall provide all necessary material
and labor for the connection to the Mechanical and Electrical Systems
of all fixtures and equipment requiring such connections and which
fixtures and equipment are furnished by the Owner or are specified
under other sections of these Specifications, If any such fixtures
or equipment are not delivered prior to final acceptance, the services
shall be capped or plugged at walls or floors as directed, and shall
be left ready for future connection. All drainage connections shall
he trapped. All branch water, gas and other, service lines to fixture
and equipment items shall be individually valved. All necessary junc-
tion baxes, disconnect switches etc., shall be installed.
(b) The Contractor shall read the other Sections of the
w;ifications under which items requiring mechanical and electrical
inections are specified for detailed information on what auxiliaries
appurtenances are furnished with the items for installation by
Contractor. Obtain approved shop drawings before roughing -in for
)ment specified under other Sections of the Specifications or by
'owner.
26. MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT BASES, FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS:
(a) Each piece of equipment which is motor driven shall be
furnished with an approved base, which shall be in addition to the
foundation. Each base shall be furnished integral with the equip-
ment or apparatus, or shall be furnished as a separate item, designed
to accommodate the equipment or apparatus.
(b) This Contractor shall provide foundations and sup-
ports for each piece of equipment furnished by him except those
foundations definitely shown to be installed by others. Where
foundations and supports are shown to be provided under another
section of the work and the equipment or apparatus furnished by
this Contractor cannot be safely or satisfactorily operated and/or
installed on the foundations shown on the Drawings and/or specified,
this Contractor shall pay the General Contractor to make the neces-
sary changes in the foundations and supports as may be required to
suit the apparatus or equipment furnished.
(c) In general, fans and other belt -connected equipment
shall incorporate adjustable slide rails for the motors.
(d) In general, motor driven equipment bases, except
L
25-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
I
pump bases, shall employ Korfund, or approved equal spring, cork
or rubber -in -shear for the reduction of, or elimination of vibra-
tion and noise in transmission, however, this Contractor shall
assume full responsibility for the effects resulting from the
noise or vibration of any piece of equipment or apparatus furnished.
by him, and shall take this into account in the design of all bases
and foundations. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, the trans-
mission of noise into occupied areas may be of such moment as to be
objectionable, this condition shall be reported to the Architect.
See also paragraph entitled, "Vibration Isolation".
(e) Base plates for all pumps shall be of heavy cast
iron or steel construction and provided with raised lip drain tap.
(f) The Contractor shall arrange for the construction of
reinforced concrete foundations under all equipment and apparatus.'
Space under foundations shall be prepared by cleaning, chipping and
roughing. All edges shall be beveled and the entire surface rubbed.
Bolts shall be enclosed in sleeves which shall be set to templates,
and all equipment shall be shimmed level and grouted to three-quarter
inch (3/4"). Pad height shall be as follows:
Chillers - 6 inch concrete pad (3" above grade and
3" below).
Pumps - shim level and grout on 10 inch concrete pad;
fill bases with grout
Air Conditioning Units - on 4 inch concrete pad
Hot Water Recirc. Pump - Bracket to wall
Floor mounted electrical Switchboards, Distribution
Panels, etc, - on four inch concrete pads
Transformer - per Swepco requirements (6" minimum)
(g) Supports for expansion tanks and other ceiling suspended
units shall consist of three-quarter inch (3/4") adjustable rods
fastened to structural members. Provide insulation saddles where
required.
25-27. PAINTING:
(a) The Contractor shall paint all apparatus, equipment,
piping, conduit and supports furnished by him as specified below.
(b) All pipes, conduit and apparatus, shall be thoroughly
cleaned and all rust and grease removed before painting. No name
plates, rotating shafts, bearing bronzes or valve stems shall be
painted, nor shall any part furnished in nickel or chrome plate be
painted.
(c)All exposed metal surfaces (except as otherwise speci-
fied above) within finished. spaces, shall be given a suitable prime
coat and two finish coats of lead and oil paint, color as selected.
The interior of ducts visible through grilles shall be painted flat
black.
.(d) All metal surfaces in concealed spaces, including equip-
:•ment rooms, except galvanized surfaces, aluminum, copper and cast
iron, shall be given one coat of an approved asphalt varnish, A.C.
Horn Co., "Hornotol or approved equal.
25-9
I
U
U
C
I
I
C
C
I
I
11
C
U
(b)
' ing complete
instructions.
(e) All A.C. Units, motors, pumps, boilers, chillers, panels
and other apparatus shall be given one prime coat of paint and two finish
coats of engine enamel. When such.items are furnished from the factory
with enamel finish, the Contractor shall touch up all abraded surfaces
with the same type and color of paint.
(f)
All
black
steel
pipe exposed to the weather shall
be
given a suitable
prime
coat
and two finish coats of weather resis-
tant paint,
or a
light
color
selected
by Architect.
(g) All materials shall be best quality of their several
kinds and shall be as specified under the section of the specifica-
tions entitled "PAINTING"..
25-28. FLASHING:
(a) All vent pipes, conduit, etc. which pass through the roof
shall be provided with lead roof flashings, constructed of four pound
(4#) sheet lead, with base.extending no less than ten inches (10") on
each side of the pipe into the roofing and shall be counterflashed.
'For vent pipes, the vertical portion of the flashing shall extend up-
•rard the entire length of the pipe and shall be turned down inside the
s at least two inches (2"). Penetrations other than vent pipes
4y be set in pitch pans per detail approved by the Architect.
(b) All other pipes, ducts, etc., which pass through the
roof shall be flashed with four pound (4#) lead flashing and counter -
flashed to detail approved by the Architect.
25-29. OPEN ENDS.:.
(a) The Contractor shall keep all ends of conduits, ducts
and pipes, including those extending through and above roofs, drains
and fixture branches closed.with caps or plugs so as to prevent dirt
or building materials from entering the ducts, pipes and traps during
the construction.
25-30. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS:
(a) Printed instructions installed in a suitable frame under
glass, covering the operation of each major item of equipment and/or
each system,.shall be displayed at locations designated by the A*chi-
tect.
A bound
manual
shall
be
prepared in
triplicate
contain -
repair
parts lists
and
operating,
service
and
maintenance
(c) The Contractor shall carefully instruct the Owner's oper-
ating man during testing and adjustment period for such length of time
as may be necessary to thoroughly familiarize him with the proper care,
operation and maintenance of the system.
' 25-31. GUARANTEE:
I. (a) Furnish a written certificate guaranteeing all materials,
25-10
I
equipment, and labor to be free of all defects for a period of one (1)
year from and after the date of final acceptance of the work by the Ar-
chitect and further guarantee that if any defects appear within the
stipulated guaranty period, such work shall be replaced without charge.
(b) This guarantee shall be extended to include the capacity
' and integrated performance of the component parts of the various sys-
tems, in strict accordance with the true intent and purpose of the
Specifications. This includes replacement of all materials and equip-
ment which does not perform in accordance with the schedules on the
Drawings and the Specifications.
25-32. GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS:
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install, including
all labor and materials required, the various piping systems as
shown and/or specified, adhering to the general routing and methods
of distribution shown on the drawings, including all required pipe,
fittings, valves,hangers, sleeves, inserts, gauges, thermometers
and such other items and appurtenances as may be required for the
satisfactory operation of the various systems.
(b) All piping shall be installed in the most direct, neat
and workmanlike manner, employing only mechanics skilled in each
respective trade.
(c) Exposed lines shall be run parallel with, or per-
pendicular to, building lines and wherever possible shall be
grouped together for easier'service and identification. Lines
which require a,definite grade for drainage shall take precedence
n routing over all other lines. Wherever possible, horizontal
.nd vertical lines shall be held as close as possible to the walls,
ceilings, struts, members, etc., so as to occupy the minimum space
consistent with the proper requirements for insulation, expansion,
removal of pipe and access to valves, dampers, etc. Concealed work
shall finish off within the. limits permitted by the vertical or hors-
'• zontal chases.
(d) Valves which are required for the control and/or iso-
' 1:ation of any and allcparts of the systems shall be furnished, in-
stalled and located in an accessible position, or made accessible
through removable panels, etc., and where several valves are related
as to function, they shall be grouped in. a battery. Each domes-
' tic hot and cold water branch to a group of fixtures shall be valved
at. the takeoffs from the mains whether or not shown on• the drawings.
Each domestic hot and, cold water riser and branch to a group of fixtures
shall be valved.
(e) Unions or flanges shall be used at connections to all
equipment to facilitate dismantling, and elsewhere as required in
the erection of the pipe or in the installation of valves.
(f) Connections to rotating equipment shall be made in
such manner as to prevent transmission of vibration into the piping
systems.
' 25-11
(g) In general, all heating and cooling water system piping
shall run level or grade up toward the gigh points of the systems
and be provided with air vents, with all low points provided with
three-quarter inch (3/4") drain valves.
('h) All pipe shall be properly reamed after cutting and
threading and shall be cleaned before installation.
(I) Nipples shall be of the same material and composition
as the pipe on which they are installed,, and shall be extra heavy
when unthreaded shoulder is less than one inch (1."). No running
thread nipples will be permitted. .
(j) Swing joints, turns, expansion loops, expansion joints
o.r long offsets, shall be provided wherever shown on the drawings
and wherever necessary to allow fat -the expansion of piping within
the building. Broken„pipes or fittings due to rigid connections must
be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Anchors shall
be installed where shown or required to control expansion of the
piping system. Anchors shall be of the clamp type, securely fas-
tened to the building structure.
' 25-33. SECURING AND SUPPORTING OF PIPE:
(a) All pipes and piping systems shall be substantially
supported and properly held in position.
1 (b) In all cases, piping systems shall be supported from
structural members. Suitable beam clamps shall be provided. In
' no case, however, shall holes be drilled in any building structure
member for pipe supporting purposes. In each case, an extension
piece of the proper size shall be attached to the beam clamp.
(c) The hanging member attached to inserts or beam clamps
shall be a hanger rod having machine cut threads at both ends. Th^.
length of the rods must be selected to meet the individual requ"
ments.
HANGER AND ROD SIZE SCHEDULE (MINIMUM)
Nominal Pipe Size in Inches Rod Size Diameter in inches
' 3/4 to 2, inclusive 3/8
2-1/2 to 3-1/2, inclusive 1/2
4 5/8
' (d) Hangers for pipes 2 inches in diameter and smaller
shall be of the split cast ring type with socket and hangers for
pipe larger than 2 inches in diameter shall be of the adjustable
' clevis type. Hanger rods shall be in a ccordance with the schedule
above.
I
I
(e) The spacing of hangers must depend on the size and
nature of the piping system involved; therefore, no specific hanger
spacing table is provided here. Under no circumstances shall han-
gers or supporting structures be spaced wider. than ten feet (10')
apart in the case of steel -lines, not over eight feet (8') apart
' 25-12
IIY
I
' in the case of copper lines, and five feet (5') apart in the case
of horizontal cast iron pipe. They shall be spaced at closer inter-
' vals whenever necessary to support smaller and less rigid piping
systems properly. The spacing shall, in all cases, be such that
all piping systems shall be supported in a straight and true fashion,
' without sagging between the hangers. Long horizontal lines shall
also be fixed into position i-n such a manner as to prevent swinging
or undue movement of such lines.
•(f) Vertical lines shall be adequately supported at their
bases, either by a -suitable hanger placed in the horizontal line
near the riser, or by a base fitting set on a pedestal or foundation
t and from each floor slab. by means of a clamp type support bearing
on the slab or beam.
' (g) In all instances in which piping systems are supported
in a manner other than as individual piping systems, i.e., by the
•
use of group hangers, the type and construction of the hangers em-
ployed must be indicated on shop drawings submitted to the Archi-
' tect and approved by him before fabrication.
(h) Hangers in contact with copper piping shall be copper
plated ferrous hangers sized for copper tubing.
25-34. SLEEVES AND PLATES:
' (a) Where pipes pass through walls, or floors not on grade,
twenty-two (22) gauge galvanized sheet iron sleeves shall be used.
In pipe chases and above ceilings, sleeves shall extend one and one-
' half inches (1-1/2") beyond each surface. Sleeves other than in
chases and above ceilings shall be made flush with the finished sur-
face. All sleeves, except those in pipe chases, above ceilings and
in equipment rooms shall be covered with chrome plated floor, wall or
ceiling plates. The size of sleeves shall be such as to readily per-
mit the subsequent insertion of pipe of the proper size. In the case
• of insulated lines the diameter of the sleeves shall be at least one-
' half inch (1/2") larger than the outsidediameter of the insulation.
(b) Sleeves through foundation walls and slabs on grade
I. shall be galvanized steel with a stop plate welded to sleeve and
set in wall or floor. Sleeves shall be caulked watertight with
oakum and lead.
' 25-35. UNIONS:
(a) Union connections in ferrous pipe which is two and one-half
' inches (2-1/2") in diameter or smaller, shall be of malleable iron
with bronze seats and ground joints.,
(b) Union connections in nonferrous pipe, which is two and
one-half Inches (2-1/2") in diameter or smaller, shall be ground
joint, brass body, bronze seat unions.
(c) Union connections in pipe larger than two and one-half
Inches (2-1/2") in diameter shall be three-piece flange union of the
25-13
fl
ball joint type with bronze seat ring.
25-36. PIPE, VALVES AND FITTINGS:
(a) Cast iron soil pipe and fittings - service weight cast
iron bell and spigot, caulked or with gasketed mechanical hub and
spigot joints. No -hub joints shall be permitted on above ground vent
lines only.
(b) Copper pipe and fittings - ASTM B88-62, Type "L" copper
•
water tube above ground and type "K" underground with wrought copper
sweat type fittings. All screwed valves in copper piping shall be
installed with threaded adaptors.
(c) Lead pipe shall conform in weight and thickness to
commercial designation 'light'.
(d) Caulking ferrules and soldering nipples - best quality
red brass.
(e) Steel pipe - ASTM A-120, conforming to ASA 836.10
dimensional standards. Up to two inches (2") butt welded; two and
one-half inches (2-1/2") and over, lap welded. Schedule 40 up to
' six,inches (6") and schedule 30 for eight inches (8") and over.
•(f) Cast iron fittings - ASA Bl6d dimensional standard for
one hundred and twenty-five pounds (125#), screwed.
(g) Malleable, iron fittings - one hundred and fifty pound
(150#) banded pattern screwed fittings.
(h) All welding fittings shall be Tube Turn or approved
equal schedule 40 black steel long radius welding fittings.
(i) Gate valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be Crane, Walworth,
Nibco or approved equal and shall be equal to Crane No. 431 with
screwed ends, wedge disc, rising stem, all brass, one hundred fifty pound (150#) valves. Gate valves three inches (3") and larger shall
be equal to Crane No. 464-1/2 or 465-1/2 as required wedge gate, iron
body, brass trimmed 0S&Y valves.
(j) Check valves - two inch (2".) and smaller shall be Crane,
Walworth, Nibco or.approved equal and shall be equal to Crane No. 34,
all brass, swing check, screwed ends, brass trim, suitable for one
hundred fifty pounds (150#) working pressure. Check valves two and
one-half inches (2-1/2") and larger shall be Crane No. 373 or.approved
equal swing check, flanged ends, brass trim for one hundred fifty
pounds (150#) working pressure.
`• (k) Globe valves shall be Crane, Walworth, Nibco or approved
equal and shall be equal to Crane No. 14-1/2-P, all brass, one hundred
fifty pound (150f) plug type disc globe valves.
• ' (1) Cocks- two inch (2") and smaller shall be Crane, Wal-
worth, Nibco or approved equal and shall be equal to Crane No'. 250;
Cocks larger than 2" shall be Nordstrum lubricated plug cocks for
t 25-14
125# working pressure and with lubricant suitable for temperatures
to be encountered.
(m) Strainers - pipeline strainers shall be Crane, Sarco
' or approved equal wye type with proper screens for the fluid in-
volved, 125 psi, copper in copper lines, steel in steel lines,
screwed 2" and under and flanged 2-1/2" and larger.
25-37. PIPING AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION:
(a) All service piping which is accessible for maintenance
' operations shall be identified with vinyl stick -on color bands or
legends at locations as follows (markers shall conform to ASA Bulletin
A-13):
(1) Adjacent to each valve (except on plumbing fixtures
and equipment).
(2) At each branch main take -off
(3) At each pipe passage through wall and floor con-
, struction.
(4) On all horizontal pipe runs - marked every forty
' feet (40').
(b) Valves required for operation of the system shall have
brass tags with designations corresponding to those in written oper-
' ating instructions.
25-38. CROSS CONNECTIONS AND INTERCONNECTIONS:
(a) No plumbing fixture, device, or piping shall be in-
stalled which will provide a cross connection or interconnection
between a distributing supply for drinking or domestic purposes
' and a polluted supply, such as a drainage system or a soil or waste
pipe or which will permit or make possible the backflow of sewage,
polluted water or waste into the water supply system.
25-39. PIPE ASSEMBLY:
' (a) Cast iron bell and sipgot pipe and fittings shall be
assembled with caulked joints, formed by ramming in place a ring
of packing oakum and secured tight with firmly caulked lead to a
depth of not less than one inch (1"). In lieu of the above, ap-
' proved, gasketed, hub and spigot joints may be used. Approved
"no -hub" joints may be used for vent piping above grade only.
' (b) Joints between lead pipe and cast iron or steel pipe
shall be made with caulking ferrules, solder nipples or bushings,
and all lead joints shall be full wiped to minimum thickness of
' three -eighths inch (3/8"), with an exposed surface to each side
of the joint of not less than three-quarter inch (3/4").
• (c) Copper pipe shall be assembled with wrought copper
sweat -type fittings using a suitable non -corrosive flux paste, and
25-.15
31
I.
n
n
H
C
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ii
I
I
Li
I
J
Easy -Flo or Sil-Fos solder.
(d) Threads used in the assembly of pipe shall conform
to ASA dimensional standards B2, and shall be cut true and clean.
Pipe ends shall be securely squared and reamed to remove all burrs
and made up tight with an approved pipe lubricant applied to the
male threads only. Pipe shall be cleaned after reaming.
(e)* All welding shall be performed by welders certified
under the requirements of the Arkansas Gas Pipeline Code (per Arkan-
sas State Plumbing Code 15.2.5.5 (b). Where side outlets cannot
be made with a standard reducing tee and one reducer, Thread -O -Lets
and Weld-O-Lets.may be used.
25-40. STERILIZATION:
(a) The entire hot and cold water and drinking water piping
systems shall be thoroughly sterilized with a solution containing
not less than fifty (50) parts per million available chlorine. The
chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine conforming to
the requirement t of U. S. Army Specification No. 401 or sodium hypo -
chlorite solution conforming .to the requirements of Federal Speci-
fication -0-B-441, Grade D. The sterilizing solution shall be allowed
to remain in the system for a period of eight (8) hours, during which
time valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times.
After sterilization, the solution shall be flushed from the system
with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater
than two -tenths (0.2.) part per million, unless otherwise directed.
25-41. TRAPS (PLUMBING):
(a) Each fixture and piece of
nection to the drainage system, except
waste, shall be equipped with a trap.
supplied with the fixtures. Each trap
the fixture as possible and no fixture
Traps installed on hub and spigot pipe
installed on threaded pipe shall be re
on shower drains shall be deep seal.
25-42. GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS:
(a) The Contractor shall
and discharge of each pump, inlet
and cooling coil and elsewhere as
pressure gauges, with. suitable
formation concerning pressure
shall be Weksler, Marsh, Treri
Weksler Type 900R, with four and
cast case.
range,
within
ce or
equipment requiring con -
fixtures with continuous
Traps are specified to be
shall be placed as near to
shall be double trapped.
shall be cast iron. Traps
cess drainage pattern. Traps
furnish and install, on the suc
and outlet of each chiller, hea
required or as shown on the.dra
and trycocks to furnish in -
the various systems. Gauges
approved equal and similar to
one-half inch (4-1/2") dial and
(b) The Contractor shall
on the drawings, in the inlet and
chiller, heating and cooling coil
easily readable, t4eksler, Trerice,
curial thermometers with nine inch
Lion
ting
wings,
furnish and install, where shown
outlet of each boiler, water
in a position where they are
American or approved equal, mer-
(.9") scales, angle or straight
LI
25-16
stem, as required. Water thermometers shall have separable sockets
and extension necks where required. The Contractor shall furnish and
install in the discharge air, return air, outside air, mixed air and
between heating and cooling coils at each A.C. Unit a mercurial
thermometer similar to those described above, with not less than 12"
sensing elements and extension necks where required. Thermometers
shall be arranged at appropriate angles and located in appropriate
' locations for ease of reading.
• (c) Where shown on the drawings, furnish and install gauge
cocks and thermometer wells as follows:
, (1) Gauge cocks shall be Weksler, Trerice, Marsh or
..approved equal and is:ha.Tl be equal and similar,.to Trerice No. 865
"T" handle gauge cock, polished brass, one -quarter inch (1/4") size.
(2) Thermometer wells shall be designed to hold an
' engraved stem thermometer. Wells shall be made of heavy brass and
shall have gasketed dust caps and chains. Wells shall be set ver-
tical or at an angle so as to retain oil..
,.
' 25-43. ELECTROLYSIS PROTECTION:
(a) Where aluminum is in contact with masonry, concrete
' or any dissimilar .metal, it shall be insulated by a heavy: coat of
alkali resistant asphaltic or bituminous paint applied to. both
surfaces and allowed to dry before assembly or installation.
(b) Dielectric fittings such as couplings, unions or
flanges, shall be installed to isolate pipes and pipes and tanks
of dissimilar metals. Isolation shall be accomplished by non-
' metallic, unthreaded sleeves or gaskets or a combination of
both. Fittings shall be so designed that the installing tools cannot
come in contact with the insulating material. Materials shall with-
' stand a pressure of 125 psig. and a temperature of 300° F. similar
fittings shall be used where gas pipes enter the building.
Li
I
I
I
I
25-44. TESTING AND ADJUSTING:
(a) All water piping systems shall be properly tested to
assure their being absolutely tight. In the case of pipes which
are to be insulated, these tests shall be completed and the piping
system proved to be absolutely tight, before any insulation is
applied.. Wherever pipes are placed so that they will be ultimately
concealed, these tests shall be conducted and the absolute tight-
ness of each piping system shall be demonstrated, before that
system is concealed and made inaccessible. The procedure of these
tests shall consist of subjecting a piping system to a hydrosta-
tic pressure of one hundred and fifty pounds (1500 per square
inch gauge for a period of not less than eight (8) hours. During
this test period, all leaks in pipe, fittings and accessories, in
the particular piping system which is being tested, shall be stop-
ped and the hydrostatic test shall again be applied. This proce-
dure shall be repeated until for an entire eight (8) hour period
no leaks can be found while the system being tested is subjected to
the pressure mentioned above.
I
25-17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L. J
I
I
I
(b) After the vertical lines of soil pipe, waste, down-
spouts and other parts of the sanitary systems have been set, all
outlets shall temporarily be "plugged up". The pipes shall be
filled with water testing the system in sections. If, after twenty-
four (24) hours, the level of the water has been lowered by leakage,
the leaks must be found and stopped by the Contractor, and the water
level shall again be raised and the test repeated, until, after a
twenty-four (24) hour retention period, there shall be no percep-
tible lowering of the water level of the system being tested. The
testing of vertical risers, branches, mains, etc. shall be made under
the supervision of, and shall be approved by, the local Plumbing In-
spector, and the entire. system shall meet all requirements of the
Local and State Plumbing and Sewer Regulations. The Contractor shall,
after all tests have been completed, provide for the Owner, without ex-
tra cost, a certificate which shall certify that the plumbing sys-
tems of the building have been inspected and approved by the Plumbing
Inspector and that all fees therefor have been paid by the Contractor.
After testing operations are complete, all soil and waste lines shall
be thoroughly cleaned with an approved type wire sewer brush.
(c) All gas piping systems shall be very carefully test-
ed by the Contractor. These piping systems shall first be sub-
jected to a pneumatic pressure test of one hundred pounds (100#)
per square inch. While the systems are subjected to this air pres-
sure, all welded joints and threaded joints shall have a soapy wa-
ter solution applied for the purpose of detecting minute, as well
as larger, leaks. If leaks are found in the welded line they shall
be repaired by clipping and rewelding operations. Alternate test-
ing and rewelding operations shall be repeated until the gas piping
systems are absolutely tight. If leaks occur in the case of thread-
ed joints, such leaks may be.eliminated by replacing the fittings
or properly tightening. them. The entire gas piping system shall be
subjected to a pneumatic test pressure of one hundred pounds (100#)
per square inch for a period of twenty-four (24) hours and demon-
strated to be absolutely tight.
(d) Prior to operation, all piping systems shall be tho-
roughly flushed out. The steam and condensate piping systems shall
be operated for a period, of eight (8) hours with the thermostatic
elements of all traps removed and with all condensate wasted.
(e) All water systems shall be properly balanced
(f) Each and every phase of the air conditioning, heat-
ing and ventilating systems shall be operated separately, or in
conjunction one with the other, for a sufficient period of time
to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Architect the ability
of the olant to meet the capacity and performance reouirements
while maintaining design conditions in accordance with the true
intent and purpose of these specifications. Hourly readings shall
be recorded on outside dry and wet bulb temperatures and on inside
temperatures in each space, hot water temperatures, chilled water
temperatures, entering and leaving coil temperatures, etc. The
I
25-18
n.
Ji
I. volume of air at each outlet and inlet, fan and coil performance
data, etc., shall be tabulated and required balancing performed by
engineering personnel skilled, trained and experienced in the per-
formance of these functions. Previous to such performance tests,
' the Contractor shall have set all valves, dampers, motors, con-
trollers, thermostats, etc., and shall have the -plant operating and
maintaining design temperatures, humidity and air circulation
throughout all areas of the building. Design conditions shall be
those for the current season at the time of the tests. The Con-
tractor shall, also, at the proper time, make such additional ad-
' justments as may be required for the opposite season, and shall be
prepared to repeat the performance and capacity tests under the ex-
treme of both summer and winter operating conditions.
' (g) Each piece of equipment shall be operated separately
or in conjunction with other equipment (as may be required) and
for a sufficient period of time to demonstrate its ability to meet
' the capacity and performance requirements of the specifications and
to demonstrate the ability of its auxiliaries and control devices
to perform their intended and proper functions.
' (h) No piping system shall be covered until tested and
proved tight.
' (1) All tests shall be performed In the presence of the
architect or his authorized representative.
' 25-45. VIBRATION ISOLATION:
(a) Transmission of objectionable vibration or structure-
' borne noises to occupied areas by equipment installed under this
Contract will not be permitted. This Contractor shall furnish and
• install vibration isolators for all rotating and reciprocating
equipment and piping connected thereto as required to comply wit,
' the limitation hereinafter specified.
(b) Isolators for such equipment in the building shall t
' guaranteed to limit vibration transmission to 5% (five percent)
at lowest disturbing frequency. The manufacturer shall be one wht.
is regularly engaged in the manufacture of vibration and noise control
equipment. Isolator sizes shall be determined by the manufacturer
' and installed in accordance with his instructions. All isolators
shall be as manufactured by Korfund, or approved equal.
I. (c) Where recommended by the isolation manufacturer, pipe
connections to the isolated equipment shall be rpovided with flex-
ible, metal reinforced rubber connectors. Connectors shall be in-
stalled in a plane so that their axis is perpendicular to the axis
of maximum movement and in the sizes as recommended by the isolator
manufacturer for the pressure and temperature conditions. Connectors
less than two and one-half inches (2-1/2") in size shall have one
male and one swivel female fitting.
I
25-19
I
25-46. BELT DRIVES:
(a) Each motor -driven machine which is not direct connected
shall be equipped with a V-belt'drive, as specified herein.
(b) Belts shall be endless, of reinforced cord and rubber
construction. Cords shall be of long staple cotton, rayon, nylon,
' or other suitable textile fibers. Belts shall be of correct cross,
section to fit properly in the sheave grooves. Belts for each
drive shall be carefully matched.
(c) Sheaves shall be of cast-iron or steel, bored to fit
properly on the shafts and secured with keys of proper size. The
use of set screws alone will not be permitted. Pitch d'iameters.of
sheaves shall be not less than 2.65 inches for "3V" section belts,
3.0 inches for "A" section belts, 5.4 inches for "B" section belts,
7.1 inches for "SV" section belts, 9.0 inches for "C" section belts
' and 13.0 inches for. "D" section belts. Variable and adjustable
pitch sheaves shall,. unless otherwise specified, be selected so
:i>lat.the required rip'`.m. will be obtained with the sheave set ap-
proximately.in mid -position and the pitch. diameter in that position
shat.1 be as specif'ied.:above.
jr
(d) DrivingT and driven shafts shall be set parallel and
• Sheaves shall be so located that corresponding grooves will be in
• th.e same plane. The..driven sheave of each drive shall have the
`same groove spaci,ngas the motor sheave;. except standard.groove
' ;`,sheaves may be used:with variable pitch sheaves having less.than
"four grooves where recommended by the manufacturer.
(e) The rating of each drive shall be as recommended by
'
the manufacturer for the service but shall be at least 1.5 times
the nameplate rating of the motor, with proper allowance for sheave
.diameters, center distance and arc of contact less than 180 degrees.
I. For variable speed drives the horsepower rating shall be figured
at the specified mid -position operation conditions.
I
I
I
(f) Each drive u
tag and a sticker applied
sheave. Tag and stickers
city type.
(g) Speeds shall
sing high capacit
in a conspicuous
shall state that
not exceed 5,000
25-20
y belts shall have a
manner to the motor and
the belts are high capa-
ft- per minute.
' SECTION 26
' PLUMBING.
SPECIAL NOTE: Refer to the Supplementary General Provisions
Applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.
26-01. SCOPE OF WORK:
(a) The work included under this Section consists in the
furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and
the performing of all operations in connection with the complete
'installation of the Plumbing systems.
(b) All work shall be done in accordance with the plans
I.
and'specifi.cations, the Plumbing ordinances and the rules and regu-
'lations of all Local, State and Federal departments and authorities
having jurisdiction.
26-02. SERVICE CONNECTIONS:
(a) This Contractor shall arrange with the proper author-
ities and utility companies for following service connections,
verifying locations and arrangements and paying all charges per-
taining thereto, all as shown on the Drawings.
' 1) Water Service
2) Gas Service
I.
3 Sanitary Sewer
26-03. SYSTEM OF SANITARY, WASTE AND VENT PIPING:
' *(a) This Contractor shall furnish and install, waste, sotand vent lines to serve all the fixtures located in the building
and such items of equipment as require same. These shall be in-
' stalled in accordance with all applicable Codes but In no case shall the
pipe used be smaller than the sizes shown on the Drawings.
' (b) All soil, waste and vent lines shall be in service
weight cast iron soil pipe with bell and spigot joints and attached
with service weight cast iron soil pipe fittings unless otherwise
noted on the drawings.
I
I
I
L
(c) Horizontal waste and soil pipe shall be given a grade
of one -quarter inch (1/4") per foot where possible and not less
than one -eighth inch (1/8") per foot. Vent connections to stacks
shall be made with inverted fittings. All changes in pipe sizes on
soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings or
recessed reducers. All changes in direction shall be made by the
appropriate use of.forty-five degree (45°) wyes, long -sweep quarter
bends, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends, except that sanitary tees
or crosses may be used on vertical lines for fixture connections unless
prohibited by Code.
(d) At the Contractor's option, "Ty -Seal" or approved equal
gasketed joints may be used in cast iron piping. "No -Hub" joints
will be permitted on above ground vent lines only.
I 26-1
1 26-04. SYSTEM OF HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING:
1 (a) All hot, cold and recirculating water piping in the
building shall be run in Type "L" hard temper copper water tube,
assembled with wrought copper "sweat" fittings using "Easy -Flo"
1 solder or 95/5 solder and a suitable flux.
(b) All underground water piping shall be Type "K" hard tem-
per copper, assembled as specified above.
26,-05. SYSTEM OF GAS SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION:
1 (a) Underground natural gas service piping shall be fabri-
cated of welded black steel pipe which shall be assembled by welding
with Schedule 40 welding fittings or as specified under (c) below.
1 (b) Underground piping shall be mill coated and wrapped
and provided with cathodic protection in accordance with the Arkansas
• Plumbing Code requirements. Repair any damaged coatings at joints
• so coating is continuous. Install insulating couplings 'where gas
pipes enter the building.
1 (c) Natural gas piping within the building shall be fa-
• bricated of Schedule 40 black steel pipe. The pipe shall be assem-
• bled with screwed pattern malleable iron, 150# air tested, fittings.
1 Gas piping 1-1/2" and larger may, at the Contractor's option, be as-
sembled by welding using schedule 40 welding fittings.
(d) Install manual gas cocks at all items of gas using
1 equipment which shall be in addition to factory furnished cocks
with equipment.
1 (e) Gas piping within the building shall be run exposed
and shall not under any circumstances be run above ceilings, in
furred spaces, in chases or under slabs.
1 26-06. CLEANOUTS:
(a) A test tee, with cleanout plug, shall be installed at
1 the foot of each soil stack. Interior cleanouts shall be installed
at each change of direction of all soil, waste and drain lines, and
in straight runs of pipe shall be installed as shown on the Drawings.
' Cleanout plugs shall be of heavy cast brass or bronze, shall be fit-
ted with countersunk heads where finished floors occur, and where
vinyl or other floor covering is specified, shall have one -eighth
inch (1/8") recess inside brass rim which shall be filled with floor
' covering material. Cleanouts shall be of the same size at the pipe
in which they are installed, except that cleanouts larger than four
inches (4") in diameter shall not be required. All cleanouts shall
' be made accessible. Wall cleanouts shall have chrome plated covers.
Outside cleanouts. shall be cast Iron set in 12"xl2" concrete -flush
with grade.
26-07. AIR CHAMBERS:
(a) Air chambers shall be as manufactured by Zurn, Josam,
Wolverine or an approved equal and shall be equal to Wolverine
1 26-2
I '
"Tap -Trap", one inch (1") diameter by six inches (6") long, with
one-half inch (1/2") connection. Air chambers shall be provided on
all supplies, both hot and cold, near each faucet, control valve,
and flush valve, whether or not shown on the Drawings. ,
I. (b) Where fixtures are located in battery, install air
chamber at the end of the horizontal. run.
' 26-0B. HOSEBIBS:
(a) Hosebibs shall be Chicago Faucet No. 952, or approved
' equal, chrome plated with vacuum breaker and loose key handle.
26-09. WALL HYDRANTS:
I.
(a) Wall hydrants shall be Woodford Model 95P or approved
equal, as manufactured by Josam or Zurn, flush freezeless type with
, Toose key handle, vacuum breaker and optional brass type casing.
26-1.0. FLOOR DRAINS AND OPEN SITE DRAINS:
(a) Floor drains shall be Josam #30000-7E or approval
' with 7" diameter heavy duty adjustable Nickeloy strainer and
`iron body.
I
(b) Open site drains shall be Josam #30000-7E2 or app
equal, with 7" diameter adjustable brass strainer, 4" high by
round brass funnel and cast iron body.
' 26-1l. FIXTURE INSTALLATION:
(a) All fixtures shall be rigidly supported by approved
metal hangers, chairs, etc., and all floor outlet fixtures shall he
rigidly secured to the floor by approved brass floor flange, screwed
or bolted to the floor.
U
I
I
I
C
I
I
(b) Each fixture supply shall have a shut-off valve at the
fixture. These valves are to be adjusted so as to prevent excessive
pressure.
26-12. PLUMBING FIXTURES:
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and set according to the
manufacturer's directions, the following fixtures. All fixtures'
shall be of first quality and any fixture or fixtures which are
marred or broken before the time of acceptance of the completed
Contract shall be replaced with new fixture or fixtures. Carefully
protect all fixtures with heavy paper wrappings. Fixtures shall be
carefully and thoroughly cleaned after all painting and cleaning
down of the building has been done. All fixtures shall be as manu-
factured by Crane, American Standard, Kohler or approved equal and
shall be equal to the Crane fixtures specified below. All exposed
brass shall be chromium plated.
(1) Water Closets marked WC: Crane "Placidus"
3-446, or approved, equal rim fed siphon jet elongated rim whirlpool
I
26-3
I
action. vitreous china 1-1/2" top spud wall hung closet, Sloan "Royal"
' #110 flush valve with vacuum breaker and l" screw driver angle stop
and flush connections. Beneke 523CH-HPSS white solid plastic, ex-
tended back, open front elongated rim seat with check hinge, stain-
, less steel tube and hinge posts, less cover. Josam,C830W vertical
4".hub and spigot adjustable double fitting with Universal closet car -
trier where closets are back to back and Josam C83211 or C385W as re-
quired vertical adjustable 4" hub and spigot single fitting with
Universal closet carrier where closets are not back to back. Order
with auxiliary inlets size 2" If required..
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
I
H
L
I
(2)` .Water closets marked WC -l: Same as WC except
mount at proper height: for wheel chair use.
(3) Urinals marked UR: Crane .Cromwell" No. 7-187
'.vitreous china wall urinal with integral extended shields, flushing
rtm and trap, 3/4 top,spud, 2" SPS female outlet connection, sup -
`porting hangers, driver. angle stop and flush, connection.
(4) Urinals marked UR-l: Same as UR except mounted at
proper hieght for the handicapped.
(5) Lavatories marked L: Crane 1-194S "Norwich" •20"x18
vitreous china lavatory with back, rectangular basin, splash lip,
front overflow two Soap depressions, drilled for carrier with
.:*concealed arms, #8-2175A supply fitting with aerator except with
:acrylic handles, #8-5002 angle supplies with stops, #8-5222 PO grid
with 1-1/4" tailpiece, #8-5260 sixteen gauge 1-1/4" dast brass ad-
justable 'P' trap with cleanout and waste to wall. Furnish and In-
stall Josam C-300 or approved equal lavatory carrier with concealed
arms, leveling,and securing screws, steel pipe uprights and block
bases, designed to:fit the lavatory specified above.
(6) Lavatories marked L-1: Crane No. 1H-360 or approved
.°equal 20"x27" vitreous china wheel chair lavatory with rectangular
;.basin, splash lip, front overflow, two soap depressions, drilled for
carrier with concealed arms, mounting height for wheel chair use, No.
'$H. -2055A gooseneck supply fitting with aerator, wrist action blade
°handles, PO grid strainer and offset waste' fitting. No. 8H-5027
supplies with loose key stops, Note 805260 Cast brass 1-1/4" adjust;
"P trap with cleanout and waste to wall. Furnish and install Josam
`C-300 or approved equal lavatory carrier with concealed• arms,.level.ing
and securing screws, steel pipe uprights and block bases, designed to
:fit lavatory specified above.
(7) Mop 'Sink marked MS: Stern -Williams SB-501 36"x36"x12"
•high outside terazzo mop sink with mesh reinforcing and tiling flange
on one side, stainless steel cap all sides. C.P. brass strainer plate
T-15-VB supply fitting with integral stops, spout with bucket hook,
hose thread end, vacuum breaker, brace to wall, all CP T-35 36" long
3/4" Bose with chrome coupling and wall hook and CP cast brass wall
.bracket.
(8) Electric Water Coolers marked EWC: Halsey -Taylor
model HBW13A or approved equal, simulated recessed wall hung water
coolers with stainless steel anti -splash top and splash back,
II
I
26-4
I
I
I
H
removable drain strainer, two -stream mound -building projector self -
closing push-button operated with automatic stream regulator, her-
metically sealed compressor, double wall storage tank with refri-
gerant tube and water tube hot tin bonder1zed to tank and tank in-
terior hot tin plated, 125 psi working pressure, pre -cooler, dual
controls, bonderzied,steel cabinet apron and color selected by
Architect.
EWC except
pants.
(9) Electric Water Cooler marked EWC-l: Same as
mounted at proper height for use by wheel chair occu-
(10) Sink marked S: Elkay LR-1918 self -rimming ledge back
I. 18 gauge type 302 (18-8) stainless steel with LK-6K-H finish and
sound dampened on the underside. LK-89 control bar faucet with dui;'
:mo,unted escutcheon„ 8" high, goose neck swing spout with aerator., hut
' hand cold water controls on 4" centers, drill sink for two faucet hn3a
.And.cold water controls on 4" centers, drill sink for two faucet ^'
LK-18Bdrain fitting ;and PO strainer and tailpiece, cast:.brass":ada':r
' °P" trap with cleanout and waste to wall.
26:13. HOT WATER RECIRCULATING PUMP:
'• (a) Furnish 'and install a Bell and Gossett, Taco, Thrush,
'or. approved equal, in -line circulator. Pump shall be of all bronz:.
construction.
• (b) Hot water circulating pump shall be supported inde-
pendently of the piping system and installed in a manner tc
any strain on the piping system.
.26-14. WATER HEATER:
(a) Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings:
Ruud, Day & Night,. National or approved equal, water heater aqua'
and similar to the•.heater scheduled. Heater shall be AGA approv.:
shall be designed for use with 1,000 BTU per cubic foot natural z. _.
shall be equipped with thermostatic combustion and safety contr
including namual and automatic gas valves, gas pressure.regulat_.
and safety pilot., glass -lined tank, insulated metal jacket with
baked enamel finish, extruded magnesium anode rod, backdraft di-
verter, ASME rated side outlet combination temperature and pressure
relief'valve, etc.
(b) Safety pilot shall be of the one hundred (100%) percent
shut-off type. Heater shall meet the requirements of the Arkansas
State Boiler. Code. Heater shall have three year commercial warranty.
(c) Furnish
and install
UL
class
B
flue, metalbesots, or
approved
equal,
with
roof
jack and
Belmont
cap.
26-15. GAS, MAKE-UP AND DRAIN PIPING:
(a) The Plumbing Contractor shall extend a gas and a water
makeup line to within 3` of all equipment requiring same. Provide
open sight drains at locations shown for all equipment and elsewhere
as required.
26-5
•
26-16. INSULATION:
• (a) All cold, hot and recirculating water piping shall be
insulated with Armstrong type FR (25 max. flame spread and 150 max.
' smoke developed) or approved equal 1/2" thick Armaflex.. All joints
shall be sealed vapor tight on cold water piping. Insulation shall
be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
I.
1
1
1
u
1
1
I.
1
1
1
26-6
I
' SECTION 27
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
' SPECIAL NOTE: Refer to the Supplementary General Provisions
Applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.
' 27-01. SCOPE OF WORK:
(a) The work included, under this Section shall consist
of the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, dray-
age, rigging, fees, permits, etc., necessary or reasonably required
for the complete installation and operation of all Heating, Ventila-
ting and Air Conditioning work as shown on the Drawings and/or.here-
' in specified. The entire work shall be deliveredcomplete and In
perfect working order.
•t ..27-02. VENTILATING FANS:
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and completely install
' all supply and exhaust fans as shown and scheduled on the Draw-
ings. Fans shall be. complete with motors, drive equipment and
vibration Isolation supports.
(b) Each fan shall have the capacity scheduled. Fans
shall be rated and constructed in accordance with NAFM and the
ASHRAE Standard Test Codes. All V -belt drives shall be as herein -
1 before specified. Each fan wheel shall be statically and dynamically
balanced and shall be free from'any objectionable vibration or noise.
Bearings shall be self -aligning and self -oiling with adequate oil
' reserve.
(c) Utility vent sets shall be Peerless, Buffalo, Trane or
approved equal, utility belted vent sets as scheduled.
• 27-03. BOILERS:
(a) Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings,
package type natural gas fired firebox boilers as manufactured by
' American Standard Kewanee or approved equal and with the capacity
scheduled on the Drawings. Units shall be hot water types low
pressure (30 psi), ASME Bailer Code construction, UL listed, 80%
efficient when fired with 1,000 BTU/cubic foot natural gas, forced
' draft and shall be equipped with Factory Mutual approved combustion
and safety controls and accessories. Boilers shall be equipped with
all required accessories and appurtenances and any optional accessories
specified below or required to meet Factory Mutual approval'. Units
shall be factory assembled.
(b) Boilers shall be three pass compact firebox design
' ,.:with arched upright,,crown sheet and two passes of fire tubes.
..,Boilers shall have at least 5.4 square feet of water side heating
Surface per boilerhorsepower including :a minimum of 1.25 square
'te.et of primary heati.pg. surface per BHP: Heat, release 'shall not
t:s -
27-1 __.
I.
exceed 58,000 BTU/cubic foot of furnace volume. A pyrex observation
port shall be provided at the rear of the firebox. Front flue
access cover, with refractory securely keyed in place and of a size
permitting easy access to all fire tubes, shall, be mounted on a gas
' type., insulated front smoke box. Gas tight rear smoke box shall be
provided with an optional top outlet. Units shall have a steel
jacket with glass or mineral fiber insulation and smooth enamel
finish. All tubes shall be set with a roller expander at each end
(no welding of tubes to tube sheets nor use of baffeling to provide
second or third pass will be permitted). Spinner blades shall. be
' provided in the first pass of the tubes. Tubes shall be 3" size.
Units shall be assembled with trim, insulated jackets, refractory
filled skid -type base and burner at the factory. Furnish wash -out
plug socket wrench and flue cleaner with handle. Standard trim
I. shall include low water cut-off, ASME side outlet relief valve and
combination altitude gauge and thermometer. Optional equipment shall
include relief door, top vent, operating limit control, safety limit
' control, control wiring harness, flue gas temperature gauge, burner
mounting plate with retaining ring for refractory and factory burner
mounting and Factory Mutual approved controls and auxiliaries.
27-04. BOILER STACKS:
(a) Furnish and install boiler stacks from each boiler.
' Stacks shall be fabricated of ten gauge (10) welded black steel,
shall extend through the roof and shall terminate with a "Coolie"
.type cap located high enough so that the outlet area is 1-1/2 times
t the stack area. Stacks shall be flashed and counterflashed where
they penetrate the roof in a manner which allows for expansion and
contraction of the stack, protects both combustible and non-combus-
tible construction materials from the temperature of the stack sur-
face and provides a watertight installation. Method of penetrating
roof shall be subject to approval by the Architect. The portion of
the stack which is inside the building shall be insulated as here-
' inafter specified.
27-05. BOILER PREPARATION:
(a) Before -the boilers are placed in operation, the Con-
• tractor shall wash the boilers down with washing soda to remove
all grease, etc. Cleaning solution shall consist of one-half
t
pound (1/2#) of caustic soda and one-half pound (1/2#) of soda
ash for each five hundred (500) square feet EDR boiler rating
and admitted to the boiler by removing the safety vi..lve. To
' wash the boilers, the return line shall be tapped and the supply
pipe shall be provided with a temporary valved drain line with
main supply pipe capped or valved off. With a moderate fire the boilers
shall be operated with additional quantities of washing soda added until
• all dirt, grease, etc., has been washed out through the various drain
.._...connections. Aft.er.._sleaning the.boi.lers__sha.l1�.be backwa.shed_.wiah, a.
hose.
1 (b) Before the boilers are operated without supervision,
all safety and automatic controls shall be checked, and a per-
formance test run to. the satisfaction of the State Boiler Inspector
as hereinbefore specified.
I 27-2
•
27-0G. PACKAGE WATER CHILLER:
• (a) Furnish and install a packaged air cooled water chiller
t for outdoor installation as manufactured by Trane,'Carrier, York or
an approved equal of the capacity scheduled on the Drawings and equal
to the Trane chiller_ scheduled.
I. ' I
(b) Unit's shall have 1/4" welded steel frame, 12 and 14
gauge steel panels and access doors all with corrosion resistant
enamel. Compressor shall be direct drive, 1750 RPM, semi -hermetic
reciprocating type with multi -step capacity control, unloaded start-
ing, forced feed oil system with filters, magnetic plugs, crank case
heater, standard foam breaker, spring loaded cylinder heads and non -
flexing ring valves. Evaporators shall be direct expansion, shell
' and tube with seamless copper tubes roller expanded into tube sheets,
dual refrigerant circuits, ASME Code tube and shell construction,
3/4" weatherproof insulation and heater cables for protection to
I -20°. Motor shall be suction gas cooled with two heat sensors in
motor windings. Install heating tape under pipe insulation to give
the same degree of protection for chilled water supply and return
piping subject to freezing and connect thi's tape to the same control
• as the chiller heater cable. (This shall include all outdoor piping
which is not 3 feet or more underground). Unit shall have belt -
driven vertical discharge condenser fans with permanently lubricated
ball bearing fan motors with thermal overload protection. Condenser
coils shall be copper tube aluminum fin factory tested, with sub -
cooling circuit with liquid accumulator. Unit shall have weathertight
control panel with seperate electrical and refrigerant sections, shall
be completely factory wired requiring only a single power source, shall
be factory charged with refrigerant and oil, shall have factory pneu-
matic electric controls for capacity modulation and head pressure con-
trol. Starter shall be part winding type. Unit shall be placed in
operation under the supervision of factory trained personnel. Unit
shall have flow switches, gauges, circuit breaker, pneumatic controls,
coil guards, low limit thermostat, anti -recycle timer, hot gas by-pass
and timed periodic pump out.
• 27-07. CHILLED AND HOT WATER PUMPS:
(a) Pumps shall be of capacities scheduled, horizontally
split case, double suction, single stage, volute type, direct con-
nected through flexible connections to dripproof electrical motors.
(b) Pumps and motors shall be mounted on single cast iron
t or heavy steel bedplates with raised lips and drains. Pumps shall
• be carefully shimmed and grouted on bases.
I (c) Casings shall be close grained cast iron, equipped
with bronze casing wearing rings, drain and vent cocks. Impellers
shall be bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, and equipped
with bronze wearing rings. Impeller diameters shall not exceed
' ninety percent (90%). of maximum for the casings.
(d) Stuffing boxes shall be equipped with lantern rings,
t• ,.anal glands and bolts, shall be bronze or stainless steel. Mechanical
seals will be acceptable.
I 27-3
'I
' (e) Pump selections are based upon equipment specified
and shall be adjusted to any other proposed equipment before sub-
mitted. Cost of any electrical .changes ,occasioned by such changes
shall be borne by the Contractor.
• (f) Pumps shall be as manufactured by Paco, Buffalo, Chicago
or approved equal.
27=08. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS:
(a) Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings, quiet-
' operating extended surface type unit conditioners. Units shall be
complete with fans; fan motor, drive, chilled water coils,.hot water
coils, drain pans, waste connections with bronze cylindrical screens
which shall be easily accessible for cleaning, pipe, duct connections,
etc. Drain pans shall have full size drain opening and shall be ample
height and area to guard against overflow or drip. Tip speeds of all
fans shall be low enough to insure quiet operation. Internal insula-
• tion shall be 1" thick and vinyl or neoprene coated in cold sections
• and not less than 1/4" thick "vibro-damp" or approved equal in the drain
'
pans. Units shall have 10 ga. frame & 18 ga. panels.
(b) All units shall be as manufactured by Temtrol, Inc:
of Okarche, Oklahoma, and shall be equal and similar to the Tem-
trol units shown and scheduled. Note special configurations sizes and
arrangements shown.
' (c) Filters shall be of the size, type and capacity scheduled
on the drawings and shall be as manufactured by Cambridge, American
Air Filter or approved equal.
i' (d) Units shall be served with trapped drain pipe to:_.OSD,
chllled.and hot water.p ping and ductwork. !Units. shall be mounted
on rubber -in -shear vibration isolators.
' (e) See the unit schedule for sizes-, capacities and charac-
teristics of units.. Units shall have the components and shall be of ` the arrangement indicated on the Drawings. Units shall have access
panels and/or sections as called for on the..Drawings.
(f) Cooling coils shall be aluminum fin on copper tube, An!
rated.
27-09.. REHEAT COILS:.
' (a) Reheat coils shall be as manufactured by Trane, Carrier,
York or approved equal. Coils shall be copper tube with aluminum fin
shall be for use with hot water and shall be of the size, type and
capacity scheduled on the Drawings.
27-10. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install, on the. tntake
and discharge of all ventilating fans and air conditioning units, a
-.flexible connection held in. place with band iron frame, securing
bolted so as to be substantially airtight. Flexible material shall
' 27-4
shall be a heavy glass fabric double coated with neoprene as manu-
factured by Ventfabrics, Inc.
27-11. DUCTWORK:
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and completely erect all
supply, exhaust, return and outside air ducts, risers, branches, etc.,
as necessary to make the complete systems as shown on the Drawings.
All ducts shall be fabricated of Keystone, Tennessee, or approved
I equal, prime galvanized lockforming quality steel sheets., of gauge
in accordance with the following table.
(1) Ducts with the longest side not more than twelve
inches (12") in width - number twenty-six (#26) gauge.
(2) Ducts with the longest side thirteen inches (13")
to twenty-four inches (24) in width - number twenty-four (#24) gauge.
(3) Ducts with the longest side twenty-five inches
'
(25") to thirty inches (30") in width with one inch by one inch by
one -eighth inch (1" x 1" x 1/8") angle bracing four feet (4')
from joint - number twenty-four (#24) gauge.
(4) Ducts with the longest side thirty-one inches
(31") to forty inches (40") in width with one inch by one inch by
one -eighths inch (1" x I" x 1/8") angle bracing four feet (4') from
• joint - number twenty-two (#22) gauge.
(5)Ducts with the longest side forty-one inches (41")
' to sixty inches (60") in width with one and one-half Inch by one
and one-half inch by one -eighth inch (1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8") angle
bracing four feet (4') from joint- number twenty-two (#22) gauge.
' (6) Ducts with the longest side over sixty inches (60")
in width with one and one-half inch by one and one-half inch by ' one -
eighth inch (1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8") angle bracing two feet (2')
from joint or diagonal - number twenty (#20) gauge.
(b) All horizontal ducts'shall be rigidly supported from
the structure by means of strap hangers.
(c) Ducts shall be installed to leave sufficient head room
in all cases, and where it becomes necessary to change the size or
shape of a duct to conform to structural or architectural conditions-,
the Architect must be consulted for resizing or re-routing.
' (d) Workmanship must be careful, accurate and neat. All
longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh lock seams, and all cross
.joints shall be "S" drive pocket or bar slip type not to exceed
' seven feet (7') on centers. All uninsulated ductwork shall be
strenghtened by diamond crimping of the sheets.
I
(e) Where internal insulation is called for, the sheet
metal duct sizes shown are actual sizes and do not need to be in-
creased. ., -
' (f) All underground ductwork shown on the drawings shall be
' 27-5
I
factory fabricated high velocity spiral conduit with 20 gauge factory
fabricated -welded fittings as manufactured by United Sheet Metal
Company or approved equal. Conduit shall be galvanized steel of a
standard gauge recommended by the manufacturer for the various sizes
but not less than 26 gauge for 8" and smaller, 24 gauge for 9" through
22" and 22 gauge for 23" through 36". Joints shall be slip type
and with adequate overlap and shall be made up with adhesive and
three sheet metal screws and tape as recommended by the manufac-
turer. All ells shall have a radius equal to one and one-half D
except that R may equal D where space precludes the use of the lon-
ger radius. All transitions, boots and rectangular plenums under
ground ductwork shall be water proof with two layers of fifteen
pound felt mopped on with hot asphalt. Ductwork shall then be en-
cased in 3" minimum of concrete all around by General Contractor. Rectan-
gular ducts shall be 18 ga. w/same coating & encasement.
27-12: FIRE DAMP€RS:
(a) Furnish and Install Underwriters' approved and labeled
fire dampers with fusible links where shown on the Drawing$. Pro-
vide factory fabricated insulated access doors to all fire dampers,
of such size and in such a location as provide easy and adequate access
to damper. Design and installation of fire dampers and their access
doors shall be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 90A. Fire dampers
and access panels shall be Ruskin or approved equal. Dampers shall
be independently supported by being encased in a 14 gauge (minimum)
sleeve which shall be anchored to the wall with l-i/2"xl-l/2"x10
gauge (minimum) mounting angles on each side of wall. Duct
shall connect to sleeve on each side with breakaway joints. In-
stallation shall comply with SMACNA details and damper manufacturer's
instructions. The angles shall extend on all four sides of the ducts
and shall be neatly mated at the corners. The Contractor shall co-
ordinate with the General Contractor so that wall openings around
ducts at dampers are held or filled back to provide only the clear-
ances called for in the SMACNA details. All fire dampers shall be
•type "8".
27-13. SMOKE DAMPERS:
' (a) Smoke dampers shall be Ruskin model CD45 or approved
equal, all aluminum with gasketed blades and special corrosion proof
bearings and shaft materials and shall have a leakage factor when
' closed of no more than 10 CFM per square foot at 4" static pressure.
Dampers shall be arranged for the installation of normally closed,
pneumatic motors which will be furnished and installed by the tem-
perature controls sub -contractor.
27-14. SPLITTERS:
' (a) At all places in conventional ductwork where branch
ducts take off a main trunk or where a duct divides, furnish and
install splitters of number sixteen (#16) gauge galvanized iron
' securely fastened to a square operating rod, and with the edges M?!
_lined with felt. If the duct is not accessible, the operating
handle shall be extended and the damper regulator installed on the
' face of the finished, surface..
' 27-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
H
I
I
I
27-15. TURNING VANES:
(a) All turns and bends indicated on the plans as square
elbows shall be fitted with turning blades accurately spaced and
securely supported in place. These shall be factory fabricated,
selected as to number and dimensions from the manufacturer's stan-
dard size selection chart, or they shall be fabricated on the job to
a detail approved by the Architect.
27-16. AIR CONTROL DEVICES:
(a) Furnish and install behind each sidewall supply regis-
ter, a Barber -Colman Company's Velocitrol or Tuttle and Bailey's
Santrol, or approved equal, sized to exactly fit the duct opening.
27-17. GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS:
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install all
ceiling
outlets,
supply, exhaust
and return grilles and registers
and air
control
devices, as
are indicated on the drawings and specified
herein.
(b) Titus
designations are user, In the following
descrip-
tions of
equipment.
Equal and similar equipment by Tuttle
and
Bailey
and Krueger
will
be acceptable.
Cc) All ceiling diffusers, unless otherwise noted, shall
be Titus TXS or approved equal with perforated faceplate in off-white
finish, 24"x24" size for lay -in tee -bar ceiling. Units shall have field
adjustable air pattern controllers and opposed blade volume dampers.
All air pattern controllers shall be sat for four-way distribution
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
(d) Where noted, ceiling diffusers shall be round and shall
be Titus TMA, or approved equal, adjustable pattern with off-white
finish and opposed blade volume damper.
(e) Ceiling return and exhaust air grilles shall be Titus
23RL or approved equal with 45° deflection horizontal blades and
off-white finish. Ceiling grilles shall be lay -in type when one
dimension is 24" or 48" and not be lay -in type when neither dimension
is 24" or 48".
(f) Ceiling return and exhaust air registers shall be Titus
23RS5 or approved equal with 45° deflection horizontal blades, -op-
posed blade damper and off-white finish:. Ceiling registers shall
be lay -in type when one dimension is 24" or 48" and shall not be
lay -in type when enither dimension is 24" or 48".
(g) Sidewall supply registers shall be Titus model 272FS5 or
approved equal double deflection grilles with opposed blade damper.
Off-white finish.
(h) Door louvers will be furnished and installed by the
General Contractor.
1 ,
27-7
I
(i) Sill and floor supply air registers shall be Titus model
CTH-1500, extruded aluminum bar -type heavy duty floor return regis-
ters with 0° deflection, 1/8"x5/8" fixed bars and AG -35B opposed blade
damper installed in duct. Furnish with border style type..6, installed
' in window stools (stools by General Contractor) per Titus installation
detail FS -8. The grilles shall be continuous for the length of the
window stools and the portions of the grilles which are not active
' (active portions have duct connections with damper in duct) shall be
blanked off immediately behind the grille facewith twenty gauge;.gal-
vanized steel painted .:flat black. Grilles shall be extruded. aluminum
' bar type with "Enviro-Therm" finish in color selected by the Archi-
tect.
(j) Sidewall .return air and transfer grilles shall be Titus
I
model CTH-1600 extruded aluminum bar type heavy duty grilles with
15° down deflection, 1/8"x5/8" fixed bars with 1/4" spacing, type 5
• border style, "Enviro-Therm" finish in. color selected by Architect.
' (k) Sidewall return air registers shall be same as sidewall
return air grilles excerpt with AG -35 opposed blade damper.
' Cl) Attenuating boxes shall be Titus model ESV Series=3.000
or: approved equal boxes arranged for variable volume pressure .inde-
p'endent with copper tube aluminum fin hot water terminal reheat coils
' and.with capacities, including noise levels as.scheduled on the
Drawings.
' 27-18. OUTSIDE WALL LOUVERS:
(a) All outside wall louvers will be furnished and installed
by the General Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and
'
install birdscreen behind all louvers and shall make duct connections
to louvers where shown.
' 27-19. CHILLED WATER PIPING:
(a) All chilled water piping 3" and larger shall be standard
' weight black steel pipe assembled by welding with schedule 40,long
radius black steel welding fittings. All chilled water piping.2-1/2"
and smaller shall be assembled with 150# malleable iron screwed
fittings and shall be standard weight black steel pipe. At the Con-
, tractor's option, all chilled water piping 1-1/2" and larger may. be
welded as specified above instead of screwed.
' 27-20. HOT WATER PIPING:
(a) All hot water piping shall be as specified above for
chilled water piping except that, where noted on the Drawings (generally
small and relatively small piping to reheat boxes located outside of
T8jneFgVSB@ent room), hot water piping shall be type 'L' hard temper
assembled with wrought copper sweat -type fittings using
' "Easy -Flo" or 95/5 solder and a suitable flux.
27-21. WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES:
(a) Furnish and install, in connection with the water
' 27-8
I
piping systems, the following specialties:
H
I
I
I
I
I
(1) The expansion tanks shown on the drawings
shall be closed, welded steel tanks, constructed for 125 P.S.I.
and shall be so labeled. The tanks shall have the capacity as
scheduled on the Drawings, and shall be connected to the piping
system in accordance with the diagram on the Drawings.
(2) Relief valves shall be Bell & Gossett, or
approved equal, 30 psi ASME spring operated side outlet type valves.
The outlets of the valves shall be piped to an open site drain. The
valves shall be sized for system capacity.
(3) The Contractor shall furnish and install, in cold
water make-up piping as shown, water pressure reducing valves which
shall be Bell & Gossett Series 12 or an approved equal. The valves
shall be designed to automatically keep the system filled with
water. The valves shall incorporate built-in strainers.
(4) Automatic air venting. devices shall be Bell &
Gossett 0162 air vent valves or approved, equal and shall be in-
stalled at all high points of the system and where indicated. Ex-
tend 1/4" copper tube drains to the nearest approved point of
disposal.
(5) Manually operated air venting devices shall
be 1/4" manual brass petcocks, located in easily accessible lo-
' cations, in 1/4" copper tubing from the vent point to the disposal
point and a manual vent point shall be adjacent to each automatic
vent location.
(6) Automatic factory set balancing devices shall
be installed at each hot water coil in ducts (not those in A.C. Units)
and at each attenuating box reheat coil. Devices shall be Griswold
auto -flow control valves or approved equal, factory calibrated and
guaranteed to limit flow variation to. plus or minus 5% regardless of
system pressure. For H.W. coils, devices shall be copper 3/4" size,
rated for 250 PSI and 400° service. All internal parts shall be
passivated stainless steel and valves shall be tamper proof once set.
(7) In the main city water makeup line serving all
equipment In the Boiler Room and the cooling tower, furnish and
install a reduced pressure backflow preventer of line size as
manufactured by Griswold, or an approved equal.
27-22. GAS, MAKE-UP AND DRAIN PIPING:
I
I
I
(a), The Plumbing Contractor will extend a gas and a water
make-up line to within three feet of all equipment requiring same.
The HV&AC Contractor shall make final make-upxater and gas con-
nections to all equipment. Valve all such connections (in addi-
tion to any factory valves on equipment).
(b) The Contractor shall pipe all equipment with drain con-
nections •to an open site drain or to an otherwise approved point of
disposal. The low points of all piping systems shall have drain
27-9
I
I
valves and drain pipes which shall be extended to open site drains.
27-23. UNIT HEATERS:
' (a) Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings,
hot water unit heaters of the capacities scheduled. Heaters shall
be as manufactured by Trane or an approved equal.
(b) Heaters shall be horizontal type with propellar fan,
motor, adjustable discharge louvers, decorative steel casings,
copper tubed aluminum finned hot water heating coil.
27-24. AIR CURTAINS:
' (a) Furnish and install where shown on the Drawings at
the baggage doors, air curtain units of the size type and capacity
called for on the Drawings. Air Curtains shall be as manufactured
' by Bar -Brook, Mars or approved equal.
(b) Air curtain units shall be complete with fans, motors,
drives, air intake, flush ceiling air outlet, vibration isolation,
' supports, and all necessary auxiliaries and appurtenances including
controls to start a unit when its door starts to open.
• ' 21-25. INSULATION:
(a) Insulation shall be as manufactured by Owens-Corning
' Buston-Bacon, Armstrong or an approved equal. Where trade names
or catalog numbers are referred to, equal and similar materials will
be accepted.
' (b) All supply, return and outside air ducts in equipment
rooms and certain other return air ducts where noted on the Drawings
shall be insulated with internal insulation which shall be Owens-
Corning Aeroflex duct liner 200-B, 1" thick, and shall be installed
as recommended by the manufacturer except that both the recommended
adhesive and Stic-Klip fasteners shall be used on all four sides
(includes bottom) of all size. ducts. Duct sizes shown are actural
sheet metal dimensions and need not be increased because of-_i-atet.nal
Insulation.
' (c) All rectangular supply, return and outside air ductwork
not specified to be internally insulated shall be externally insu-
lated with Owens-Corning Fiberglas 704, 4.2 pound density, vapor seal
' duct insulation 1" thick board FF facing, and shall be attached with
Stic-Klip fasteners secured by Miracle adhesive or approved equal.
Fasteners shall be spaced on 24 inch maximum spacing and adhered in
accordance with fastener manufacturer's recommendations. All joints
'
and breaks in facing shall be sealed with 1/8 inch thickness.of
vapor resistant mastic, reinforced with 'Glasfab'.
(d) The chiller, the boilers and the AC Units shall be
factory insulated as herein before specified. Underfloor ductwork
shall not be insulated.
(e) All round ductwork above the floor shall be insulated
I
27-10
with 1-1/2" thick 3/4# -density foil faced fiberglas blanket applied
' in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with
all joints sealed vapor tight.
' (f) Chilled water pump shall be insulated with Owens-Corning
Fiberglas 25 ASJ Equipment Insulation, 2 inches thick with factory
installed vapor barrier one side. Boxes of insulation board with vapor
barrier side out shall be fitted around the pumps and split to coin-
' tide with the splits in the pump casings. All voids between pump and
box shall be fitted with Fiberglas blanket tamped in. The boxes
shall be covered with 20 gauge galvanized sheet.metal. The sections
'of the boxes shall be held and drawn together by bolts. At the joints
between the sections, the insulation shall be protected by means of
metal bands around each section formed to provide a vapor sealed tele-
' scopic fit.
(g) Boiler stacks up to roof shall be insulated with 2" thick
calcium silicate block held in place by galvanized poultry wire and
' finished with two coats of finishing cement, the second coat of which
shall be trowelled to a smooth finish and shall have an 8" canvas
jacket.
' (h) AC Unit drain lines shall be insulated with 1/2" thick
Armstrong type FR Armaflex applied in accordance with the manufac-
' turer's recommendations with all joints sealed vapor -tight. _
(1) Expansion tanks shall be insulated with Owens-Corning
Fiberglas 25 ASJ Equipment Insulation, one inch thick with factory
t installed vapor barrier one side. After vessel is in place, insulation
with vapor barrier side out shall be scored and fitted to vessel surface
and held in place with 1/2 inch galvanized steel bands on approximately
' one foot centers. All seams and crevices shall be filled and pointed
up. smoothly with vapor barrier adhesive to insure continuous vapor
barrier. After mastic has set up 1 inch galvanized hex mesh shall be
fitted neatly over insulation and wired in place. A 1/2 inch coat of
insulating cement with Portland added shall be troweled smoothly over
the insulation. After cement has dried, insulation shall be finished
with pre -sized glass cloth adhered with lagging adhesive.
' (j) All chilled water supply and return lines shall be insu-
lated.with Owens-Corning Fiberglas 25 ASJ/SSL molded sectional pipe
' insulation 1-1/2" thick, with factory applied vapor barrier jacket.
Sections of insulation shall be applied to clean dry pipe with all
joints firmly butted together. All laps, edges, and abutments of the
jacket shall be vapor sealed with factory applied ASJ/SSL butt/strips.
Insulation shall .be secured with factory -made aluminum bands applied
three per section. All chilled water piping outdoors, both above
and below ground shall be insulated with 1-l/2" thick foam glass
' applied In strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and the pipe insulation above ground outdoors shall be finished
with Childers Products Company 0.016" thick aluminum jacketing.
' (k) All. hot water heating piping 'shall be insulated as
specified above for chilled water piping except that insulation
shall be 1" thick.
1
27-11
1
I
I
I
I
I
H
I
I
1
C
1
I
I
1
I
I
I
(1) No insulation shall be applied until the piping sys-
tems to which it is applied have been completely tested and ap-
proved for the application of insulation materials.
(m) All surfaces to be insulated shall be thoroughly
cleaned before any insulation is applied. All surfaces shall
moreover, be dry when insulation is applied.
27-26. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS:
(a) Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary for the proper installation of an automatic.temperature
control system as herein specified.
(1) The control system shall be two pipe pneumatic,
or two pipe pneumatic-electrinic, as indicated.
(2) Complete air piping shall be provided for all
control apparatus. Pipe generally shall be seamless copper
tubing, Type 'L', hard drawn. Fittings shall be brass or copper
solder joint type except at connections to apparatus where brass
compression type fittings shall be used. PVC tubing may be used
in concealed accessible locations, for final connections in units
and where run in conduit.
(3) All piping in finished areas shall be concealed.
Pipes shall be rack side by side and not field cabled together so
that individual pipes can be traced. PVC tubing in concealed
accessible locations shall be properly grouped, supported and run
at right angles to building lines.
(4) Piping shall not be run concealed under duct
insulation, inside of ducts or In direct contact with surfaces -
colder than normal temperatures, such as outside air ducts, con-
ditioned air supply ducts, etc.
(5) All piping shall be properly supported and
installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Adhesive type pipe
hangers or wire shall not be permitted.
(6) Furnish and install a duplex air compressor,
sized to handle the load while one compressor is operating no
more than one-third of the time. A direct expansion type mois-
ture separator shall be furnished with the air compressor as a
refrigerated air dryer. Atmospheric dewpoint of this unit shall
be least minus twelve degrees F. (-12°F.). The compressor shall
have sleeve or ball bearings in grooved flywheels with V -belt
drives. It shall be equipped with a fully automatic lubricating
system and all parts shall be enclosed to prevent loss of oil.
The compressor shall be provided with an intake air cleaner, dis-
charge stop valve and pressure relief valve. The relief valve,
placed between the compressor and the discharge stop valve, shall
be set for a pressure of ten pounds (10#) per square inch above the
control switch cutout pressure. Intake air cleaners shall be of
the cleanable impingement type.• The compressor shall be equipped
with belt guards and motor starters.
I
27-12
I
' (7) The Temperature Controls Subcontractor shall pay
the Electrical Contractor for all wiring in connection with the
temperature control system. The Electrical Contractor shall do all
' manual and interlock wiring.
(8) The control system herein specified shall be free
from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and
service. If, within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance
by the Architect, any of the equipment herein described is proved
to be defective in workmanship or material, it will be replaced and
repaired free of charge.
(9) After the completion of the installation, the
Temperature Control Subcontractor shall regulate' and adjust all
thermostats, control valves, motors and other equipment provided
under this Contract. He shall place them in complete operating
' condition subject to the approval of the Architect, provide any
service incidental to the proper performance of the temperature
control system under guarantees outlined above for a period of
(1) one year.
(10) The temperature control manufacturer shall pre-
pare six (6) copies of a complete set of piping and wiring diagrams
including all instructions and a detailed list of equipment.
(11) All automaticcontrol valves shall be furnished
by the temperature control manufacturer and installed by the
Mechanical Contractor.
(12) All automatic control dampers shall be furnished
by the temperature control manufacturer except as hereinbefore spe-
cified for smoke dampers. All dampers thus furnished under this
Contract shall be installed by the Mechanical Contractor. All
' motorized valves'and dampers shall be furnished with position indi-
cators.. Two -position valves are not acceptable except where specified.
All valves shall be spring return to the "fail safe" position. All
valves and dampers which operate in sequence shall have pilot operated
'positive positioners.
(b) Control Instruments:
' (1) Dampers shall be of the louver type with black
enamel finish and having welded steel frames. Blades shall have
' interlocking edges. The edges of all blades shall be felted if
the damper is to operate in outside air service, eigher as an
Intake or as a discharge damper. Damper blades shall have steel
' trunnions mounted in bronze sleeve or ball bearings. Dampers shall
not be more than forty-eight inches (48") in length between bearings.
All modulating dampers shall be of the opposed blade type. Blades
shall be not over ten.inches (10") in width.
' (2) The necessary relays shall be furnished and in-
stalled as required for the successful operation and sequencing
of the system herein specified. Enclosed cabinets shal"1 be pro-
vided for all relays, switches, terminal strips, transformers, etc.,
as required in the respective equipment rooms.
1
27-13
I
(3) All thermostats, whether room type or remote
bulb type, shall be two pipe, shall have adjustable set point and
fully adjustable throttling range, except as noted herein. Set point
'
adjustment.shal.l be easily accessible and throttling range adjustments
shall be concealed. Pneumatic room type thermostats shall incorporate
a restricted adjustment feature, concealed under the thermostat
' cover, which shall permit narrowing the operating range of the
thermostat •to any value desired, or to completely lock the thermo-
stat at
ttemperature. All room thermostats shall be equipped
with locking type attractive metal covers in finish selected and shall
have concealed adjustment and no thermometers.
' (4) All coil valves shall be unless otherwise indi-
cated, single seated with equal percentage contoured or V -ported
• plugs, ;and a range ability of at least thirty to one (30-1). All
valves shall have removable packing. Steam valves shall have two
psi maximum pressure drop and water valves shall have four psi
maximum pressure drop. •
(5) Provide 1-1/2" diameter air guages at all main and
!.,I branch line ports of all controllers and all operators except mixing
boxes and reheat coils.
(6) Provide 1-1/2" diameter temperature gauges at all sen-
sor ports to all controllers except mixing boxes and reheat coil valves.
(7) Furnish and install a local control panel for each
AC Unit, for the central refrigeration system and for the hot water
heating system. Each panel shall have a colographic diagram of the
system, shall house the controllers which shall be pre -wired to termi-
nal strips in the panel (sensors shall be remote), shall provide con-
tinuous read-out with 3" dial type instruments of outside air tem-
perature, return air temperature, mixed air temperatures, air temper-
ature leaving coils and fan discharge temperature for air handling
units, chilled water supply temperature and chilled water return tem-
perature for the refrigeration system and hot water supply and return
water temperature for the hot water heating system. Panels shall, also
indicate chilled water return temperatures at all air handlers. Panels
shall provide motor function indication by miniature pilot lights in
the appropriate panels of AC Unit motors, related exhaust fan motors,
pump motors, compressor motors and condenser fan motors.
27-27. FLEXIBLE DUCT WORK:
(a) Connections between duct work and attenuating boxes
shall be made with a short length of flexible round duct which shall
be the full size of the, run -out as noted on the drawings. Reduction
to box inlet connection shall be made at the box. Flexible duct
shall,have spring steel wire helix with water resistant inner -lining,
shall be insulated with the equivalent of 1" Fiberglas and shall be
vapor sealed outside the insulation.
(b) In order.to facilitate roughing -in for and final connec-
F• Lion to diffusers in..the exact locations where they are required. by
the reflected ceiling plans, the same type of flexible duct may be
• used for the vertical drop from a duct to a diffuser in lieu of
r.'• a sheet metal collar.
27-14
H
SECTION 28
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
C
I
I
(d) In no case shall a conduit be run within three Inches
' (3°) of steam or hot water pipes, except where such crowdings are
unavoidable, in which case a minimum of one inch (1") shall be
maintained.
(e) All conduit not embedded in concrete shall be secured
by means of approved pipe hangers, clamps, etc. Perforated strap
iron hangers will not be allowed.
(f) Conduits shall run without sags and shall pitch toward
boxes.
(g) Expansion fittings shall be installed at all building
expansion joints.
28-1
ELECTRICAL
SPECIAL NOTE:
Refer
to.
the
Supplementary General Provisions
Applicable to
Mechanical
and
Electrical Work.
28-01: SCOPE OF WORK:
(a) The work included under this Section of the Specifi-
cations consists of the furnishing of all labor, equipment, sup. -
plies and materials and the performing of all operations neces-
sary for a complete installation of an electrical system for light,
power and auxiliary systems, including all electrical outlets.
and connections shown or required for all motors and equipment
furnished under other Sections pf tie Specifications or by the
Owner.
28-02. GENERAL WIRING REQUIREMENTS:
(a) All wiring shall be installed in metallic raceways
using galvanized rigid conduit except where electrical metallic
tubing is, .permitted_ byLCode and ..except .that _ EMT shall not be run
in slabs on grade.
(b) All conduit which is run in finished areas of the
building shall be concealed. This Contractor shall avail himself
of the Architectural and Structural Drawings for information re-
lating to construction and finishes and shall be guided accordingly.
In unfinished areas, the conduit shall be run concealed where con-
struction permits; otherwise it may be run exposed. All exposed
conduits shall be neatly grouped with all lines running parallel
with or perpendicular to the building lines.
(c) All conduits where they enter panel boards or boxes
of any type, shall be secured in place by galvanized locknuts,
inside and outside, and bushings. All conduit ends shall be reamed
out after application of die, and shall be kept corked and dry
during construction. All conduit shall be swabbed out before
pulling wires. Bends shall be made with an approved bending device.
Li
G
I
(h) No conduit smaller than three quarter inch (3/4") shall
be used, except for switch legs with two wires and for outlets on
fixtures or one row of fixtures where no more than two wires are
carried.
(1)
All
underground conduit shall be painted with a heavy
'
coat of Phelan's
"B" asphaltum.
C
I
[1
I
I
I
11
I
(j) No wire smaller than No. 12 shall be used, except that
No. 14 may be used for control wiring.
28-03. ELECTRICAL SERVICE:
(a) The Contractor shall arrange with the local power
company for the service connections as indicated on the Drawings,
paying for any and all costs involved, and shall furnish and install
all equipment required.
(b) Electrical service voltage shall be 120/208 volt,
three phase, four wire.
(c)
Service
lines
shall
be
run as
indicated and
shall
Include all
facilities
required
for
a complete
installation.
28-04. TELEPHONE SERVICE:
(a) Telephone service conduits shall be installed as
indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall verify exact
service requirements with the telephone company, and shall fur-
nish and install all required appurtenances.
28-05. POWER AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: Out of sequence - see page
28-8 and 28-9.
28-06. LIGHTING PANELBOARDS:
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install lighting panel -
boards, as indicated and scheduled on the drawings. Panelboards
shall be sequence phased, with main breakers or main lugs as scheduled.
(b) Branch breakers shall be of the bolted type. Multiple
pole breakers shall have one operating handle.. Breakers shall be
puick-make, quick break, thermal magnetic type.
(c) Panelboards shall bear UL label.
(d) Panelboards shall be recessed or surface mtd. as indicated.
(e) Panelboards shall be for one hundred twenty - two hundred
eight (120/208) volt service, and shall be G. E., Westinghouse,
Square 'D' or approved equal and shall be equal and similar to
Square '0', Type NQOB.
28-07. CABINETS:
(a) Cabinets for flush or surface mounting, as indicated,
shall be furnished and installed for all lighting panels, telephone
28-2
cabinets and elsewhere as indicated.
(b) All cabinets shall be of galvanized code gauge steel
with overlapped welded corners with front edges turned over to
receive trim. Trim shall be'adjustable, shall be fastened to the
cabinets with toggle bolts, shall have a door with continuous hinge
and shall have a circuit directory on inside of door. The door shall
have a cylinder tumbler -type lock. On doors more than forty-eight
inches (48") high, a combination three (3) joint catch and lock shall
be provided.
1 (c) Telephone cabinets shall have a three-quarter inch (3/4")
marine plywood backing.
iI (d) All telephone cabinets shall have locks keyed alike.
All other cabinets shall be keyed alike but shall be different
' than telephone cabinets. Six (6) keys of each type shall be fur-
nished to the Owner.
28-08. DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
'' (a) The Contractor shall furnish and install, where shown
on the Drawings, fusible or non -fusible disconnect switches, as
shown. Switches shall have a NEMA, Type 1, enclosure for indoor use
and a NEMA, Type 3R enclosure for outdoor use. Switches shall be
of the heavy-duty type, horsepower rated, and shall be capable of
• accepting multiple padlocks.
(b) Disconnect switches shall be G. E., Westinghouse or
an__approved equal, equal to Square 'D' type HD.
' (c) Switches for one hundred fifteen (115) volt motors,
one -quarter (1/4).. horsepower and smaller, may be twenty (20) ampere
' tubmler type.
28-09. CONDUIT AND TUBING:
(a) Rigid galvanized steel conduit and EMT shall be equal
• to that manufactured by General Electric, National Electric, Triangle
Company or an approved equal and shall be UL labeled.
28-10. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES:
(a) For one hundred (100) cubic inches and smaller, standard
outlet boxes. For one hundred fifty (150) cubic inches and larger -
• constructed as specified for cabinets with covers of same gauge as
box with screws and bolts.
(b) Boxes shall be galvanized inside and outside with
galvanized covers.
' (c) All boxes shall be sized in accordance with the
National Electrical Code.
(d) On concealed conduit systems, the box cover shall be
28-3
I
I
I
I
1
•1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
securely fastened to the building construction, independent of
conduit system.
28-11. OUTLET BOXES:
(a)
Ceiling outlet boxes
shall
be four inch (4")
octagonal,
not less than
two
and one -eighth inches
(2-1/8") deep, with
lugs
or ears to
secure
covers and those
for
use with lighting
fixtures
shall be fitted
with
three-eighth.inch
(3/8") fixture stud,
fastened
to the back
of the
box.
(b) Outlet, boxes for switches and receptacles shall be
standard gang boxes, four inch by four inch by one and one-half
inches (4" x 4" x 1-1/2") deep.
(c) Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, or specified
otherwise hereinafter, outlet boxes shall be installed at the
following heights:
Wall Switches
4
feet
0
inches
Convenience receptacles
(Mount horizontal in brick
and vertical in dry wall &
tile and block)
1
foot
4
inches unless noted
Wall telephones
1
foot
4
inches unless noted
Public (pay) telephones
4
foot
6
inches unless
noted
Bracket lights, clock
outlets,
etc.
As
directed
(d) The Contractor shall carefully check the architectural
building plans and coordinate exact location of all outlets before
installation.
(e) Outlet boxes shall be as manufactured by Raco, Steel
City or Crouse Hinds.
28-12. MIRE AND CABLE:
(a) All wire used on this project shall be new copper
_wi_re and shall be delivered in standard coils. Conductors shall
be continuous without splices or welds throughout their length
between boxes. Conductors shall be permanently marked every two
feet (2') with the size, type and voltage, as well as the manufac-
turer's name and measurement marker.
(b) All lighting branch circuit conductors shall be
National Electrical Code, Type "TN", except as noted otherwise
on the Drawings.
• (c) All motor and panel feeder conductors shall be National
Electrical Code, Type "THW", except as noted otherwise on the Drawings
.or where instructed to match existing conductors.
(d) Conductors of number ten (010) and smaller shall be
solid members, unless otherwise called for. Number eight (#8) and
larger shall be stranded, except that all ground wires shall be
stranded.
28-4
I
I
I
I
n
I
I
LJ
H
I
I
(e) Colors of wires shall be, in all cases, selected to
conform to the National Electrical Code standards and all ground wires
shall be green.
(f) Conductors smaller than number twelve (#12) shall not
be used, except for control wiring, and that shall be not less than
number fourteen (#14).
(g) Twenty ampere branch circuit conductors feeding cir-
cuits with the first outlet more than sixty feet (60') or the last
outlet more than one hundred feet (100') from the panel, measured
along the conductor, shall be number ten (#10) wire to the first
outlet.
(h) All conductors in vertical conduits or raceways shall
be supported at intervals not greater than those called for in
the NEC.
(1) All conductors shall be terminated at solderless con-
nectors. All joints shall be made mechanically and electrically
secure and then soldered, or shall be made with approved solderless
connectors. Unless properly insulated by the connector, all joints
shall be taped with Okonite rubber tape.
(j) To equal quality of conductor insulation, equivalent
splicing technique using four (4) layers of Scotch No. 33 plastic
tape and "Scotchfil" is acceptable.
(k) All wire and cable shall be as manufactured by Okonite,
Triangle, General Electric, Rome or approved equal.
28-13. TESTS OF WIRE AFTER INSTALLATION:
' (a) Before final acceptance of the job, the Contractor shall
make insulation, voltage and load tests on all circuits. The instru-
ments required for these tests shall be furnished by the Electrical
Contractor. All loads shall be properly balanced on the phases of
the system.
' (b) If the tests indicate unsatisfactory material, work-
manship or performance, the Contractor shall remove, such defective
material and replace with new material at his own expense, and
shall correct defective workmanship and shall then conduct the
' same tests again, until the satisfactory character of the work
installed by him has been fully demonstrated to the satisfaction
of the Architect.
I28-14. WIRING DEVICES:
(a) Wiring devices shall be as manufactured by Arrow -Hart,
'
Pass and Seymour, General Electric or an approved equal and shall
be equal to the Arrow -Hart numbers below:
Single pole switches A -H #1991-I
Three way switches A -H #1993-I
28-5
I
' Four way switches A -H #1994-I
Duplex receptacles A -H #6739-I
Duplex weatherproof
' receptacles A -H #5760
Clock outlets A -H #7707
(b) Plates for all devices shall be stainless steel, equal
to the following Arrow -Hart numbers:
Single pole switches A -H #93071
I. Duplex receptacles A -H #93101
Telephone outlets A -H #93181
Blank plates A -H #93121
I28-15. SLEEVES AND INSERTS:
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install all sleeves
and inserts for all electrical work passing through, or attaching
to, walls, floors or ceilings.
' 28-16. EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEMS:
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install empty conduit
I. systems for telephone, paging and other systems as indicated. The
systems shall be complete with all required cabinets, pull boxes, etc.
(b) The Contractor shall consult the Telephone Company
and/or the Owner regarding their specific systems, and all work
pertaining thereto shall be subject to their final acceptance.
I. (c) In empty conduit systems the Contractor shall pull
in and leave galvanized pull wires or tapes for use by others.
(d) No fixtures, devices, cables, nor their installation,
shall be included in this work.
.28-17.CONTROL WIRING:
'
(a) In general, the Mechanical Contractor will furnish and
install all automatic temperature control devices required for
' their various systems or pieces of equipment, and they in turn will
pay the Electrical Contractor for wiring of same. The Electrical
Contractor shall do all power, manual control and interlock wiring.
' All control wiring, including low voltage, shall be in conduit.
28-18. LIGHTING FIXTURES:
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install a lighting
fixture on every outlet indicated. Fixtures shall be in accordance
with the designation on the plans and as specified in the schedule.
' (b) Should any designation be omitted on the drawings, the
fixture shall be of the same type as specified for rooms of similar
' usage.
(c) Fluorescent fixtures shall be complete with highpower
' 28-6
I
factor ballasts, suitable for operation with lamps scheduled.
Ballasts shall be of the lowest sound rating available for the par-
ticular lamp used and shall have that rating clearly marked on the
ballasts. Ballasts shall not exceed 90°C. operating temperature
in a 60°C. heat box.
(d) Ballasts shall be CBM-ETS, and UL listed, shall meet
all requirements of NEC.
(e) Ballasts shall be Advance "Kool Koil" Mark II or an
approved equal.
(f) Each fixture shall be furnished with the necessary sup-
porting devices including canopies, stems, plaster frames, yokes,
etc. and shall be cimplete with lamps.
.28-19. CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION:
(a) This Contractor shall furnish and install clearly
• marked identification for circuits as follows:
(1) Each lighting panel shall have a circuit index
located on the inside of the cabinet door. This index, shall have
each circuit identified, including the spares. The identification
index shall be typewritten and covered with a glass or plastic cover.
(2) Each switchboard, distribution panel and power
panel shall have individual circuit identification on each circuit.
This shall be in the form of engraved plastic labels.
(3) In the case of individual disconnect switches and
starters they shall each be identified by the use of embossed plastic
labels.
28-20. FUSES:
' (a) The Contractor shall furnish and install fuses as
scheduled on the drawings. Fuses shall be Bussman "Fusetrons",
except for service entrance fuses, where they shall be Bussman
' "Hi -Cap".
(b) Furnish to the Owner a complete set of spare fuses
consisting of three fuses of each size and type required on the
'job.
28-21. BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING:
' (a) The Contractor shall furnish and install the complete
system of branch circuit wiring from the lighting panels to the
' various outlets, including switch legs, all substantially as shown
on the drawings. If the Contractor desires to depart from this
arrangement, his layout shall be submitted for approval before
installation.
28-7
I
I
I
I
(b) The Contractor shall erect, set and connect all motors,
switches, starters and controls, furnishing all necessary supports,
inserts, etc., and shall leave all motors in a first-class operating
condition.
(c) Conduit connections to motors and equipment shall be
made with approved flexible conduit with the rigid conduit securely
fastened to the wall, floor, or other non -vibrating support. The
flexible conduit shall be weatherproof type, such as "Seal-Tite".
28-22. .HANGERS AND_SUP-PORTS:.
I.
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install all neces-
sary hangers, brackets, clamps, etc., as required to properly sup-
port all conduit without sag or undue strain.
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
71
I
(b) Cast "C" clamps, "U" straps or ring hangers, attached
to rods and/or brackets, and fastened to the building structure
by means of approved plates, shall be used for individual conduits.
(c) Where conduits are grouped together in a horizontal
:run, they may be supported by trapeze type hangers, constructed
:from channel or angle sections, suspended from steel rods. Per-
;forated straps will not be permitted.
.28-23. CLEANING:
(a) Interior of electrical equipment where dust, debris,
or foreign matter could come in contact with exposed electrical
,parts, either live or insulated, shall be thoroughly vacuum cleaned
immediately before testing, and again immediately before being
,,put into service.
GROUNDING:
(a) All electrical equipment Installed on the project shall
.,be properly grounded i.n strict accordance with section 250 of the
National Electrical Code.
(b) All grounding connections shall be by means of
solderless high-pressure connectors, such as a serrated bolted
:clamp, or split bolt and nut connector. The grounding wire shall
^extend through a proper conduit.
(c) All transformer cases, panels, switchboards, conduits,
etc., shall be connected to ground by means of fittings as described
above. No strap type grounding clamps will be permissible. Con-
nections which require bolting shall be made with Everdur washers
and nuts. All connections shall be made only after surfaces have
been cleaned or ground to expose virgin metal.
*** 28-05. POWER AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS:
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install power and
distribution panelboards as shown and scheduled on the Drawings. These
panelboards shall be the switch and fuse type. suitable for 208 volt,
3 -phase service and shall be 3 or 4 wire as shown.. Power panelboards
rr I
I
28-8
I
shall be Square 'D' Company's type QMB or approved equal. Fuses
shall be as specified in the paragraph entitled FUSES. Where
scheduled, panelboards shall include starters and controls as
scheduled. Panels shall bear the UL label.
(b) Main Distribution Panel shall .be, service entrance
rated, shall be braced for 75,000 amp interrupting capacity.. All
switches in main distribution panel over 400 amp size shall be
Square 'D' bolt -lock or approved equal.
28-25. PAGING SYSTEM:
(a) Furnish and install a complete paging system as shown
on the Drawings and specified herein. System shall be as manufac-
tured by Rauland, or an approved equal, and shall be equal to the
Rauland catalog numbers specified.
(b) All wiring shall be of the size and type recommended
by the manufacturer. All wiring shall be run in conduit. All
conduit shall be of the size required by the manufacturer but in
no case less than the size shown on the Drawings.
(c) Equipment rack shall be RP -1101. Preamplifier shall
be PRO103. Mike input transformers shall be R1050 (two required).
Amplifiers shall be TAX125. Mikes shall be 1265. Speakers shall
be Lowell -Osage L08P/8F5T with off-white finish and Lowell P8758
backbox. The remainder of the equipment rack shall consist of
blank panels. The system shall be suitable for the connection of
Musak. The system shall have four seperate volume controls for the
three seperate lobbies and the restuarant. Furnish and install all
' required auxiliaries and appurtenances for a complete system. Verify
the location of the two microphones with the managers of Skyways and
Frontier Airlines before Installation.
28-26. FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM:
(a) Furnish and install a complete fire detection and alarm
• system as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The system
shall be a non -coded, supervised, zoned, dual power source, low
voltage (24V) system equal to the Pyr-A-Larm system specified.
(b) All wiring shall be of the size and type recommended by
the manufacturer. All wiring shall be in conduit and conduit sizes
shall be as required by the manufacturer but in no case smaller than
those shown on the Drawings.
(c) The system does not include sensing protection for the
entire building. The system does include smoke detectors in the
return and supply air for all AC Units which shall sound an alarm
and stop the AC Unit and close the smoke damper on that AC Unit (dam-
per and pneumatic motor under section 27 and all wiring under this section). The system shall also include smoke detectors and heat
detectors of the ceiling type in certain selected rooms (primarily
storage rooms, as shown on the Drawings). Each AC Unit's detectors
and each room with a detector shall be on a seperate zone. When
an alarm given from any zone, a single unzoned alarm shall be
28-9
■
I
' transmitted by leased telephone line automatically to the main
City firestation.
' (d) Duct type smoke detectors shall be DA -4R ionization
type with integral alarm light and test switch and alarm and
trouble contacts. Ceiling smoke detectors shall be DI -2F ioniza-
tion type with integral alarm light. Heat detectors shall be
I
DT-135CPF. All of the ceiling smoke and heat detectors shall have
the necessary alarm and trouble contacts and shall be flush type.
Horns shall be HIF-S-24DC flush type. Remote trouble signal shall
' be RT-30 with light and silence switch. Main control unit shall be
CP-30 with one detector zone, one alarm zone, alarm and trouble
contacts and power supply to all zones and shall be installed with
t the necessary number of ZN-30 modules for the total zones on the
system, with BM -30 battery module with 24V gel type batteries with
4.5 amp hours, BC -30 battery charger, rectifier and transfer module,
MM -30 meter module and SM-30 alarm silence module with extra switch.
' Include an LP -30 for transmitting an alarm signal over leased
telephone line to the central fire station and an LLA-5 unit at
the central fire station, installed and connected as required. All
' of the above catalog numbers are based on Pyr-A-Larm System 3.
Approved equal equipment by other reputable manufacturers will be
acceptable.
1
L
L
L
I
I
I
I
I
U
28-10